PunchHomeHelp PDF

Users Guide
Architect 3D
Users Guide
Architect 3D Users Guide

2015 WD Encore Software, LLC, a subsidiary of WD Navarre Holdings, LLC and its licensors. All Rights
Reserved. Punch! Software, the Punch! Software logo, Architect 3D, PlantFinder, PhotoView, ClearView,
Cabinet Assistant, Roofing Assistant, Decorator Palette, IntelliDeck, Site Planner, Material Importer,
QuickStart, LogiCursor, AutoFraming, Framing Editor, Fireplace Assistant, Precision Lighting Planner,
Global Sun Positioning, Plant Importer, RealModel, Object Organizer, and 3D Custom Workshop are
trademarks or registered trademarks of WD Encore Software, LLC. SketchUp is registered trademark of
Trimble Navigation Limited Corporation. Microsoft Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft
Corporation. All other marks are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. RealModel
technology is protected by U.S. Patent No. 6,404,424.
This document, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under the terms of the license
agreement contained herein. Except as permitted by such license, no part of this document can be
reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of WD Encore Software, LLC. The
information in this document is furnished for informational use only and is subject to change without notice.
Encore Software, Inc. assumes no liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document.
First edition, 2015
Table of
Contents
Part 1: Nuts & Bolts 11

Welcome 13
System Requirements 13
Important System Settings 14
Installing Architect 3D 14
About This Guide 14
Integrated Help 15
Tool Tip Pop-Ups 16
Tips & Tricks 16
Training Center 17
Technical Support 18
Speed Tips 19
Display Settings 19
Setting the Units of Measurement 19
Setting the Scale 19
Check for Software Updates 19
About Punch! Product Providers 20
About Architect 3D 20
A Quick Tour 23
Title Bar 23
Menu Bar 24
Plan Tabs 24
Working Floor Button 24
Elevation Bar 25
Measurement Tools 25
View Icons 25
Zoom and Pan Toolbar 25
Edit Toolbar 26
Text & Dimension Toolbar 26
Properties Tab 27
Libraries Tab 27
Preview Bar 28
Status Bar 28
Interface Color Scheme 28
Build Green Information 29
Before You Draw 31

Starting a New File 31
Opening a File 31
Accessing the Sample Plans 31
Closing a File 32
Saving a File 33
Importing Files 33
Exporting Files 34
Printing Floor Plans 35
Plotter Print Service 37
Printing a 3D View Rendering 37
Working with Floors 38
Viewing in 2D & 3D 39
Viewing the 2D Plan 39
Customizing Visible Plans 39
Show Topography Lines 40
Zooming In and Out in 2D 40
Panning Across the 2D Drawing 40
Fitting Your Design to Your Current Window Size 41
Working with 3D Views 41
Using the 3D Cutaway Slider 43
Setting the Walk-Through Viewpoint Angle 44
Selecting Features in 3D 44
Drawing in 2D 47
2D Drawing Methods 47
2D Editing Methods 49
Using the Grid 50
AutoSnap and Alignment Options 51
Selection Filter 53
Text Font 54
Edit Text and Text Properties 56
Dimensioning 57
Dimension and Font Default Settings 61
The Virtual Ruler 64
Screen Colors 65
Adding 3D Features 67
Organizing Library Content 67
Using the ProjecTape 70
3D Objects Libraries 72
Editing 3D Objects 73
2D Symbols Library 74
Wall Accessories Library 75
Plants Libraries 76
Plant Inventory Bar 80
Viewing Hardiness Zones 80
Finding Plants 81
Growing the Landscape 83
Exporting a Landscape Quote 84
Applying Trims 85
Applying Paint and Color 86
Identifying Colors and Materials in 3D View 88
Applying Building Materials 89
Using the SmartWand 93
Working with QuickPalettes 94
Editing QuickPalettes 95
Adding a Visual Array 97
Building Rooms Using Templates 98
Contents
Creating New Templates 99
Part 2: From the Ground Up 101

QuickStart 103
Launching QuickStart 103
Show Welcome Screen at Startup 104
Project Settings 105
Adding Rooms 106
Viewing a QuickStart Design in 3D 107
Setting QuickStart Render Options 108
Accessing the Sample Plans 108
Foundation Plan Tab 111

Adding Stiffener Beams 111
Stiffener Beam Properties 111
Adding Foundation Piers 112
Foundation Piers Properties 113
Adding Post-Tension Strands 113
Drawing the Foundation Slope 113
Floor Plan Tab 115

Drawing Walls 115
Wall Properties 119
Changing Wall Segment Length 120
Automatic Flooring 121
Automatic Ceiling 122
Placing a Room Addition 123
Breaking a Wall 124
Adding Doors and Openings 125
Door Properties 127
Adding Windows 128
Window Properties 129
Placing a Staircase 130
Staircase Properties 132
Adding Railings 134
Railing Properties 135
Adding and Removing Flooring 135
Floor Properties 137
Adding Accessories 138
Wall Accessory Properties 138
Adding Cabinets 139
Cabinet Properties 140
Adding Columns 144
Column Properties 145
Editing Floor Properties 146
Adding and Deleting Floors 147
149
Electrical Plan Tab 151

Placing Receptacles 151
Adding Lighting 155
Light Properties 156
Adding a Ceiling Fan 158
Placing Phone and Cable Outlets 160
Adding Smoke Detectors 161
Adding Thermostats 162
4 Architect 3D Users Guide
Adding Home Theater Components 163

Adding Home Security Components 165
Adding Home Automation Components 170
Plumbing Plan Tab 175

Placing an Outdoor Hose Bib or Gas Bib 175
Adding Floor Drains 176
Placing Toilets 177
Toilet Properties 177
Placing Sinks 178
Sink Properties 179
Placing Bath Tubs 180
Bath Tub Properties 180
Placing a Shower 181
Shower Properties 182
Placing the Hot Water Heater 183
Roofing Plan Tab 185

Automatically Adding a Roof 185
Auto-Roof Properties 186
Adding a Predefined Roof Shape 186
Using the Freehand Roof Tools 188
Adding a Dormer 190
Creating a Dormer Cutout 193
Roof Properties 194
Adding a Skylight 195
Skylight Properties 195
Drawing a Gambrel Roof 196
HVAC Plan Tab 199

Placing Air Ducts 199
Air Duct Properties 199
Placing Vents and Registers 200
Adding Heating, Air Conditioning Units, and Pumps
203
Placing Heaters and Radiators 204
Heater and Radiator Properties 205
Deck Plan Tab
207
Adding a Deck 207

Deck Properties 210
Editing Deck Step Properties 210
Adding Custom Deck Railings 211
Railing Properties 211
Placing a Custom Staircase 211
Staircase Properties 213
Creating a Deck Cutout 213
Landscape Plan Tab 215

Defining the Property Line 215
Adding a Fill Region 217
Drawing a Patio 219
Patio Properties 219
Adding Outdoor Cabinets 220
Outdoor Cabinet Properties 220
Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways and Driveways 224
Pathway/Driveway Properties 225
Edging an Area 225
Contents
Edging Properties 226

Drawing Fences and Gates 228
Fence and Gate Properties 229
Drawing Retaining Walls 230
Retaining Wall Properties 231
Designing a Sprinkler System 231
Drawing Topography Objects 235
Topography Object Properties 236
Adding Slopes 237
Slope Lot Properties 237
Excavating Topography 238
Detail Plan Tab 239

Drawing Rectangles and Squares 239
Drawing Circles and Ovals 240
Drawing Lines 241
Drawing Polygons 241
Drawing Arcs 242
Drawing Circular Arcs 243
Drawing Multigons 243
Drawing Curves 244
Changing Curve Tension 245
Using Different Lines and Fills 245
Controlling Layers of Detail Shapes 247
Converting Details to Intelligent Features 247
Editing Detail Shapes 247
Filling a Shape with Plants 249
Framing Plan Tab 251

Adding Structural Components 251
Framing Beam 251
Framing Beam Properties 252
Floor Joist 252
Joist Properties 253
Framing Support Column 254
Support Column Properties 254
Customizing Wall Framing Properties 255
Customizing Roof Framing Properties 255
Customizing Staircase Framing Properties 256
Customizing Deck Framing Properties 256
Customizing Foundation Framing Material 257
Part 3: Drawing and Design Settings

259
Edit Your Design 261
Undo 261
Cut, Copy, and Paste 261
Nudging a Selection 262
Moving a Selection 262
Rotating a Selection 263
Flip and Mirror 263
Aligning Objects 264
Elevating Objects 264
Copy To Floor 266
Move To Plan 267
Move Entire Plan 267
Rotate Entire Plan 267

Flip Entire Plan 268
Control Your Design 269

Setting the Working Elevation 269
Setting the Scale 269
Setting the Units of Measurement 270
Defining Lot Properties 271
Update Topography Grid 272
Work on Floor 272
Calculate Floor Area 272
Floor Plan Image Trace 272
Design Options 274
Control 3D Options 277

Moving Around in 3D 277
Accessing the 3D Rendering Styles 281
Adjusting Rendering Quality 283
Accessing the Photo-Realistic Rendering Styles 284
Adjusting Photo-Realistic Rendering Quality 286
Setting Rendering Options 286
Setting Photo-Realistic Rendering Effects 287
Depth of Field Focus 289
Rendering 3D Effects 291
Adding Lighting and Shadows 292
Photo-Realistic Scene Lighting 293
Drawing Animation Paths 294
Previewing and Exporting Animations Paths 295
Animation Path Properties 296
Naming and Prioritizing Animation Paths 297
Using the Decorator Palette 298
Identifying Colors and Materials from the Decorator
Palette 298
Managing Decorator Palette Groups 298
Managing Decorator Palettes 299
Organizing Decorator Palettes 300
Customizing the 3D View 301
Saving a 3D View 301
Organizing Saved 3D Views 302
Preparing to Construct a RealModel 303
Defining Scale 304
Printing RealModel Templates 304
Constructing Wall Templates 305
Constructing Roof Templates 306
Printing Template Materials and Colors 306
Attaching Template Materials and Colors to Your
Model 306
Part 4: Design & Drawing PowerTools

307
Door Designer 309
Designing Custom Doors 309
Drawing Door Components 310
Door Component Properties 310
Editing Your Door Design 311
Flipping & Mirroring Objects 311
Contents
Controlling Drawing Settings 312

Using Snaps to Draw Components 312
Viewing your Drawing in 3D 313
Managing Door Designs 313
Placing Custom Doors In Your Punch! Drawing 314
Window Designer 317

Designing Custom Windows 317
Drawing Window Components 318
Window Component Properties 318
Editing Your Window Design 319
Using Snaps to Draw Window Elements 320
Managing Window Designs 320
Placing Custom Windows In Your Punch! Drawing
321
Ceiling Designer 323

Placing an Auto Ceiling 324
Drawing a Custom Ceiling 324
Custom Drawn Ceiling Properties 324
Drawing a Predefined Ceiling Shape 326
Hip and Gable Ceiling Properties 326
Barrel and Dome Ceiling Properties 327
Ceiling Beam Properties 328
Editing a Ceiling 328
Define Ceiling Elevations 329
Controlling Your 2D View 329
2D Drawing Colors 329
3D View Window Options 329
Navigating in 3D 329
3D Rendering Options 330
Selecting Render Style 330
Adjusting 3D Lighting 330
Using Templates 331
Fireplace Wizard 335

Fireplace Wizard 335
Defining Dimension Increments 337
Customizing the Fireplace Properties 338
Customizing the Face Dimensions 338
Customizing Hearth & Mantel Dimensions 339
Customizing the Chimney Dimensions 341
Moving around in Fireplace Wizard 342
Applying Material or Color to Fireplaces 342
Default Views 343
Saving a Fireplace 344
Exporting to 3D Custom Workshop 344
Mantel Designer 345

Mantel Designer 345
Drawing Mantel Shapes 346
Editing Your Mantel Design 346
Dental Mantel Face Properties 347

Using Snaps to Draw Window Elements 348
Tracing an Image 348
Controlling Your 2D View 348
LiveView Window Options 348
Navigating in 3D 348
Adjusting 3D Lighting 349
Using Templates 349
Exporting to 3D Custom Workshop 352
Pool Designer 353

Create a Pool Using Pool Wizard 353
Shaping your Pool 355
Pool Shape Properties 355
Defining the Depth of your Pool 356
Pool Depth Properties 357
Managing Your Pool Design 358
Adding a Ladder with Steps 358
Adding Ladder Rails without Steps 359
Adding a Hand Rail 360
Adding Steps 361
Adding Pool Equipment 363
Adding Pool Accessories 368
Controlling Your Working Plan Views 371
Controlling Elevations 371
Calculating Pool Volume 372
Using Snaps to Draw Objects 372
Applying Colors and Materials 373
Using Templates 373
Fence Designer 377

Designing Fences 377
Customizing Chain-Link Fence Properties 378
Customizing Ornamental Iron Fence Properties 379
Customizing Picket Fence Properties 380
Customizing Privacy Fence Properties 381
Customizing Rail Fence Properties 381
Freehand Detail Drawing 381
Editing Fence Shapes 382
Customizing Fence Materials and Color 383
File Management 383
Using Fence Designer Images in Your Project 384
Part 5: Enhancement & Customization

PowerTools 385
PhotoView and PhotoView Editor 387
Tips for Using PhotoView 387
Importing PhotoView Images 387
PhotoView Properties 389
Landscaping Using PhotoView Images 389
Right in Your Own Backyard 390
PhotoView Editor 391
Editing Your PhotoView Image 391
Editing Shapes 391
Contents
Editing Material Perspective 392

File Management 392
Estimator 395
Launching Estimator 395
Customizing the Spreadsheet 396
Selecting a Plan Tab 397
Calculating Construction Costs 398
Completing the Various Schedules 398
Creating a Master Pricelist 398
Exporting a Pricelist 399
Printing a Pricelist 399
Drawing Parallel Segments 431

Using Object or Point Selection Modes 432
Drawing from Corner or Center 432
Changing Grid Settings 432
Using Snaps to Draw CAD Objects 433
Viewing your Drawing 433
Exporting and Importing 433
Part 6: 3D Custom Workshop 435

Before You Draw in 3D 437
Trim Designer 401

Managing Trim Designs 401
Trim Properties 403
Designing Custom Trims 403
Flipping Objects 404
Viewing your Trim Design in 3D 405
Placing Custom Trims In Your Punch! Drawing 405
Section Detailer 407

Managing Section Details 408
Using 2D Drawing Tools to Draw Details 409
Adding 2D Symbols to a Detail 409
Using Rules and Fills 409
Adding Text to Details 410
Using Dimensioning Tools 411
Editing Section Detail Objects 411
Mirroring Objects 413
Duplicating Objects 413
Grouping Objects 414
Locking Objects 414
Drawing Parallel Segments 417
Using Object or Point Selection Modes 418
Using Snaps to Draw CAD Objects 419
Viewing your Drawing 419
Exporting and Importing a DXF/DWG File 420
Symbol Editor 423

Managing Symbols 423
Using 2D Drawing Tools to Draw Symbols 424
Adding Text to Symbols 424
Using Rules and Fills 424
Using Dimensioning Tools 424
Editing Symbol Editor Objects 425
Mirroring Objects 427
Locking Objects 428
Opening File and Objects 437

Saving a File 438
Saving to an Object Library 438
Exporting Files 439
Printing Objects 440
Drawing Grids 440
Setting a Nudge Distance 443
Elevation Slider 443
Tracing an Imported Image 444
Drawing 2D & 3D Entities 447

Switching Between 2D and 3D Tools 448
Drawing Shapes 448
2D/3D Shape Properties 462
Applying Materials 463
Applying Paint and Color 463
Controlling Application of Color or Material 464
Using AutoClick Placement 466
Using the Decorator Palette 467
Searching for Colors or Materials 467
Editing 2D & 3D Objects 469

Controlling Selection Mode 469
Selecting Points within an Object 470
Adding and Removing Points 470
Extruding a 2D Object 472
Revolving a 2D Object 473
Applying Skew 474
Rotating an Object 475
Elevation Slider 475
Specifying Object Size 476
Locking Objects in Place 476
Hiding Detection 476
Working in Layers 477
Moving an Object 478
Using Flip 479
Using Mirror 480
Controlling Views 483

Using Zoom 483
Contents
Using Perspective or Orthographic 3D Views 483

Using Different Views 484
Using 2D Views 486
Setting the 3D Camera Angle 488
Using Fly-Around 490

Controlling Default Colors 490
Using Nudge and the Grid 492
Contents
Contents
Part 1
Nuts & Bolts
Chapter 1:
Chapter 2:
Chapter 3:
Chapter 4:
Chapter 5:
Chapter 6:
Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Quick Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before You Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing in 2D & 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawing in 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding 3D Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
23
31
41
49
69
Chapter 1
Welcome
Architect 3D is a professional-level home design system developed for anyone who needs fast, accurate home
drawings and wants the flexibility to view and edit their plan in 3D.
Uses for Architect 3D include:
Architectural drawings
Presentations
Deck design
3D visualization
DXF/DWG Import and Export
Electrical plans
Framing customization
Interior design
Landscaping
Its simple to get started designing the home of your dreams. Take a few minutes to familiarize yourself with the
contents of this manual, so youll know where to quickly find the answers. Be sure to see A Quick Tour, which begins
on page 23 for an overview of the screen layout and a quick tour of the program.
For a basic overview of tools and techniques that youll use throughout the design process, see Drawing in 2D, which
begins on page 49.
A very important adjustment to make before beginning work with Architect 3D will be setting your display to 32-bit
color. To do this, right-click the Desktop, then click Properties on the pop-up menu. Click the Settings Tab on the
Display Properties dialog box, then select True Color (32-bit).
Please note that not all features in this Users Guide are available in every Punch! Software title.
Some features, Reflections, for example, are available only in Punch! Professional and Architectural
Series.
System Requirements
In order to run Architect 3D, it is recommended that you have a Pentium-based computer. In addition, your system
should include the following:
Windows Vista or higher
Intel or compatible 1.0 GHz processor or higher (multi-core processors supported)
1 GB of RAM
3.0 GB of Hard Disk Space
VGA Video Card displaying at least 1024x768 with 32-bit color
128 MB Video Card Memory
Internet access and Internet Service Provider account required
DVD-ROM drive (for media installations only)
13
Chapter
Welcome
Mouse with wheel recommended

Administrator privileges are required to properly install the program on Windows Vista or higher.
User is responsible for all Internet access fees and phone charges.
Important System Settings

Some of your computers settings can impact Architect 3Ds efficiency. By changing one (or more) of these settings,
you can control how the program performs.
Set your Display Settings to at least 1024x768 pixels and True Color (32-bit). Right-click your Desktop and choose
Screen Resolution from the context menu.
Note: Refer to your computers Help information for recommended display settings.
By default, the program determines the default Unit of Measure based on the computers location and regional
settings. To choose a different setting, click Design menu > Unit of Measure and choose the desired units from
the Measurement Units drop-down menu.
The recommended computer text size is 96 dpi. To configure the dpi settings, follow the steps based on your
operating system.
Windows 7 and above
1 Right-click the Desktop and choose Personalize.

2 Click Display at the bottom of the left pane and then click Set custom text size (DPI).
3 Ensure the DPI setting is 96 pizels per inch and then click OK.
Windows Vista
1 Right-click the Desktop and choose Personalize.

2 Click Adjust Font Size (DPI) in the left pane.
3 Select Default Scale (96 DPI) and then click OK.
Installing Architect 3D
To install Architect 3D, you must run Setup. You cant install or reconfigure Architect 3D by copying files directly from
the distribution DVD to your hard drive.
To install Architect 3D via DVD
1 Insert Architect 3D Installation DVD into your DVD-ROM drive. Installation begins as soon as you
insert the DVD.
2 Follow the installation prompts that appear.

Note: If installation did not begin when you inserted the Architect 3D Installation DVD into your
DVD-ROM drive, Autorun may be turned off on your computer.
To install Architect 3D if installation does not begin automatically
1 Insert Architect 3D Installation DVD into your DVD-ROM drive.

2 Navigate to your computer disk drives (for example, Start > Computer for a WIndows 7 operating
system).
3 Double-click the DVD-ROM drive (most computers will begin the installation at this point).
4 Double-click SETUP.
About This Guide

The text and graphics in this guide are tailored to help you find the information you need quickly and get the most out
of Architect 3D. Each section of this guide is divided into a series of step-by-step instructions, making it easy for you to
Integrated Help
scan a page to find exactly what you need. You can also refer to the index for additional topics on the same subject, if
necessary. You can access this guide quickly from the Help menu, or from any of the available tool tip pop-ups that are
displayed in the application.
Instructions for installing and using Microsoft Windows do not appear in this guide. If youre uncomfortable with your
knowledge of Windows or with the concepts associated with a user interface object, you should review Windows online
Help before attempting any serious work with Architect 3D.
Basic Terms
The following is a list of terms used throughout this guide. Take a moment to familiarize yourself with the language
used in this guide and to reinforce your understanding of basic terminology.
Click Pressing and releasing the left mouse button once.
Right-click Pressing and releasing the right mouse button once.
Double-click Pressing and releasing the left mouse button twice.
Click-and-drag Pressing the left mouse button, holding it down and moving the mouse, simultaneously.
Drag-and-drop Clicking to select an item, holding down the mouse button, then dragging and releasing.
Scroll Using the scroll bars on the sides of the application window by clicking the slider box, holding down the
mouse button and dragging.
Graphic Cues
This guide uses several types of graphic elements. Some show the window or a dialog box that is displayed during an
operation. When this type of graphic illustration is used, every effort is made to show the element exactly as it is
displayed on the screen.
Keyboard commands are visually called out in a different font; for example, SHIFT and ENTER.
Graphic Cues Used in this Guide
Convention
Meaning
mouse click that selects a point the number, when present, specifies the mouse clicks position in a
series of clicks
click and drag operation beginning of arrow indicates where to start; end of arrow indicates where to
stop
a right mouse click the number, when present, specifies the mouse clicks position in a series of
clicks
Integrated Help
There are various ways to access the help information provided with Architect 3D.
To access the users guide
Click Help menu > Users Guide (or press F1).
To access help for a specific part of your 2D drawing
Right-click the feature, object, or plant that you want help with and choose Help from the context
menu. The Users Guide open for the selection.
15
Chapter
Welcome
To access tutorial videos for a specific part of your 2D drawing
Right-click the feature, object, or plant that you want help with and choose Video Tutorial from the
context menu. The Training Center opens for your selection using your default web browser.
Tool Tip Pop-Ups

Tool tip pop-ups are displayed when you hover over most of the tools or buttons in the application. These tool tips
provide a quick description of the tool or button and in some cases, a preview is available to demonstrate the
functionality. Additionally, links to more detailed information in the User Guide or a video tutorial may be available as
well. Below is an example of the tool tip pop-up for the Room Addition Tool, which includes a preview and links to more
detailed information.
Descriptions are also displayed when you hover over an item in the design window. In some cases more information
may be available. For example, when hovering over a pathway, the material and area of the pathway is also displayed.
Tips & Tricks
The tool tips settings are controlled in the Preferences window.
Show descriptions of items in the design checkbox turn on or off the

pop-up descriptions when hovering over items in the design window.
Show Advanced Tool Tips checkbox turns on or off the tool tips.
When selected, tool tips are displayed.
Pop-up Delay controls how long you need to hover over a tool or button before the pop-up is displayed.
Note: You can keep the pop-up open by moving the cursor over the pop-up window after it
appears.
To access tool tip settings
Click Edit menu > Preferences > User Interface and edit the Tool Tip Options as needed.
Tips & Tricks

Architect 3D makes it easy to get started by providing users with tips and tricks for each tool. Tips & Tricks provide
information about each tool and some general information about the program.
To access tips & tricks for a part of your 2D drawing
Right-click the feature, object, or plant that you want help with and choose Tips at the top of the
context menu. The Tips & Tricks menu for that feature, object, or plant is displayed.
Click Back or Next to cycle through the tips available for that feature, object, or plant.
Training Center
You can get started easily with Architect 3Ds Step-by-Step Tutorials. They are available at all times, in the Training
Center. Also available in the Training Center are videos showing exactly how most tools function.
To access the video tutorials and tooltips
1 Click Help menu > Training Center. The Training Center is displayed in your default web browser.
The topics are displayed on the left side of the window, organized into categories.
2 Click to expand Tools or Tutorials and then choose a category to display the cascading list of
videos available.
3 Click the video you want to view and the video is displayed.
17
Chapter
Welcome
Note: (optional) You can download the corresponding tutorial drawing by clicking the link below the
video; save the file to a location on your computer and then open the drawing file.
When you call, you should be in front of your computer, with the program running, and have the above information
handy. The technical support contact information can be located at the Customer Support Center -
http://support.encore.com.
Speed Tips
You can Speed Up Architect 3D by changing some of the program's settings.
Close the 3D View window when you are not working in 3D. No 3D calculations are performed when the 3D View
window is closed.
Turn off shadows. For more information, see Adding Lighting and Shadows, which begins on page 286.
Hide floors that are not active. Turning off inactive floors means the program will not waste resources on them.
Decrease the render qulality. Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Rendering Options. The Design Options dialog
box is displayed with the Navigation & Render Quality options displayed. The lower the render quality settings, the
faster 3D View renders your design.
(alternatively) Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Final Quality Options > Low.
Hide unused 3D objects. Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Rendering Options > Visible 3D Elements.
Deselect unneeded elements to hide them in the 3D view and then click OK.
Display Settings
Architect 3D is designed to run effectively, based on the system requirements printed on the software packaging and
noted on the softwares website. However, there are some specific settings you can select to obtain the best display
possible.
To adjust your display settings
1 On the Start menu, click Control Panel. The Control Panel program group is displayed.
2 If Category view is active, under Appearance and Personalization click Adjust screen resolution
and then click Advanced settings.
If Icon view is active, click Display and then click Screen Resolution > Advanced settings.
3 On the Monitor tab, choose True Color (32-bit) from the Colors drop-down menu and then click OK.
(optional) Adjust the Resolution to at least 1024x768 pixels.
4 Click OK and close the Control Panel window. The new window settings are applied. You may be
prompted to restart your computer to apply the new settings. If so, click OK or Yes.
Setting the Units of Measurement

You can set units of measurement by selecting either English or Metric measurements. You can also set the default
measurements and options to be applied when any previously-drawn design is opened. For more information, see
Setting the Units of Measurement, which begins on page 264.
Setting the Scale

Scale is the ratio between real-world size of objects and items in your drawing and their size when printed. For more
information, see Setting the Scale, which begins on page 263.
Check for Software Updates

By default, the software checks for newly available updates upon startup. You can also disable this and manually
check for software updates to make sure youre using the most recent version available.
About Punch! Product Providers
To disable automatic updates at startup
1 Click Edit menu > Preferences. The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
2 Click User Interface and, under the Startup section, deselect Automatically check for updates
and then click OK.
To enable automatic updates at startup
2 Click User Interface and, under the Startup section, select Automatically check for updates and
then click OK.
To check for software updates
1 Click Help menu > Check for Updates. If updates are available, the Punch! Updater is displayed
with a summary of the update.
2 Click Install to install the update.

3 When the download completes, click OK and restart the application.
About Punch! Product Providers

You can access information about each manufacturer of name-brand content, for example, materials, paint, or flooring.
To access information about product providers
1 Click Help menu > About Punch! Product Providers. The About Punch! Product Providers dialog
box is displayed.
2 Click a product providers name to read information about them, and then click OK to close the
window.
19
Chapter
Welcome
About Architect 3D
You can access your serial number or check the version of your program, with one click, at any time.
To access your serial number
1 Click Help menu > About Architect 3D. The programs splash screen is displayed.
2 Click Close to close the window.
About Architect 3D
21
Chapter
Welcome
Chapter 2
A Quick Tour
To get the most benefit from Architect 3D, you should take a minute to become familiar with the layout of the Punch!
drawing space, plan tabs, and toolbars.
In most cases, detailed information on standard Windows concepts or on specific menu items is not provided here. For
information on standard Windows concepts, such as the mouse, the Control menu, the window border, the maximize
button, dialog box controls, and other standard computer functions, refer to Windows online Help.
Title bar
Menu bar
2D & 3D
View icons
Plan tabs
Properties Libraries
tab
tab
Pan & Zoom

tools
Edit toolbar
Working
floor button
Elevation
bar
Plan toolbar
Libraries
drop-down
Content
drop-down
Design window
Preview bar
3D Quarter View
Visual Array
tool
Text &
Dimension
tools
3D Cutaway Slider
Plant inventory
bar
Viewpoint icon
ProjecTape
tool
Animator tool
Status bar
Title Bar
The title bar extends across the top of the application window. It displays the name of the program and the name of the
current drawing file. Using the buttons at the right end of the title bar you can minimize, maximize, close, or restore the
window. You can also maximize or restore a window by double-clicking on the title bar. Double-clicking the Control
menu box at the left end of the title bar is a quick way to exit. If the application is running in a window, rather than
maximized, dragging the title bar moves the entire window on the desktop.
23
Chapter
A Quick Tour
Menu Bar
You can choose menu items using either the mouse or the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the menu name; when
the menu drops down, click the item you want. Menu items with an arrow to the right display cascading menus when
you place the pointer over one of them. When you highlight a menu item, a description is displayed on the Status Bar.
To use the keyboard, press ALT and type the underlined letter in the menu name, then type the underlined letter in the
menu items name. If there is a cascading menu, you must type another letter. You can also use the arrow keys to
move through menu items and press ENTER to select one. Pressing ESC backs out of the menu items one level at a
time.
There are single-key or key combination shortcuts for certain frequently-used menu items. Each menu lists available
shortcut keys to the right of the items name. You can use the techniques for choosing menu items in combination.
Plan Tabs
Architect 3D utilizes a collection of layers, which are accessible by clicking the tabs along the top of the design window.
Clicking a plan tab accesses a set of tools that you can use to design your floor plan; for example, clicking the
Electrical tab accesses outlets, switches, and ceiling fans, while clicking the Landscaping Tab accesses tools for
edging, fencing, ground fill, excavation, and so on.
Tip: You can also change plans by clicking Design menu > Work on Plan and choosing the plan you want.
Once placed, each component, such as a door, window, plant, or outlet, can be altered at any time. Click the
component and its properties are displayed on the Properties tab (a default that can be changed) where the
customizable properties of that component are available.
You can further customize which plan layer or combination of plan layers you want to be active. In addition, you can
make each plan layer a different color, so you can tell at a glance which layer a specific feature is on. You can even
move some of the components to a different plan, when necessary.
By controlling which plan tabs are visible at any time, you are also controlling which layer(s) will be printed. For
example, if you just want to print your electrical plan, you can turn off all other layers and just print that one.
For more information, see Customizing Visible Plans, which begins on page 41.
Working Floor Button

Use the Working Floor button to switch the current view, based on the number of floors in your home plan. For more
information on working on different floors, see Work on Floor, on page 266.
The Floor button also provides access to floor management options to control existing and new floors. For more
information on adding and inserting floors, see the chapter titled Working with Floors, which begins on page 38.
Elevation Bar
Elevation Bar
With Architect 3Ds Elevation Bar you can easily place the selected item(s) to any level, including those that you have
previously drawn. In addition to making sure windows, doors, and other components are placed at the correct
elevation, you can easily place objects relative to previously-drawn entities. For example, placing a lamp on a table.
For more information, see Elevating Objects, which begins on page 258.
Measurement Tools
The measurement tools, available from the 2D Menu, include associative dimensions, window/door callouts and cursor
dimensions visibility.
Associative Dimensioning are the measurements that appear as you are adding features. For example, the
Associative Dimensioning feature will show how far from the ends of each wall the window is positioned.
When the Window/Door Callouts option is checked, the measurements of all window and door openings will be shown,
with the wall measurements, and be displayed in the floor plan view.
Cursor Dimensions show exactly where your cursor is located, making it easy to place lighting a precise distance from
a wall, for example.
For more information on these and other measurement tools, see Dimensioning, on page 59.
View Icons
When you load Architect 3D, you will be working in 2D Full Plan View. This allows you to quickly draw walls, add doors
and windows, and other drawing plan elements.
When you want to focus primarily on your 2D actions, while maintaining a clear view of
the 3D design, select 3D View Window or Split 2D/3D View. These views are also
useful for adding colors or materials. The Full 3D View and Elevation View are ideal
when viewing or navigating the design in 3D.
As you move on to building a scale model of your design, RealModel View provides the
pieces you will need.
For a full explanation of the view options, see the chapter titled Viewing in 2D & 3D,
which begins on page 41.
Zoom and Pan Toolbar

The Zoom and Pan tools are quickly accessible from the main toolbar to make it easy to navigate your 2D drawing.
Zoom Tool - get a closer look at an area or see a larger portion of your plan drawing by zooming in
and out. For more information, see Zooming In and Out in 2D, which begins on page 42.
Pan Tool - moves the design window to see portions of the plan which are outside the current view.
For more information, see Panning Across the 2D Drawing, which begins on page 42.
25
Chapter
A Quick Tour
Edit Toolbar
Tools that you will use most frequently are located on the Edit Toolbar. From top to bottom, these tool
include:
Selection Tool used to select any 2D element in the design window. When an item is selected, its
properties become available on the Properties tab. Use the Selection Tool to move selections and drag
points to reshape.
Resize Segment Tool precisely update the length of an individual, previously-drawn wall, stairway,
railing, or other straight segment.
Rotate Tool freely rotate the selection, or specify the exact amount of rotation (by double-clicking the
tool).
Insert Point adds a point where you click.
Remove Point deletes the point where you click.
Fillet Corner adds a fillet (curved) corner to your topography, patio, freehand roof panel, floor, and
other angled edges.
Chamfer Corner adds a chamfer (straight) corner to your topography, patio, freehand roof panel, floor,
and other angled edges.
Visual Array Tool place a line of plants or objects at exact distances from each other.
Text & Dimension Toolbar

Tools for adding text and dimensions are located on the Text & Dimension Toolbar. Simply click a tool to activate it.
Note: When the application window is not large enough to display the entire toolbar, the Text & Dimension tools are
collapsed and are accessible by clicking the arrow button that is displayed below the active tool.
Multi-Line Text add important information to your drawing. For example, add text to annotate rooms,
specify a home address, the date the drawing was created, or a specific feature in your plan.
Rotated Text place text at any angle needed.
Dimension Wall Spacing especially useful to add interactive dimensions between walls, for situations
where they are not automatically generated. Dimensions drawn with the Dimension Wall Spacing Tool
are automatically updated when either wall is moved.
Zero-Offset Dimension adds a horizontal, vertical, or angled dimension directly onto the measured
element.
Offset Dimension adds a horizontal or vertical dimension with a custom offset distance between the
extension lines and the measured element.
Length Dimension allows you to measure the distance of a single segment by placing a horizontal,
vertical, or angled dimension with a custom offset distance between the extension lines and the
measured element.
Diameter Dimension measure the diameter of a circle by dragging along the circles perimeter,
automatically detects the opposite edge and displays the dimension in the middle of the circle.
Note: The Diameter Dimension Tool does not measure ellipses.
Leader Dimension annotate the elements in your workspace by positioning a leader dimension that
points to an object, for example, when associating text with a 2D object. You can also automatically add
a rooms name and area by pointing into an enclosed room.
ProjecTape sets and measures points at specified distances from walls, fences, as well as objects like
furniture.
Properties Tab
Properties Tab
You can easily modify elements you have previously drawn by selecting them and
editing their options on the Properties tab. Properties are easily accessed by clicking
an element on your floor plan.
For example, clicking a door accesses the customizable properties for doors and
clicking a plant accesses the properties for plants.
If the Properties tab does not automatically display when you select an object, enable
the auto display by clicking Window menu > Auto Display Tool Options. When a
checkmark is visible, properties auto-display.
Note: You can also enable Auto Display by clicking Edit menu > Preferences > User Interface and selecting the
Auto display Tool Options on selection checkbox.
Libraries Tab
The Libraries tab gives you access to the expansive libraries for adding objects, colors, materials, plants, and more to
your design. Each library is organized into Content categories, and in some cases the categories include subcategories. The available libraries include:
Stock Library content included with the initial installation
User Library items copied from the default library that can be edited
Downloaded Library content items downloaded from content packs
Favorites List items tagged as favorites
When you switch content libraries, the Preview bar is updated to only display those items that exist in the active library,
so you can easy sort through items as you work on your design.
For more information on using the available libraries, see Organizing Library Content, on page 69.
27
Chapter
A Quick Tour
Favorites list tab

Downloaded content library tab
User library tab
Default library tab (active)
Libraries tab
Libraries drop-down menu
Categories drop-down menu
Library categories
Category content displayed

in Preview bar
Preview Bar
You can click and drag objects, templates, materials, colors, and other items available from the Libraries tab, from their
Preview Bars into your design. The Preview Bar changes to reflect your selection. For instance, if you click the Plants
tab, plant options are displayed.
If you cannot add an object or material, try adding it to a different view. For example, you cannot add paint in the 2D
view; this must be applied to a surface in a 3D view. Objects such as furniture or plants can be added to either the 2D
or 3D view.
Status Bar
The Status Bar is located in the lower left of the window and displays prompts, program messages, and
measurements. It is a good place to look when you are holding the pointer over certain buttons or menu items to find
their function.
Interface Color Scheme

The application interface uses a default color scheme, which you can change as desired. Color schemes are not saved
with drawing files, so the application and .PRO files always open using the default color scheme.
To change the interface color scheme
Build Green Information
2 Select User Interface and choose the color scheme you want from the
Color Scheme drop-down menu.
3 Click OK to set the color scheme. The interface is updated when you
select an option.
Build Green Information

Architect 3D includes information to help you with designing an energy-efficient, environmentally-minded home. Tips
and information are available to help guide you as you are creating your design. Features in your design that have
green information available are highlighted with green in the design window when the Green Information Center is
open. To access information about that feature, click to select the feature.
While nothing is selected in your design, general tips and guidelines are available for review.
To access green tips for features in your design
1 Click Help menu > Going Green. The Green Information Center window is displayed.
2 Click to select a feature in your drawing that is displayed in green and the green information that is
available is displayed in the Green Information Center window.
29
Chapter
A Quick Tour
Chapter 3
Before You Draw

To get the most benefit from Architect 3D, you should take a minute to become familiar with some of its basic
concepts. With Architect 3D you can set a precise drawing scale, define units of measurement, and set the reference
grid. There are also many performance settings you can apply to optimize drawing speed and 3D viewing.
Starting a New File

Starting a new file displays QuickStart, an easy way to start your design process. For more information, see
QuickStart, which begins on page 103.
To save a new, unnamed file
1 Click File menu > Save As. The Save As dialog box is displayed.
2 Type a file name in the File Name text box and then click OK. Architect 3D automatically adds the
PRO extension.
Opening a File
Opening a file makes it available for you to edit or print the plan. You can have more than one file open at a time. The
exact number of files you can have open depends on the amount of memory in your system and the complexity of the
home plan file. When you open a file, Architect 3D displays it in a new window.
To open an existing file
1 Click File menu > Open. The Open dialog box is displayed.
2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open, or search for the file by browsing
folders or drives.
3 Select the file you want and click Open.

To see a list of recently opened files
Click File menu > Open Recent and choose the file you want to open. The file loads into memory.
To clear the recently opened files listing
1 Click File menu > Open Recent > Clear Recent Designs List. A warning box is displayed.
2 Click Yes to delete all files from the listing.
Accessing the Sample Plans

Sample plans are a set of pre-designed home plans, not created by an architect. They can be used as-is or can be
edited to your liking. Each of the available sample plans include 2D and 3D previews, and room dimensions.
31
Chapter
Before You Draw
To open a sample plan
1 Click File menu > Open Sample Plan.

(alternatively) Click Sample Plans on the Welcome
window.
By default, all home styles are displayed. You can
narrow the options by choosing the home style you
want from the Style drop-down menu.
2 Scroll through the style options and choose the one

you want. A 2D preview is displayed, as well as the
plans dimensions.
(optional) Click the 3D Preview radio button to see
the home in 3D.
3 When you find the plan you want, click Open

Sample Plan. The plan is displayed in the design
window.
Closing a File
When you finish working with a file, close it to remove the window from the screen and to free up your computers
memory. When you are done working in Architect 3D, close all your files and exit the program.
To close a file
Click File menu > Close. If you have unsaved changes in your plan drawing, Architect 3D prompts
you to save them before it closes the file.
To close all open files and exit
Click File menu > Exit. If any open drawings have unsaved changes, Architect 3D prompts you to
save them before it closes their files.
Saving a File
Saving a File
When you open a file, Architect 3D copies the file to your computers memory. As you work, you modify the copy
stored in memory. Any system failure or loss of power destroys that copy. To save your work permanently, you must
save it to a file on a disc. A good rule of thumb is to save every 15 minutes or after youve completed any work you
wouldnt want to redo.
When you click the Save command, Architect 3D saves the active drawing, using the name and location you last gave
it. You can create more than one version of a drawing or save copies on another disk for safekeeping. You can save
each version under a different name or you can save them under the same name in different folders or on different
disks.
To save an existing file
Click File menu > Save.

(alternatively) Right-click and choose Save on the context menu that is displayed (or press
CTRL+S).
To save a file to a different name, drive, or folder
2 If you want to save the drawing under another name, type a name in the File Name text box.
3 If you want to save the drawing to a different drive or folder, click a different drive and folder, or type
the complete path in the File Name text box.
4 Click OK.
Importing Files
You can import a variety of file types into Architect 3D. You can import the following types of files:
2D DXF/DWG file (described below)
SketchUp file (described below)
3D Custom Workshop object (see 3D Objects Libraries, on page 74)
3DS File (see 3D Objects Libraries, on page 74)
Material To Library (see Applying Building Materials, on page 91)
Plant To Library (see Plants Libraries, on page 78)
3D Background (see Applying Building Materials, on page 91)

To import a DXF/DWG file (2D only)
1 Click File menu > Import > DXF/DWG File. The Import DXF/DWG Design dialog box is displayed.
2 Find the file you want to import and then click to select it.
3 Click Open. The Import Scale dialog box is displayed. This determines the scale at which the file is
imported.
Note: The import scale must match the scale units in the original plan.
4 Choose a Scale from the drop-down menu and then click OK.
Note: Once you have imported your file, you will need to convert the lines and surfaces into Punch!
intelligent features or intelligent elements before they can be viewed in 3D. For more information,
see Converting Details to Intelligent Elements, which begins on page 241.
To import a SketchUp file
1 Click File menu > Import > SketchUp File. The Import SketchUp Design dialog box is displayed.
33
Chapter
Before You Draw
3 Click Open. The object is placed in the center of your 2D design. The Status Bar displays the
progress, as the file is converted.
Exporting Files
You can export a 2D drawing file or a rendered image of your 3D View window to BMP, JPG, PNG, or TIFF format.
Images can be exported in Textured, Wireframe, or ClearView modes. The exported image appears just as your 3D
View window does. For best results, adjust your rendering settings to a high-resolution before exporting. Size is also
controlled by how your 3D View window appears; the larger the 3D View window, the larger the file will be. For more
information on controlling the 3D View environment, see Viewing in 2D & 3D, which begins on page 41.
You can also export an animation (see To export animation, on page 289) and a landscape quote (see Exporting a
Landscape Quote, on page 85), if your file includes these features.
You can even send a list of plants and mulch beds to your iPhone and load it into the Landscape Quote app. Then you
can enter the prices from the nursery to keep track of costs.
Exporting a DXF or DWG File

You can export 2D floor plan files using a DXF or DWG file format so they are compatible with another CAD system.
Format drop-down menu allows you to choose either a DXF or

DWG file format.
Version drop-down menu allows you to choose which version of

the file format you want to export.
Color checkbox allows you to maintain the plan colors that are
associated with the components on different plan tabs. When
deselected, the entire drawing is exported in a monochromatic
color scheme for all of the components.
To export a DXF/DWG file
1 Click File menu > Export > DXF/DWG File. The Export Options dialog box is displayed.
2 Choose the Format and Version you want.
(optional) Select the Color checkbox to maintain the different plan colors in the drawing.
3 Click Export. The Export dialog box is displayed.

4 Choose a destination for the file then type a file name in the File Name text box.
5 Click Save. Architect 3D automatically adds the DXF or DWG extension.
Exporting a 2D Image
You can export your 2D drawing as an image file. There are many options available for exporting a 2D image.
Export Format specifies the file

format for the 2D image.
Keep image size proportional

checkbox allows you to resize the
image so the width and height are the
same as the largest direction. When
deselected, the original image size is
maintained.
Crop at lot boundary checkbox

crops the image where the lot ends
when selected. When deselected, the image extends past the lot boundary.
Image Size slider controls the size of the image to be exported.
Print current view only checkbox limits the exported image to what is visible in the current 2D view.
Ignore Topography Bounds checkbox controls if the topography line boundaries are considered in the exported
image. When selected, the image is cropped to include the home design; when deselected the image fits the
Printing Floor Plans
home design and the length of each topography line. If you do not need to see the full length of all of the
topography lines select this option.
Layer Visibility allows you to choose to export all of the visible layers on the current plan or just the current plan
layer.
To export a 2D image
1 Click File menu > Export > 2D Image. The 2D Image Export Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 Choose settings you want under Export Format, Image, and View Options, and then click Export.
The Export Image dialog box is displayed.
4 Click Save. The 2D image is exported to the location youve specified. Architect 3D automatically
adds the extension.
Exporting a 3D Image
You can export your rendered 3D view as an image file. There are many options available for exporting a 3D image.
Export Format specifies the file

format for the 3D image.
Export Quality specifies the

render quality for the 3D image.
Size options allow you to export

the image using the current 3D
view size or choose a custom width
and height.
To export a 3D Image
1 Click File menu > Export > 3D View Image. The Export Options dialog box is displayed.
2 Choose settings you want under Export Format, Export Quality, and Size, and then click OK. The
Export Image dialog box is displayed.
4 Click Save. The 3D image is exported to the location youve specified. Architect 3D automatically
adds the extension.
Exporting a VRML File

You can export a drawing to VRML file mainly for use in 3D modeling.
To export a VRML file
1 Click File menu > Export > VRML. The Export VRML dialog box is displayed.
3 Click Save. The VRML file is exported to the location youve specified. Architect 3D automatically
adds the extension.
Printing Floor Plans

Architect 3D prints, using the current Windows printer drivers. You can, however, print using any installed printer.
Using the Print Setup dialog box you can specify a printer or plotter from those currently installed. You can print your
drawing in color or in black and white; it can be printed to scale or you can print it all on one page, depending on your
needs. Follow these steps to print your 2D drawing.
Note: Gridlines will print if they are visible when the drawing is printed.
35
Chapter
Before You Draw
Print Scale options allow you to print to a specified scale or fit the drawing to the page.
Print current view only checkbox limits the printout to what is visible in the current 2D view.
Ignore Topography Bounds checkbox controls if the topography line boundaries are considered in the exported
image. When selected, the image is cropped to include the home design; when deselected the image fits the
home design and the length of each topography line. If you do not need to see the full length of all of the
topography lines select this option.
Layer Visibility allows you to choose to print all of the visible layers on the current plan or just the current plan
layer.
Print Leader Markers button allows you to print just the leader dimensions in your drawing that use the Marker
type.
To print a floor plan
1 Click File menu > Print (or press CTRL+P). The Print Preview dialog box is displayed.
2 Choose the Print Scale options and View Options you want and then click Print. The drawing is
printed based on your current settings.
To change printer settings
1 Click File menu > Print (or press CTRL+P). The Print Preview dialog box is displayed.
2 Click the Printer Setup button, in the top left corner. The Print Setup window is displayed.
Plotter Print Service
3 Choose the printer you want to use.

(optional) Change the paper orientation and size.
4 Click OK and then click Print.
Plotter Print Service

You can order scaled prints of your design on 36"x42" paper using the plotter print service. This menu option opens a
web browser window so you should have internet access.
Note: Allow 7 to 14 days for delivery.

To print a large-scale drawing
1 Click File menu > Plotter Print Server. Your default web browser opens to the service website.
2 Follow the instructions on the page to complete this process.
Printing a 3D View Rendering

Architect 3D streamlines the process used to print the 3D View images. With just a couple of clicks, you can print
beautiful, full-color renderings of your design.
Export Quality specifies the render quality for

the 3D view printout.
Size options allow you to print the image using

the current 3D view size or choose a custom
width and height.
To print a 3D View rendering
1 Click File menu > Print 3D View. The Print

3D Options dialog box is displayed.
2 Choose the Export Quality and Size options

you want.
3 Click OK. The Print dialog box is displayed.

5 Click OK.
37
Chapter
Before You Draw
Printing an Elevation View

You can print the current elevation view to create a fully rendered printout of the view.
Print Quality specifies the render quality for the 3D view printout.
Print Options allow you to print the image to fit the printed page or using the
plan scale that is specified.
To print a 3D Elevation View rendering
1 Open the Elevation View and set the view of your design that you want to
print.
2 Click File menu > Print 3D View. The Print Elevation Options dialog box is
displayed.
3 Choose the Print Quality and Print Options you want.

4 Click OK. The Print dialog box is displayed.
6 Click OK.
Working with Floors

Floors are designated levels upon which your structure is built. Your design may use only one floor or up to 20
(depending on your software version). Floors are not necessarily placed one on top of another; floors may also exist at
the same elevation but independent of each other.
By default, a project includes three floors:
Floor 1 is the base level floor

Floor 2 is above Floor 1
Floor 3 is above Floor 2
When a floor is positioned above another floor, an association is established so changes to the underlying floor are
reflected in the above floors. For example, if Floor 2 is above Floor 1, and the ceiling height of Floor 1 is changed from
8'-0" to 10'-0", the base elevation of Floor 2 is also updated to include the additional two feet.
Working with Floors
Additionally, walls and interior elements that exist on the current floor and above floors can be updated to reflect
changes to the floor properties.
As you design, you can edit your floor properties. For information, see Editing Floor Properties, on page 145.
You can also add or delete floors as needed. For more information, see Adding and Deleting Floors, on page 147.
Series.
39
Chapter
Before You Draw
Chapter 4
Viewing in 2D & 3D
Architect 3D provides many options for looking at your design on-screen. This gives you the flexibility to view your
drawing as a 2D plan, in Elevation view, as a 2D plan with a corresponding 3D view, or using only Full 3D View.
When viewing your 2D home plan, you can magnify the view by zooming in, reduce the view by zooming out, or pan
the view in any direction.
3D viewing provides many options, from walking through the home plan to flying around the plan or viewing the
framing or completion phase of your project. You can adjust 3D display settings using a variety of viewing features,
including adding shadows, for a realistic effect, or adjusting the lighting intensity of the view. Finally, you can create a
photo-realistic view of your design.
In this chapter, youll learn about the numerous commands designed to let you view your design in both 2D and 3D.
Viewing the 2D Plan

When initially designing your plan, you will probably want to view the 2D plan view only. Once completed, you can view
your plan in a combination of 2D and 3D or in 3D only. In addition, Architect 3D organizes your floor plan into layers,
which are each easily accessible with a single mouse click. For example, you can choose to view the deck plan with
landscaping one moment, then quickly switch to view electrical and plumbing. Any combination ... any time!
To view the 2D plan only
On the View Toolbar, click the 2D Plan View icon. The 2D plan view is displayed.
(alternatively) Click Window menu > 2D Plan View.
To view all 2D floor plan levels at once
Click the Working Floor button at the left bottom of the design window,
then click to check View All Floors.
To view the working floor only
Click the Working Floor button at the left bottom of the design window, then click to check View
Working Floor Only.
Customizing Visible Plans

During the design of your floor plan, there may be times when you want to
view certain layers that are hidden by default. For example, while working on
your electrical plan, you may need to see where plumbing will be. Architect
3D makes it easy to customize how you view your plan layers. The visible
plans are controlled on the Properties tab under Plan and Editing.
Note: Items on a hidden plan layer are not available during a Select All
process and will not be altered with the other items and features in your
drawing.
You can also assign custom colors to areas of your design, such as plans,
inactive floors, grid line colors, and the color of your crosshair. These color
settings, and more, can be customized by accessing the 2D menu. For more information, see Screen Colors, which
begins on page 67.
41
Chapter
Viewing in 2D & 3D
To customize plan layers
1 Click the plan tab you want to use, and then make sure nothing is selected in the 2D or 3D views and
click the Properties tab. The Plan and Editing settings are displayed.
2 Select the plan(s) you want to be visible in the design window or deselect the plan(s) you want to
hide.
Show Topography Lines

There may be times when you will want to work on the Landscape Plan, but you may want to hide the topography
lines. This is a one-click procedure. Topography lines are displayed when the Landscape plan tab is enabled, but you
have the option to display or hide the topography lines.
To control topography lines visibility
Click 2D menu > Show Topography Lines. If there is a checkmark next to this menu selection, it is
active. If there is not a checkmark next to this menu selection, it is inactive.
Zooming In and Out in 2D

You can get a closer look at an area or see a larger portion of your plan drawing by zooming in and out. By dragging
over the drawing, the view enlarges or decreases dynamically. You can also set the zoom factor to obtain exact zoom
precision. Once youve finished viewing your plan close-up, you can return to the previous, full view with one mouse
click.
To zoom in
1 On the main toolbar, click the Zoom Tool.

2 Click on the design window and drag up to zoom in; drag down to zoom out.
(alternatively) Zoom in and out easily with the wheel on your mouse.
Note: The location of the cursor will be centered on the design window.
To set the zoom factor
1 Click 2D menu > Set Zoom. The Set Plan View Zoom dialog box is displayed.
2 Type a new zoom factor, then click OK.

To reset the 2D plan view
Click 2D menu > Reset Plan View (or press CTRL+E). Your plan is reset to the original, default
view.
Panning Across the 2D Drawing

You can move the design window to see portions of the plan which are outside the current view, by panning. Panning
also makes it easy to slowly view areas of your drawing piece-by-piece.
To pan in any direction
1 On the main toolbar, click the Pan Tool. The pointer changes to reflect Pan mode.
2 Hold down the left mouse button and drag in the direction you want to view. The view
changes, dynamically, as you move the mouse.
Fitting Your Design to Your Current Window Size
(optional) With some mice you can hold down the wheel on your mouse and move in it the direction
you want to pan.
Fitting Your Design to Your Current Window Size

You can quickly position your entire design within your window, without using the Pan Tool or Zoom Tool.
To fit your entire design within your window
Click 2D menu > Fit to Window (or press CTRL+F).
Working with 3D Views

Architect 3D lets you view your design in photo-realistic 3D. You can select the exterior and interior wall colors, add
realistic roof materials, and select from a variety of textures to make your design completely unique. In the 3D View
Window, you can view your design from a variety of angles.
Using Decorator Palettes, you can easily make changes to your decorating theme. This makes it easy to experiment
with a variety of color schemes, both inside and outside your design, before picking up a paintbrush!
With the powerful ClearView feature, you can literally see through the walls and view electrical, plumbing, and so on.
All 3D View window options are easily accessible from the right-click context menu, the View toolset in the main
toolbar, and from the 3D menu.
2D Plan View
Split 2D/3D View
3D View Window
Full 3D View
43
Chapter
Viewing in 2D & 3D
To refresh your 3D view
Click 2D menu > Refresh (or Press F5).
To display plan view
Click the Plan View icon on the main toolbar.

(alternatively) Click Window menu > 2D Plan View.
(alternatively) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and click Plan View from the pop-up
menu that is displayed.
To display the 3D View Window
Click the 3D View WIndow icon from the collapsible view toolset.
(alternatively) Click Window menu > 3D View WIndow.
(alternatively) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and click 3D View Window from the
context menu that is displayed.
To display a split 2D/3D view
Click the Split 2D/3D View icon from the collapsible view toolset.
(alternatively) Click Window menu > Split 2D/3D View.
(alternatively) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and click Split Plan/3D View from
the context menu that is displayed.
To display full 3D view
Click the 3D Full View icon from the collapsible view toolset.
(alternatively) Click Window menu > 3D Full View.
(alternatively) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and click 3D Full View from the
To display elevation view
Click the Elevation View icon from the collapsible view toolset.
(alternatively) Click Window menu > Elevation View.
(alternatively) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and click Elevation View from the
Using the 3D Cutaway Slider
There are predefined views available in the toolbar. Choose one of the views to quickly
see your design from that direction, or click the Rotate Elevation View Angle Tool and
drag in the view window to rotate around the design.
You can add doors, windows, and accessories while in Elevation View by selecting one of the tools
and then clicking on a wall to place. For more info on editing door, window, and accessory properties
see Floor Plan Tab, on page 115.
While in Elevation View, you can also edit roofs, decks, and 3D objects that exist in your design.
Using the 3D Cutaway Slider

With Architect 3Ds 3D Cutaway Slider you peel away layers of your floor plan, with ease. You can slice away layer
after layer of your design from any of the four sides or from the top, making it easy to see room arrangements, furniture
placement, and more. If you find you want more viewing room in the 3D View window, you can hide the 3D Cutaway
Slider at any time.
The following cutaway directions are available. Click the arrows to change the cutaway direction.
Cutaway from the back of your plan
Cutaway from the front of your plan
Cutaway from the left edge of your plan
Cutaway from the right edge of your plan
Cutaway from the sky
Note: In these images we are cutting away from the sky down through the design.
To view a plan using the 3D Cutaway Slider
1 Open a 3D or elevation view and set the view that you would like to cut away.
2 Click the Cutaway Slider arrows to specify the direction from which you want to cutaway.
3 In the 3D View window, click and drag the 3D Cutaway Slider up and down to see a cutaway view of
your design.
45
Chapter
Viewing in 2D & 3D
To hide the 3D Cutaway Slider
Click 3D menu > 3D Cutaway Slider Visible. When a

checkmark is visible, the 3D Cutaway Slider is visible.
(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Preferences > User Interface
and deselect the Show 3D Cutaway Slider checkbox and then
click OK.
Setting the Walk-Through Viewpoint Angle

Architect 3D has four pre-set viewpoint angles and, from those angles, moving to the needed viewpoint is easy. Below
is example of the Right View. By clicking the other three directions, you can view your floor plan from the other edges
of your lot.
To set a viewpoint angle
1 Click the Full 3D View icon from the collapsible view toolset.
2 Click 3D menu > 3D Navigation and choose Front View, Back View, Right View, or
Left View.
Selecting Features in 3D
Selecting Features in 3D
With Architect 3Ds 3D Selection Tool, you can click features on the 3D View window and they are automatically
selected on your 2D plan. This makes fine-tuning your design much easier. For example, you can easily select
windows that may be stacked on top of each other in the 2D design view.
In the image below, weve selected the table in the 3D View window.
Note: You can select features on the active floor and active plan only. If the feature you click does not become active,
make sure it is on the active floor and plan.
To use the 3D selection tool
1 Open a 3D window and click the Select Objects in 3D Tool.

2 In the 3D View window, click a feature to select it. The feature is selected in the design
window and its properties are displayed on the Properties tab.
47
Chapter
Viewing in 2D & 3D
Chapter 5
Drawing in 2D
Architect 3D provides many options for looking at your design onscreen. You can display several windows, each
containing a different view of your plan. This gives you the flexibility to view your drawing as a 2D plan, as a 2D plan
with a corresponding 3D view or using only Punch! 3D View.
When viewing your 2D home plan, you can magnify the view by zooming in, reduce the view by zooming out, or pan
the view in any direction.
3D viewing provides many options, from walking through the home plan to flying around the plan or viewing the
framing or completion phase of your project. You can adjust 3D display settings using a variety of viewing features,
including adding shadows, for a realistic effect, or adjusting the lighting intensity of the view. Finally, you can create a
photo-realistic view of your design.
Series.
2D Drawing Methods
There are some common 2D drawing methods that youll use repeatedly while creating your design in Punch! Below
are detailed steps for each of the drawing methods. Practice these methods before you begin, or refer back to this
information as you draw. If a tool requires a different drawing method, it is explained where the tool is described.
Keyboard Shortcut Quick Reference

There are a couple of helpful keyboard shortcuts to be aware of as you draw. These can be helpful with precisely
drawing segments.
Key
Description
CTRL
SHIFT
Lock segment angle while dragging

Disable snap points and laser alignment while dragging
For more information on snapping and laser alignment, see AutoSnap and Alignment Options, on page 53.
Click Once to Place

This method is used for items that do not attach to a walls, like columns, floor and ceiling receptacles, fixture lights,
furnaces, and other items that are positioned freely in a design.
To draw using Click Once to Place
Position your cursor where you want the selection to be placed and click your left mouse button. The
selection is placed at the location you click.
49
Chapter
Drawing in 2D
Click-and-Drag
This method is used for items like walls, roofs, pre-defined shapes (rectangle, circle/oval, line, arc, multigon), and other
shapes that are based on a user-defined size. For details on controlling the automatic dimensions display, see
Dimensioning, on page 59.
To draw using Click-and-Drag
Position the cursor at the start point for the shape, then hold down the left mouse button and drag
from the start point to the desired length. A rubber band line is displayed as you drag. Release to
place.
Define 2D Shape
This method is used for manually drawn shapes like floors, decks, railings, and more. Below is an example of the Draw
Method drop-down menu for the Floor Tool (available on the Floor plan tab). Each Draw Method describes how the
shape is drawn.
To draw using Define 2D Shape
1 When a tool that uses Define 2D Shape is active, the Draw Method
drop-down menu becomes available on the Properties tab.
2 Click the Draw Method drop-down menu and choose the shape and
method you want for the active tool.
3 Draw the shape based on the method you chose. For detailed steps to draw shapes, see the
following sections:
Drawing Rectangles and Squares, on page 233

Drawing Circles and Ovals, on page 234
Drawing Lines, on page 234
Drawing Polygons, on page 235
2D Editing Methods
Drawing Arcs, on page 235

Drawing Circular Arcs, on page 236
Drawing Multigons, on page 237
Drawing Curves, on page 237
Drag Along Wall

This method is used for wall attachments such as windows, doors, receptacles, and more. As wall attachments,
objects remain attached to the wall even if the wall is moved.
To draw using Drag Along Wall
Click-and-drag along a wall, release to place on the side where you want it.
2D Editing Methods
There are some common editing methods that youll use repeatedly while creating your design in Punch! Below are
detailed steps for each of the editing methods. Practice these methods before you begin, or refer back to this
information as you draw. If a tool requires a different drawing method, it is explained where the tool is described.
For additional editing techniques, see the chapter titled Edit Your Design, which begins on page 255.
Selecting Points and 2D Shapes

You can select an individual point or segment on a shape or the entire shape.
To select points
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2 Hold down the SHIFT key and click to select one point or segment.
To select a 2D shape
Click the Selection Tool and then double-click a point or segment in a 2D shape to select the entire
shape.
Reshaping and Resizing 2D Objects

Objects created using the Click and Drag or Define 2D Shape drawing method can be reshaped or resized by dragging
a point or segment. For information on how to lock segment angles or release snaps and alignment constraints, see
Keyboard Shortcut Quick Reference, on page 49.
To reshape and resize 2D objects
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the point or segment you want to edit.
2 Drag the selection to reshape or resize the object. Release to place.
Elevating Objects
You can adjust the elevation of an individual object or a group of objects to a specific value or to match the elevation of
a nearby object. You can also elevate all of the objects on an entire floor. For more information, see Elevating
Objects, which begins on page 258.
Component Description
Components that are added to your design from one of the plan tab have a default description you can change. The
description text is used in the Description column in Estimator. In the example below, the Sink Description is displayed
for editing.
51
Chapter
Drawing in 2D
Updates to the description text only affect the component in your plan; changes do not affect the original item in the
content library. To edit the component description information in the library, copy the item to the User Library and then
edit its details. For more information, see Organizing Library Content, which begins on page 69.
You can also edit the object information for custom workshop objects. For more information, see Editing 3D Objects,
To edit component description
1 Click the Selection Tool and then right-click the object and choose Description from the
context menu.
2 Edit the text as needed and click OK.
Using the Grid

With Architect 3D you can set specific grid properties that aid
in drawing your home plan. You can set points, based on the
reference grid, which is useful when you want to make sure
certain points are specified precisely.
Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning
objects and snapping objects to the grid. When using the
Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and dropped on
the design window are automatically snapped, or placed, to
align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is on.
You can customize grid settings by selecting grid spacing, grid
style, and hiding or displaying.
To display the grid
Click 2D menu > Grid Visible. The grid is displayed

on the design window.
(alternatively) Right-click the design window and click Grid Visible on the context menu that is
displayed.
To align objects/features with an area of the grid
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the

Selection Tool and then click
to select the object or feature
you want to align.
2 Click Edit menu > Align to

Grid, then click the area of the
grid where you want your
selection aligned.
AutoSnap and Alignment Options
To enable or disable Snap to Grid

When snap to grid is enabled, you can use the grid lines (and minor grid lines) as a reference to move selections
based on those lines. Selections move based on the Snap Grid settings, which you can control by editing the grid
settings (see To configure grid settings, on page 53).
Click 2D menu > Snap to Grid. The feature is enabled when a checkmark is visible and disabled
when a checkmark is not visible.
(alternatively) Right-click the design window and click Snap to Grid on the context menu.
To configure grid settings
1 Click 2D menu > Grid Properties. The Design Options dialog box opens to the Grid Settings.
(alternatively) Right-click the design window and click Grid Properties on the context menu that is
displayed (or press CTRL+G).
2 Edit the grid settings and then click OK.
Grid Visible checkbox controls whether

the grid is visible (selected) or not
(deselected). When the grid is visible,
you can turn on or off the minor grid
lines.
Grid Style specifies whether the grid
uses lines or dots.
Note: Grid Dots/Lines can be set to as
low as 1 inch (English), 0.02 m (Metric),
and still be viewable. Grid Dots/Lines can
be set as high as 500 inches (English),
12.70 m (Metric).
Grid Dots/Lines Spacing defines the horizontal and vertical measurements for the grid. This is the
distance between each grid line/dot.
Note: Initially, the grid is set at 12 inches, making it easy to visualize each plan square as exactly
one square foot, but can be customized to meet your particular design needs.
Snap Grid defines the horizontal and vertical measurements for the minor grid lines. Items you draw or
drag-and-drop into the design window snap to the measurements youve defined here.
Note: Snap settings can be set as low as 0.0625 (1/16 inch) English, 0.01 meter (1 cm) Metric, and
still show visible movement along the grid. Snap settings can be set as high as 500 inches (English),
12.70 meter (Metric).

Snap points are automatically enabled as you design. Snap points are designated points or hot spots where your
cursor can lock-in, for help with accurate placement. Laser alignment is also available for easily aligning segments as
you draw. Laser alignment and auto snaps can be enabled or disabled on Properties tab while nothing is selected in
your design. Even more snaps settings are available in the Preferences window.
53
Chapter
Drawing in 2D
Auto Snaps
By default, when Auto Snaps are enabled the midpoint and end points are displayed when your cursor reaches these
points. You can control these, and other hot spots or points, to which your cursor snaps on the Snap Options dialog
box. Below, the midpoint snap point is displayed as the cursor is moved along a wall segment.
To control automatic snaps
Click in the design window so nothing is selected and then, on the Properties tab, select the Auto
Snap checkbox to enable all snaps, or deselect to disabled all snaps.
To control individual snap points, click the Snap Options button and select the snap option(s) you
want to enable, or deselect the snaps you want to disable and then click OK.
(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Preferences > Snap Settings.
Intersections displays the intersection of two lines.
Segment Center displays the center point along a segment, as you drag.
On segment displays when your cursor is actively on a segment, as you

drag.
Selection Filter
Object Center displays the center of an object as you drag to place within
its bounds. A useful example would be centering a lamp on a table.
Angle Constraint locks a point to an adjacent segments angle. When

selected, this also constrains a line angle to 1-degree increments as you
draw.
Detection Radius Snap detection radius controls

the size of the snap point detection area. To
configure the detection radius, drag the slider to
decrease or increase the detection radius.
Laser Alignment
In addition to snap points, you can control the laser alignment, which is displayed when your cursor is in alignment with
an existing point. In the example below, the cursor is positioned at the bottom of the drawing, where two end pointend
points align. When the cursor is positioned at one of the end points and laser alignment is enabled, the alignment is
displayed.
Laser alignment enabled
Laser alignment disabled
To control laser alignment
Click in the design window so nothing is selected and then, on the Properties tab, select the Laser
Alignment checkbox to enable alignment, or deselect to disable alignment.
(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Preferences > Snap Settings.
Selection Filter
There will be times when you will place items on top of each other. To make it easier to select each layer, use the
Selection Filter. For example, to select a transom window, placed over a door, you can select Windows in the
Selection Filter Options dialog box, and then when you hold down CTRL and click where the window and door are
placed you will only select the window.
55
Chapter
Drawing in 2D
To filter selections
1 Click 2D menu > Selection Filter Options (or press SHIFT+CTRL+S).

2 Select the feature(s) you want to be able to select and then click OK to close the window.
When you hold down CTRL, you will only be able to select those features.
Text Font
Use text to add information to your drawing. For example, you might add text to annotate rooms, specify a
home address, the date the drawing was created, or a specific feature in your plan. Architect 3D gives you
the flexibility to place text anywhere in your plan drawing, using different formatting techniques for each text
instance. Text you place in your drawing is displayed on all 2D printed output. The text tools are available on
the Text & Dimension toolbar.
Multi-Line Text
Using the Multi-Line Text Tool you can add multiple lines of text to your design for annotations. When adding text, you
can edit the font properties by clicking the Font button, or edit the font after text is placed. For more information, see
Edit Text and Text Properties, which begins on page 58.
Text Font
To add multi-line text
1 On the Text & Dimension toolbar, click the Multi-Line Text Tool and then click in the
design window to define where the text will start. The Edit Text dialog box is displayed.
2 Type the annotation in the text box. Press the ENTER key to move to the next line.
3 Click OK to add the text to your design.
Rotated Text
Using the Rotated Text Tool you can add a single line of text at an angle for precise annotations. When adding text,
you can edit the font properties by clicking the Font button, or edit the font after text is placed. For details on font
settings, see Edit Text and Text Properties, on page 58.
To add rotated text
1 On the Text & Dimension toolbar, click the Rotated Text Tool and then click the area
where you want to place text on the drawing page. The Edit Text dialog box is displayed.
2 Type the annotation in the text box. Rotated text is a single-line of text.
3 Select the Text Angle you want or select Custom and type a custom angle in the text field.
4 Click OK to add the text to your design.
57
Chapter
Drawing in 2D
Edit Text and Text Properties

Once youve added text in your drawing you can edit the content, font properties, and alignment. When text is selected,
the Text properties are displayed on the Properties tab.
The Edit button opens the Edit Text window, where you can edit the existing text
and font properties.
Click the Font button to edit the Font, Font Style, and Size.
Align allows you to set the text justification for Left, Center, or Right (only available for multi-line text). Alignment
is within the bounding text box.
Align Left
Align Center
Align Right
Dimensioning
Dimensioning
Architect 3D automatically displays dimensions, as you draw, making it easy to precisely place walls, doors,
and other items in your plan drawing. The powerful Dimension Wall Spacing Tool will be especially useful to
add interactive dimensions between walls, where they are not automatically generated. Dimensions drawn
with the Dimension Wall Spacing Tool are automatically updated when either wall is moved. Youll find this
tool extremely useful when measuring between the main house and the walls of other buildings, like a
garden shed or playhouse. In some instances, you might want to print your plan drawing without dimension
annotation. You have the option of turning off automatic dimensioning, if you dont want it displayed on the
drawing page or as you draw.
All Dimensioning tools can be found on the Text & Dimension toolbar on the left side of the application
window. When the application window is resized to the point where all of the text and dimension tools
cannot be displayed, the toolbar collapses. When collapsed, click the pop-up menu to see all of the tools.
To control automatic dimension display
Click in the design window so nothing is selected and then, on the Properties tab, select the
Display dimension checkbox to enable all dimensions, or deselect to disable all dimensions.
(alternatively) Click 2D menu > Automatic Dimensioning to enabled or disable dimensions.
When dimensions are enabled, you can select the Display callouts checkbox to enable window
and door callouts, or deselect to disable.
To control the display of room dimensions
1 Click the center of the room you want to edit. The room is highlighted in yellow and the room
properties are displayed on the Properties tab.
2 Under Label, deselect the Dimensions checkbox to hide the room dimensions.
To show the room dimensions, select the Dimensions checkbox.
To control the display of the room area
1 Click the center of the room you want to edit. The room is highlighted in yellow and its properties are
displayed on the Properties tab.
2 Under Label, deselect the Area checkbox to hide the room area.
To show the room area, select the Area checkbox.
To add a room name label
1 Click the center of the room you want to edit. The room is highlighted in yellow and the room
2 Under Label, select the Name checkbox and type to room name you want in the text box, then press
ENTER. The name is added to the room label in the drawing.
To hide the room name label, deselect the Name checkbox.
To control measurement unit indicators
1 Click 2D menu > Dimensioning & Fonts. The Design Options open to the Dimensioning and Fonts
settings.
2 Click to select the Display measurement unit indicators checkbox to enable unit indicators in the
design window, or deselect to disable.
3 Click OK.
Dimension Wall Spacing
This tool quickly places a dimension between two walls. The dimension must start along a wall, but does not have to
end at another wall. When you release, the dimension automatically extends to the nearest wall surface.
59
Chapter
Drawing in 2D
To place a wall spacing dimension
1 On the Text & Dimension toolbar, click the Dimension Wall Spacing Tool.
2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag the dimension from one wall to another.
Zero-Offset Dimension
This creates dimensions from any point, surface, or object, even at angles.
To place a zero-offset dimension
1 On the Text & Dimension toolbar, click the Zero-Offset Dimension Tool.
2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag from one object to another.
Offset Dimension
Offset dimensions are placed with the Offset Dimension Tool. This determines the horizontal or vertical distance
between two points.
To place a offset dimension
1 On the Text & Dimension toolbar, click the Offset Dimension Tool.
2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag the dimension from the start point of the
measurement to the end point of the measurement. Release to set the dimension.
Dimensioning
3 Move the mouse in the direction you want the offset dimension to be placed and click to place the
dimension.
Length Dimension
This allows you to measure the distance of a single segment by selecting the two end points, the dimension is
positioned offset from the segment.
To place a length dimension
1 On the Text & Dimension toolbar, click the Length Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag the dimension from the start point of the
measurement to the end point of the measurement. Release to set the dimension.
3 Move the mouse in the direction you want the offset dimension to be placed and click to place the
dimension.
Diameter Dimension
This allows you to measure the diameter of a circle by dragging along the circles perimeter, automatically detects the
opposite edge and displays the dimension in the middle of the circle.
Note: This dimension applies to circles only; you cannot measure the diameter of an oval.
To place a diameter dimension
1 On the Text & Dimension toolbar, click the Diameter Dimension Tool.
2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag along the edge of the circle. The
dimension automatically snaps to the opposite edge of the circle.
3 Release to set the dimension.

Leader Dimension
This allows you to annotate your workspace by positioning a single arrow and leader line between two objects, for
example, when associating text with a 2D object. You can also automatically add a rooms area and name by pointing
into an enclosed room. When you place a leader dimension on a component or object, the description is automatically
detected for the annotation. You can edit this as needed.
Note: To change the leader type, see Leader Dimension Properties, on page 62.
61
Chapter
Drawing in 2D
Once placed, you can edit the label text, including font properties and alignment, as well as change the leader type and
arrowhead style. For more information, see Leader Dimension Properties, which begins on page 62.
To place a leader dimension
1 On the Text & Dimension toolbar, click the Leader Dimension Tool.
2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to set the position for the arrowhead and the
first segment of the dimension.
3 Release the mouse button and drag in the direction you want the second segment to be placed.
4 Click to place the dimension. The Edit Text dialog box is displayed.
5 Type the text you want to be displayed with the leader and then click OK. The text that is displayed
is based on the leader type that is selected.
Leader Dimension Properties

Leader dimensions can be customized by editing their text and alignment. You can also choose between a text label or
a marker label, and customize the arrowhead style. To edit leader dimension properties, use the Selection Tool to
select the dimension in the design window. Its properties are displayed on the Properties tab.
Edit button opens the Edit Text dialog box for the selected text where you can
edit the text and font style. For more information, see Edit Text and Text
Properties, which begins on page 58.
Find Label button automatically detects the component description or object

information for an item in your drawing and updates the leader label text to
match. To accurately find the label, the leader dimension arrowhead must be
position on the item in the design window.
For information on editing component descriptions, see Component
Description, on page 51.
Alignment options allow you to set the text justification for Left, Center, Right, or
Auto.
Type specifies whether the leader dimension uses a marker or label.
Marker displays an incremental number, with the leader text visible when you
hover over it with your mouse. This saves space when there is a lot of text to
be displayed.
Label displays the leader text in the design window.
Marker
Label
A list of leader markers can be printed. For more information, see Printing Floor Plans, which
begins on page 56.
Dimension and Font Default Settings
Font button allows you to edit the Font, Font Style, and Size of the marker or leader text. For more information,
see Edit Text and Text Properties, which begins on page 58.
Dimension Style drop-down menu allows you to choose the end point style for the leader dimension.

There are a number of ways you can control and configure the dimensions and fonts that are displayed in your design.
The Dimensioning and Font properties are controlled in the Design Options dialog box. These are the default settings,
so changes to the settings are applied to subsequent text or dimensions that are added to your design.
To access dimensioning and font properties
Click an empty space in the design window so nothing is selected and then, on the Properties tab,
click the Dimensioning and Font Options button.
(alternatively) Click 2D menu > Dimensioning & Fonts.
Automatic Dimensions Display

The Automatic Dimensions control the display of dimensions in your drawing. You can enable or disable different
combinations of dimensions depending on your needs. You can also quickly enable or disable automatic dimensions
from the Properties tab.
63
Chapter
Drawing in 2D
Automatic Dimension Visible checkbox

controls the display of the available dimensions.
When selected, dimensions are visible and you
can control the display of the available
dimensions; when deselected all dimensions are
disabled.
Tiered exterior perimeter checkbox controls

the display of wall dimensions that include
more than one wall segment. When enabled,
both the exterior wall segment dimensions
and the total wall measurement are displayed.
When disabled, only the individual wall segment dimensions are displayed.
Tiered exterior perimeter disabled
Tiered exterior perimeter enabled
Wall segments controls the display of dimensions along wall segments. To control dimensions on individual
walls, see Wall Properties, on page 119.
Window and door callouts controls the display of dimensions for windows and doors in the design. Select the
checkbox to enable; deselect to disable.
(alternatively) You can also control callouts display by selecting or deselecting the Display callouts
checkbox on the Properties tab while nothing is selected in the design window or click 2D Menu >
Window and Door Callouts.
Draw Cursor Tracking Dimensions controls the display of dimension lines from the cursor when a tool is
selected. Select the checkbox to enable; deselect to disable.
Cursor Tracking Off
Cursor Tracking On
Note: You can also control cursor dimensions display by right-click in the design window and
choosing Cursor Dimensions or clicking 2D menu > Cursor Dimensions (dimensions are enabled
when a checkmark is visible).
Wall Attachment Dimension drop-down menu allows you to choose the position of wall attachment dimensions.
Position from edges measures the distance between each edge of the attachment (its width) and the distance
from each edge to the nearest wall.
Position from centers measures the distance from the center of the attachment to the nearest wall on either
side.
Position from edges
Position from centers
Dimension Text Placement drop-down menu specifies how you want dimension text positioned.
Above dimension line positions dimension text above the dimension line.
On dimension line positions dimensions text along the dimension line.
Above dimension line
On dimension line
Automatic Fonts and Arrowhead Styles

The Automatic Fonts and Arrowhead Styles settings control the look and feel of the automatic dimensions in your
drawing. When automatic dimensions are enabled, these settings are applied.
Automatic dimensioning Font button opens

the Font dialog box. These settings control the
font used for automatic dimensions. For more
details on font settings, see Edit Text and Text
Properties, on page 58.
Automatic dimensioning arrowhead style

drop-down menu provides access to the
available end point styles.
65
Chapter
Drawing in 2D
Automatic room label Font button opens the Font dialog box. These settings control the font used for room
labels, when the Label Name is enabled. For more details on font settings, see Edit Text and Text Properties, on
page 58.
Default Fonts and Arrowhead Styles

The Default Fonts and Arrowhead Styles settings control the look and feel of the dimensions and text you add in your
drawing using the text and dimensioning tools.
Text object default Font button opens the Font

dialog box. These settings control the font used
for text added using the text tools. For more
details on font settings, see Edit Text and Text
Leader dimension default Font button opens

the Font dialog box. These settings control the
font used for text associated with leader
dimensions. For more details on font settings,
see Edit Text and Text Properties, on page 58.
Default leader arrowhead style drop-down menu provides access to the available end point styles for leader
dimensions. The default is applied to all leader dimensions.
The Virtual Ruler

The Virtual Ruler works like a real-world tape measure and is a handy feature for measuring items in your home plan
that are not automatically dimensioned.
When active, it is displayed in the middle of the window, where you can move it into any position necessary to make a
needed measurement. To move the Virtual Ruler, click and drag from the center. To resize, click and drag on one of
the ends. You are not constrained to vertical or horizontal; the Virtual Ruler can be stretched in any direction
necessary.
To measure using the Virtual Ruler
1 Click 2D menu > Show Virtual Ruler. The Virtual Ruler is displayed on the design window.
(alternatively) Right-click the design window and choose Center Virtual Ruler.
2 Click-and-drag an end in the direction you want to measure. The measurement is displayed in the
center of the Virtual Ruler.
(optional) Click-and-drag the Virtual Ruler from its center to move it to a new location on the design
window.
Tip: Zoom in on the area you are measuring so you have a close-up view of the ruler.
To hide the Virtual Ruler
Click 2D menu > Show Virtual Ruler to uncheck the option.
Screen Colors
(alternatively) Right-click the Virtual Ruler and click Hide Virtual Ruler on the context menu.
Screen Colors
You can assign custom colors to areas of your design, such as plans, inactive floors, grid line colors, and the color of
your crosshair. These color settings, and more, can be customized by accessing the 2D menu.
To change a design color
1 Click 2D menu > Screen Colors. The Preferences dialog box is opened to the Design Colors
settings.
2 Click the thumbnail of the color you want to change. The Color dialog box is displayed.
3 Click a color from the Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix.
Note: The Color|Solid preview box displays the chosen color.
(optional) On the right side of the dialog box, move the arrow next to the color bar to define the
luminosity or type values in the Hue, Saturation, and Luminosity variables text boxes or RGB text
boxes.
4 Click OK and then click OK in the Preferences window.
67
Chapter
Drawing in 2D
To reset all colors
Click 2D menu > Screen Colors and click the Reset Colors button. All colors will be reset to the
default values. Click OK to close the window.
Chapter 6
Adding 3D Features
Architect 3D lets you view your home in a fully-rendered 3D view. You can select exterior and interior wall color, add
realistic roof materials, and select from a variety of woods to make your home design completely unique. View all your
customizations in the 3D View Window.
By adding color, trim, and materials, you can make decorative changes to the 3D presentation of your home design as
quickly as you think of them. This makes it easy to experiment with a variety of colors, both inside and outside your
home, before picking up a paintbrush!
Series.
Organizing Library Content

The Categories drop-down menu for each library includes three content libraries and a favorites list.
Stock Library
The Stock Library includes content that is delivered with the initial installation of the software. This content cannot be
edited directly, however you can copy these items to the User Library for editing, and/or add them to the Favorites list.
User Library
The User Library is populated when you copy items from another library to the User Library, either from within the
application or in Windows Explorer. The User Library is also populated with objects and components you save using
the PowerTools, for example Door Designer. When items are copied from a Stock Library, you can edit the object.
69
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
User Library content must be organized by category, so when you copy an item to the User library, you must choose a
category or create a new category. You can choose to have one category for all your User Library content or create
multiple categories, and sub-categories, to organize your content.
There are two methods for creating a category:
When you right-click an item in the application and choose Copy To User Library, the Copy To Library window is
displayed. Any categories that youve already created in this library are listed in this window, and you can choose
one of them if you want to copy the item to one of the categories.
To create a new category, click the New button and choose to either create a new top-level category or select one
of the existing categories to create a sub-category below it.
Using Windows Explorer you can create and delete folders to manage categories in the User Library folder. The
User Library folder location in Windows Explorer is: C:\Users\<USER>\My Documents\Punch! Software\User
Library. Once a category exists, you can then copy content into the folder and it will be available in the application.
When copying an object from another version of Punch! software, there are three files that need to be included:
.pob file, .pod file, and .ppv file. If any of these is missing, the object will not copy successfully.
Note: When you add content to the User Library category folders, the content files must exist in a folder where no
subfolders exist. For example, you can create a category named Patio Pavers and then add the content files to that
category, but you cannot add files to that category and also create more folders for light patio pavers and dark patio
pavers.
To create a new category when copying an item
1 Right-click an item in the Preview bar and choose Copy To User Library. The Copy to Library
window is displayed.
2 Click the New button then choose New Category Here to create a new top-level category, or
choose an existing category to create a sub-category, and then click OK. The Category Name dialog
box is displayed.
3 Type a name for the category and then click OK.
Organizing Library Content
4 Select the library where you want to copy the item and then click the Copy button.
To create a new category in Windows Explorer
1 In Windows Explorer, browse to the following folder location: C:\Users\<user>\Documents\Punch!

Software\User Library.
2 Double-click the folder for the library where you want to add a category.
3 Click the New Folder button and type the category name and then press ENTER.
You can create sub-categories inside the new category folder to further organize content.
To delete category
1 In Windows Explorer, browse to the following folder location: C:\Users\<user>\Documents\Punch!

Software\User Library.
2 Delete the category or sub-category you want to remove.

Downloaded content library
Occasionally, new library content becomes available and can be installed via content pack. This is considered
downloaded content. Downloaded content is automatically added to its own folder within the User Library folder, which
you can access by clicking the Downloaded content tab on the Categories drop-down menu.
To download content packs
1 Browse to the Content Packs page on the Punch! Software website and download the content pack
you want. Most content packs must be purchased.
2 Navigate to the folder location where the content pack EXE was downloaded and double-click the
file to start to content installation. The Welcome window is displayed.
3 Click Next and then click Finish to complete the installation. The content pack is automatically
added to the DLC folder in the User Library for the relevant category.
Favorites List
The Favorites list gives you the flexibility to compile items that you like, or plan to use later, to your Favorites as you
browse through content categories. You can also populate your Favorites list with all of the items you may want to add
to a particular room or area of your design and then add them all at once without having to search the Preview bar for
71
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
the item you want. When you tag an item as a Favorite, a star appears so you can see that it is a Favorite, and the item
is added to your Favorites list.
The contents in the Favorites list is relative to the library where they exist. For example, if you add some paint colors to
the Favorites list, you wont see those in the Favorites list while youre in the Furnishings library; when youre in the
Furnishings library, only items added to the Favorites list from Furnishings are visible. As you add items to your
Favorites list, they are organized using the same category/sub-category structure that exists in the Categories dropdown menu.
To add or remove Favorites
Click the star in the bottom-right corner of an item thumbnail to add it to the Favorites list.
To remove an item from the Favorites list, click the star again to deselect it.
(alternatively) You can also right-click an item to add or remove it from the Favorites list.
To access the Favorites library
1 Click the Libraries tab and choose the library you want from the Libraries drop-down menu.
2 Click the Content drop-down menu and click the Favorites tab. The items that have been added to
the Favorites library are displayed in the Preview bar.
To hide the library, click the Favorites tab again.
Using the ProjecTape

Architect 3Ds ProjecTape helps you position plants, furniture, retaining walls, and more, exactly where you need
them, the first time! The ProjecTape displays the dimensions from its center point to each of the four nearest objects or
surfaces, allowing you to measure from multiple surfaces at once and specify the exact position you are looking for.
Once placed, you can reposition the ProjecTape manually or by specifying values.
In the example below, the ProjecTape is used to position the corner of a nightstand a specific distance from two walls.
To position the ProjecTape
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the ProjecTape Tool.
Using the ProjecTape
2 Move the cursor around the design window to see the distance to each of the nearest surfaces or
objects. When the center of the ProjecTape is positioned where you want it, click to place it in your
design.
Once placed, drag the center point to move the ProjecTape to a new position or use your arrow keys
to nudge it incrementally in a specific direction.
Note: When you adjust one end point, the other points are affected.
To reposition the ProjecTape by a specified distance
Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the center point of
the ProjecTape. Its properties are displayed on the Properties tab.
When the ProjecTape is selected, you can reposition it by rotating a
specified amount or incrementally. You can also reposition the
ProjecTape by defining the distance the center point should be
from each of its end points.
Rotation Angle value determines the angle of the ProjecTape,

which rotates from 0 to 359 degrees, in a counter-clockwise
direction. Type a value in the Rotation Angle field and press the
ENTER key, or click the Rotate buttons to rotate the ProjecTape
in increments of 1-degree in the desired direction.
Detections setting specifies whether dimensions are measured
from Wall Surfaces or Wall Centers.
Wall Surfaces
Wall Centers
Set Distance From allows you to specify the distance from a selected point to the ProjecTape center point.
Each point on the Properties tab corresponds to a color-coded end point in the design. For example, the
Yellow point is selected so the distance that is entered is applied to the length between the center point and
the yellow point.
73
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
Dimension Text controls the visibility of the ProjecTape dimensions. When selected, dimensions are
displayed. When deselected, dimensions are hidden.
To turn off the ProjecTape
Click to select the center point of the ProjecTape and press the DELETE key to remove the
ProjecTape from your design.
3D Objects Libraries
With Architect 3D, you can add details to the 2D drawing
and 3D view presentation of your design using a variety of
objects. The 3D objects are available in the Furnishings
library.
Furnishings includes many categories of objects for you to
add to your design. When a category is selected its
contents are displayed in the Preview Bar. You can then
drag-and-drop an object into your design. There are also
a number of library options for organizing content as you
design. You can add objects from any of the available
content libraries or favorites list. For more information on
the different content libraries, see Organizing Library
Content, on page 69. In addition to the content in the
available libraries, you can import a Custom Workshop
object or 3DS file that you have saved and then use that
file in your design.
Objects can be dropped into the design window or
dropped into a 3D view window. When dropped
into a 3D view, the object elevation is based on
the location of your cursor. If dropped onto a floor
or ceiling surface, the object is automatically
placed at the surface elevation.
Objects only appear in 3D when you are viewing
in 3D mode; in the design window objects appear
as 2D symbols.
The Furnishings library is accessible at any time
and objects can be placed on any plan tab. Once
placed in your design, 3D objects can be
customized using 3D Custom Workshop.
To add 3D furnishing objects to your design
1 Click the Libraries tab and choose Furnishings from the Libraries drop-down menu.
2 Click the Categories drop-down menu and choose the Library tab and category you want to view.
Its contents are displayed in the Preview Bar.
Some of the categories are organized into sub-categories. Click to expand a category to see its
contents.
3 Scroll through the available objects in the Preview Bar and drag-and-drop the one you want to place
onto the design window or 3D view window.
Select the object you just placed to drag it to another location on your design window to position it as
needed.
Editing 3D Objects
To import a 3D Custom Workshop object
1 Click File menu > Import > Punch! Custom Workshop Object. The Import Punch! 3D Object
dialog box is displayed.
Note: You can import .POB files only.
3 Click Open. The object is placed in the center of your 2D design.
4 Double-click the object to open it in 3D Custom Workshop.
To import a 3DS file
1 Click File menu > Import > 3DS File. The Import 3DS Design dialog box is displayed.
3 Click Open. The object is placed in the center of your 2D design. The Status Bar displays the
progress, as the file is converted.
Editing 3D Objects
Once youve placed 3D objects in your drawing, its easy to move, delete, copy, and rotate objects, usually involving
just one or two mouse clicks. In the example below, a chair is selected in the 3D view and its properties are displayed
on the Properties tab, including its rotation angle, sizing, and rendering options. You can also edit objects using 3D
Custom Workshop. For more information, see 3D Custom Workshop, which begins on page 429.
To resize an object
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and then click to select an object. Its properties are
displayed on the Properties tab.
2 Type the Width, Height, and Depth, in feet and inches or percentages, to customize them. Press
ENTER to accept each new value.
(optional) Type an angle, if you want to rotate the object. Press ENTER to accept each new value.
To rename objects

2 Right-click an object and choose Object Information from the context menu. The Custom
Workshop Object Information dialog box is displayed.
75
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
3 Type a new name in the Object Name text box then click OK.
Note: This is the name that is listed in the spreadsheet, created by Punch! Estimator.
2D Symbols Library
A library of 2D symbols is available. These are visual representations you
can add to your design that do not appear in the 3D view.
2D Symbols includes many categories of symbols for you to add to you
design. When a category is selected its contents are displayed in the
Preview Bar. You can then drag-and-drop a symbol into your design.
You can also add symbols from the User Library, Download Content,
Favorites list. For more information on the different content libraries, see
Organizing Library Content, on page 69.
It is important to keep in mind that the objects only appear in 3D when you are viewing in 3D mode. In the plan
drawing, objects appear as 2D symbols, while textures such as color, wallpaper, wainscoting, and other materials, do
not appear in 2D at all.
Once placed in your design, you can edit 2D symbols using the Symbol Editor. For more information, see Symbol
Editor, which begins on page 417.
To add 2D symbols
1 Click the Libraries tab and choose 2D Symbols from the Libraries drop-down menu.
contents.
Wall Accessories Library
3 Scroll through the available symbols and drag-and-drop the one you want to place onto your design
window.
Select the symbol you just placed to drag it to another location on your design window to position it
as needed.

The Wall Accessories category is very large and includes artwork
as well as drapes, blinds, curtains, and other window and door
accessories, which should be used in conjunction with the Wall
Accessory tool (available on the Floor plan tab).
The elements in the Wall Accessories library are applied to an
existing accessory in the 3D view using drag-and-drop. Artwork,
which is available from the Wall Accessories category, is applied
to a wall in the 3D view using drag-and-drop.
For information on adding accessories to your drawing, see
Adding Accessories, on page 138.
To add wall accessories using drag-and-drop
1 Open a 3D view window and then click the Libraries tab and choose Wall Accessories from the
Libraries drop-down menu.
contents.
3 Scroll through the available wall accessories and drag-and-drop the one you want to place; onto an
accessory in the 3D view window.
If SmartWand is enabled, choose how you want the accessory applied. For more information, see
Using the SmartWand, which begins on page 94.
77
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
Plants Libraries
Thousands of plants are included with
Architect 3D, which makes designing
your landscape easy and fun. Divided
into several categories, choose the ones
that grow best in your region.
In addition to the content in the available
libraries, you can import a plant image
and a corresponding plant information
file to add your own plant(s) to the
library.
Plants can be dropped into the design
window or dropped into a 3D view
window. When dropped into a 3D view,
the plant elevation is based on the
location of your cursor. If dropped onto a
floor or ceiling surface, the object is
automatically placed at the surface
elevation.
Tip: Hover your cursor over the

preview of the plant its name is
displayed in the Status Bar.
Plants Libraries
Note: You can see all of the plants in your drawing by

showing the Plant Inventory Bar. For more information, see
Plant Inventory Bar, which begins on page 81.
Below are some references that may be helpful as you
design:
Elevating
Objects
Hardiness Zones
Growing the Landscape
Adding a Visual Array
Filling a Shape with Plants
Viewing
To add plants
1 Click the Landscape plan tab and then click the Libraries tab and choose Plants from the Libraries
drop-down menu.
contents.
3 Scroll through the available options and drag-and-drop the plant you want to place onto your design
window or onto your 3D view window.
79
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
To view plant description, requirements, and growth information
On the design window, right-click the plant and choose Plant Details on the context menu. The
Plant Details window is displayed, showing the available information for that plant.
To edit plant description, requirements, and growth information
1 Copy the plant to the User Library. For information on working with the different libraries, see
1 Navigate to the plant preview in the User Library Preview bar, then right-click the plant and choose
Edit Details. The Plant Details dialog box is displayed.
2 Edit the details you want to change and then click OK.
To import a plant
1 Click File menu > Import > Plant to Library. The Open dialog box is displayed.
2 Find the file you want to import and then click to select it. A preview is displayed.
3 Click Open. The Plant Import Wizard welcome page is displayed.
(optional) Click Import to import an information file (.pti file) for this plant.
4 Click Next. The Description page is displayed.

5 Type characteristics in the corresponding fields to describe the plant you are importing and then
click Next. The Requirements page is displayed.
Plant Inventory Bar
6 Specify the plants requirements, such as sunlight, water, and soil type, and then click Next. The
Miscellaneous page is displayed.
7 Specify the planting zone and growth rate, and then click Next. The Finish page is displayed.
Note: For more information on regional and temperature requirements, see Viewing Hardiness
Zones, on page 82.
8 Choose the Plant Category where you want to import the plant or click the New button to create a
new category or sub-category.
Note: Some categories have sub-categories. Simply expand the main category to see the subcategories.
(optional) Type a new name in the Save File As field.
9 Click Finish. The plant is imported based on the details youve provided and is displayed in the
preview bar automatically.
The plant details can be edited in the Plant Details dialog box. For more information, see To view
plant description, requirements, and growth information, which begins on page 80.
Plant Inventory Bar

Architect 3D keeps track of which plants
you have used in your landscape. The
Plant Inventory Bar shows all plants that
are on the visible plan and on the active
floor. From this bar, you can easily find
and/or replace all occurrences of each
plant in your design.
When the Plant Inventory Bar is visible,
you can select all occurrences of a plant
in your design, delete plants from your
design, and replace plants in your
design by dragging a different plant onto
an existing plant in the Plant Bar.
To access the plant inventory bar
Click Design menu > Show

Plant Bar. The Plant Inventory
Bar is displayed across the
bottom of the design window.
To select all occurrences of a

plant
On the Plant Inventory Bar,

double-click a plant. All occurrences of that plant are selected in the plan.
To delete a plant
On the Plant Inventory Bar, right-click a plant and choose Delete Plants. All occurrences of that
plant are deleted from the design.
To replace all occurrences of a plant
On the Preview Bar, click the plant you want to use; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto the
plant you want to replace on the Plant Inventory Bar. All occurrences of that plant are updated in the
design.
81
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
Viewing Hardiness Zones

Architect 3D includes USDA Hardiness Zone maps for
the contiguous 48 states, Alaska and Hawaii, Canada,
Europe, and Australia. All of the maps are available
from the Plants
The zones in the hardiness zone map correspond to
the zones listed in the plant details for each plant, so
you can easily find the ideal plants for your location.
All plants included in Architect 3D can be sorted using
this information.
For information on sorting plants see Finding Plants,
For steps to access plant details see To view plant
description, requirements, and growth information,
To view a hardiness zone map
1 Click the Libraries tab and choose Plants from the

Libraries drop-down menu. The Plants categories
become available.
2 Click the Categories drop-down menu and, at the

bottom of the menu, click the Options button. The
Hardiness Zones are displayed on the menu.
3 Click the Hardiness Zone map you want to view.

To hide the hardiness zone map
Click anywhere on the zone map.
Finding Plants
Architect 3D includes thousands of plants to make designing your landscape easy and fun. PlantFinder is a powerful
sorting engine that lets you see only the plants that fit your particular criteria. You can also find plants that are already
in your design or by searching for a plant name.
Sorting Plants
By selecting the plant characteristics you want and deselecting the ones you dont want, you can filter the plants that
are displayed in the Preview Bar for a selected plant category. Only the plants matching all the selected options are
displayed in the Preview Bar.
Tip: To narrow your search, check fewer boxes.
Finding Plants
To sort plants
1 Click the Libraries tab and choose Plants from the Libraries drop-down menu. The Plants
categories become available.

bottom of the menu, click the Options button.
3 Choose PlantFinder from the Options menu. The

PlantFinder dialog box is displayed.
4 Deselect the criteria that does not meet your needs or

select the criteria you do need.
(optional) Click the View All buttons to select all
options in a category.
5 Click OK. Only the plants matching all the variables

selected are displayed in the Preview Bar when
viewing a plant category.
Locating a Plant in your Design

With so many plant options, you may lose track of where you found a plant that youve added to your design. There is
an easy way to track down a plant from your design window or from a 3D view window.
To locate a plant in the design window
In the design window, right-click the plant you want to locate and choose Locate Plant on the
context menu. The plant category is displayed on the preview Bar and the plant is selected.
83
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
To locate a plant in the 3D view window
In the 3D view window, click the Find Applied Tool and CTRL+click the plant. The
plant category is displayed on the preview Bar and the plant is selected.
To find a plant by name
1 Click the Libraries tab and choose Plants from the Libraries drop-down menu. The Plants

bottom of the menu, type the botanical or common
name of the plant in the text field and click the
Search button. Plants matching the criteria you
specified are displayed in the Preview Bar.
To view all plants
Click the Plants library drop-down menu and, at the bottom of the menu, click the Options button
and choose View All Plants.

With Architect 3D you can watch your landscape grow from year to year. With just a couple of mouse clicks you can
watch your landscape change over 20 years.
There are two ways to grow the plants in your landscape:
Grow to a specific age The Plant Growth Projection age is available on the General page in the Design Options
window and allows you to enter the age (in years) that you want your landscape.
Grow incrementally by year The Plant Growth Meter is available on the Landscape plan toolbar and allows you
to grow your landscape incrementally, one click at a time.
Note: To change the planting age for individual plants, see To customize the planting age, on page 85.
To grow your landscape to a specific age
1 Click Design menu > Plant Growth Projection. The Design Options dialog box opens to the
General design settings.
2 Under the Plant Growth Projection section, type the maximum growing age for plants in the Grow To
text field and click OK. Plants grow to the age youve specified.
To grow your landscape incrementally
1 Open a 3D view window and position it to easily see the area of your landscape you want to watch
mature.
2 Click the Landscape Tab. The Plant Growth Meter is displayed to the right of the plan tools.
3 Clicking the smaller tree to the left of the Plant Growth Meter makes the plants
appear younger, while clicking the larger tree, on the right, makes them
appear older.
The age is displayed in the Status Bar as you click the Plant Growth Meter.
To customize the planting age
1 Click to select the plant you want to customize. The plants

2 In the Age Planted text box, type the age of the plant at the time of
planting and press ENTER.
Note: Planting age can only be adjusted after a plant is placed.
Exporting a Landscape Quote

You can export your landscape design to the Punch! Landscape Quote app for iPhone.
Plant list is built automatically from your design project
85
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
Quantities are automatically added for plants
Mulch bed list is created automatically
Area is imported for each mulch bed
For more information visit the Punch! Software website: http://www.punchsoftware.com/c-31-iphone-ipad-apps.aspx.

To export to Landscape Quote
1 Click File menu > Export > Landscape Quote.

2 In the File Name text box, type a name. Architect 3D automatically adds the extension, then click
OK.
3 Email that file to your iPhone and then on your iPhone, press the attachment icon and select Open
in LandscapeQ.
4 Once in Landscape Quote, just fill in the prices of the items you want to budget.
Applying Trims
It is easy to add base trim, crown molding, or library
paneling for an elegant appearance or use wainscoting if
you want to apply two different materials on one wall. You
can also add case molding around doors and windows
and even apply trim to the top of cabinets for a completely
unique look. All of these customizations are made in the
3D view window.
Trim is applied to directly to the surfaces in the 3D view
using drag-and-drop. You can change a trim style by
applying a new style right on top of an existing style and
even remove trim after it has been applied.
There are three trim styles available from the Trim library:
Base Trim
Crown Trim
Library Paneling
The Base Trim Library and Crown Trim Library include categories of trim, including window and door casing styles.
The Library Paneling library includes various heights of paneling to apply to your design.
If SmartWand is enabled, you can choose to apply to the
individual surface or to all similar surfaces. For more
information, see Using the SmartWand, which begins
on page 94.
To apply paint and materials to trim, see Applying Paint
and Color, which begins on page 87 or see Applying
Building Materials, which begins on page 91.
To apply base trim and crown trim
1 Click the Libraries tab and choose Trim from the Libraries drop-down menu. The Trim Type
libraries become available.
2 Click the Trim Type library drop-down menu, then choose Base Trim Library or Crown Trim
Library. The trim style categories are displayed.
Applying Paint and Color
4 Scroll through the available trim options and drag-and-drop the one you want to place onto a surface
in the 3D view window.
To apply library paneling
2 Click the Trim Type library drop-down menu, then choose Library Paneling. Its contents appear in
the Preview Bar.
3 Scroll through the available trim options and drag-and-drop the one you want to place onto a surface
To remove wall trim
2 Click the Trim Type library drop-down menu, then choose the trim type that you want to remove.
The trim styles are displayed in the Preview Bar.
3 Drag-and-drop the Remove Trim style onto the wall from which you want to
remove trim.

With Architect 3D, you can try out various color schemes
with ease. Now you can choose between paint libraries
and color families with just a few mouse clicks. Walls are
just one example of what can be colorized; you can also
apply color to furniture, window trim, doors, and other
surfaces. All of these customizations are made on the 3D
view window.
There are three types of Paint Colors available:
Custom Colors
Color Ramp
Paint Library
Custom Colors
Custom colors are themed color groups, each containing
colors that can be customized using the Color dialog box.
You can start with one of the basic colors available, then
change the RGB composition (red, blue, and green values),
or double-click a color in the color spectrum window to mix
your own color.
87
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
In addition to customizing colors from the Preview Bar, you can add custom colors to your library. If you see a color
you like, maybe a shade of green in the grass, or a fabric on a couch that is not currently available as a color, you can
add that color to your library. For more information on adding custom colors, see Identifying Colors and Materials in
3D View, on page 90.
To define a custom color
1 Click the Libraries tab and choose Paint Colors from the Libraries drop-down menu. The Paint
Colors Type libraries become available.
2 Choose Custom Colors from the Paint Colors Type drop-down menu. The Categories drop-down
menu becomes available.
3 Click the Categories drop-down menu and choose the category you want. Its contents appear in the
Preview Bar.
4 In the Preview Bar, right-click the color you want to customize and click Choose Color (or doubleclick the color preview). The Color dialog box is displayed.
5 Click one of the Basic or Custom colors, or click in the color spectrum block to select a color.
(optional) Adjust the current Hue, Saturation, and Luminosity, or Red, Green, and Blue values to
create a custom color.
6 Click OK. The color you defined is displayed on the Preview Bar.
To apply the color, drag-and-drop the color onto a surface in the 3D view window.
Color Ramp
The Color Ramp offers a spectrum of colors with twenty-five shades for each color
option. To see the colors, drag the slider along the spectrum. The Preview Bar
displays the shades that are available for each color.
To apply color from the color ramp
1 Click the Libraries tab and choose Paint Colors from the Libraries dropdown menu. The Paint Colors Type libraries become available.
2 Choose Color Ramp from the Paint Colors Type drop-down menu. The
Color Ramp options become available. Twenty-five shades of the selected
color are displayed in the Preview Bar.
3 Drag the slider, below the color spectrum, to change the color family.
4 Scroll through the available shades in the Preview Bar to view the variations
of that color and then drag-and-drop the color you want onto a surface in the 3D view window.
Paint Library
The Paint Library includes interior and exterior
groups of colors.
To make designing easier, you can create custom
Decorator Palettes. For more information, see
Using the Decorator Palette, which begins on
page 291.
If SmartWand is enabled, you can choose to apply
to the individual surface or to all similar surfaces.
For more information, see Using the SmartWand,
There are a couple of ways to search for paint
colors, including using keywords and using the
Paint Chooser.
Keyword Search is available on the

Categories drop-down menu. Type the color
you are looking for in the text box and click the
Search button. All of the applicable colors are
displayed in the Preview bar.
Paint Chooser displays the active category

all in one window with small thumbnails of the
colors and a large preview of the selection.
You can change the active category by clicking the drop-down menu in the top-left corner of the window and
choosing a different category. To view the category, you must click OK on the drop-down menu.
To apply paint
1 Click the Libraries tab and choose Paint Colors from the Libraries drop-down menu. The Paint
Colors Type libraries become available.
2 Choose Paint Library from the Paint Colors Type library drop-down menu. The Categories dropdown menu becomes available.
contents.
89
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
4 Scroll through the available paint colors and drag-and-drop the paint color you want onto a surface
Identifying Colors and Materials in 3D View

As you experiment with different colors and materials during the design process, you may want to identify a previouslyused material. This is easy with Architect 3Ds Find Applied Tool. You can also identify a color you like in your design
and add it to the Custom Colors library.
Note: When adding a custom color, the color replaces the first color in the Gray Tones category. You can change the
custom colors at any time. For more information on editing these colors, see Custom Colors, on page 87.
Note: You can also use the Find Applied Tool to locate plants in the 3D View. For more information, see Locating a
Plant in your Design, which begins on page 83.
The material identified in the example below is the placemat on the table.
To use the find applied tool
1 Open a 3D view window and click the Find Applied Tool.

2 In the 3D view window, click the color or material that you want to identify. That color or
material is displayed in the Preview Bar.
To create a new color
1 Open a 3D View window and click the Find Applied Tool.

2 Press SHIFT and click the color you want to add. A dialog box is displayed.
3 Click Yes to save the color to your Custom Colors library.
Applying Building Materials

With Architect 3D, customizing the materials of your home
is a simple drag-and-drop procedure. Available materials
include backgrounds, brick, stucco, gravel, roofing, and
many more. You can even apply two different materials to a
wall, using the Wainscoting feature. For more information,
see Applying Trims, which begins on page 86.
You can create and import your own custom materials and
background images. When importing materials, the User
Library is the location where materials are imported. If you
do not have a User Library folder created for Materials, you
can create a new folder when importing. For more
information on working with the libraries, see Organizing
Library Content, on page 69.
If SmartWand is enabled, you can choose to apply to the individual surface or to all similar surfaces. For more
information, see Using the SmartWand, which begins on page 94.
To apply materials
1 Click the Libraries tab and choose Materials from the Libraries drop-down menu. The Materials
contents.
3 Scroll through the available materials and drag-and-drop the material you want to onto the desired
surface in the 3D view window.
91
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
To import a material
1 Click File menu > Import > Material to Library. The Open dialog box is displayed.
3 Click Open. The Material Importer dialog is displayed.
In the Material Preview section you can choose the number of tiles you want the material to have.
Seamless Options control the seams on the edges of the material. Horizontal blends images along their
sides; Vertical blends images along the top and bottom; Both blends horizontally and vertically; None does
not blend.
Blend Options control the distance and intensity of the blended edge. A lower blend option concentrates
blending at the edges of the image. A higher blend option concentrates blending across the entire image.
You can choose a predefined option or select Custom Blend to specify the distance and intensity.
Filename and Description define the name and description of the material. New material descriptions can
contain up to 78 characters.
Size values control the width and height of the material. You can enter specific values for each direction, or
select the Stretch checkbox direction to automatically stretch the material in that direction to cover the
surface where it is applied.
Transparent Black checkbox designates all black areas (RGB=0,0,0) of the material image as
transparent.
Library Location specifies where you want to import the material. You can choose an existing User Library
category or sub-category, or click the New button to create a new User Library category or sub-category.
4 Set the material options you want and then choose the Library Location where you want to save your
new material, then click OK.
To import a 3D background
1 Click File menu > Import > 3D Background. The Open dialog box is displayed.
Library Location specifies where you want to import the background image. You can choose an existing
User Library category or sub-category, or click the New button to create a new User Library category or
sub-category.
Background Filename and Background Description define the name and description of the material.
New material descriptions can contain up to 78 characters.
Rendering Options allow you to choose Keep Aspect Ratio to maintain the image size regardless of the
3D window size, or choose Stretch To Fit 3D View to resize the image depending on the size of the 3D view
window.
Auto adjust to viewing tilt angle checkbox adjusts the background as the 3D view is tilted.
Click OK. The background is visible in the 3D view and is displayed in the Preview Bar, in the library
that was selected. To apply a background, drag-and-drag the material onto the background in the
3D view.
93
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
Using the SmartWand

You can easily apply the same material, paint, or trim to
multiple surfaces using SmartWand. SmartWand can be
applied to walls, ceilings, doors, stairs, cabinets, and other
surfaces in the 3D view. We will use Paint in this example,
but SmartWand is used in the same way regardless of what
you are applying.
To apply using SmartWand, drag-and-drop the item you
want from the Preview Bar onto a surface in the 3D view
window The SmartWand menu lists all of the available
options for the surface youre applying to. Typically, this
includes the option to apply to the individual surface only, or
other similar surfaces in the room (or structure). Choose the
surface or surfaces where you want it applied. The material
is applied based on your selection.
For information on applying trim, paint, and materials, see:
Applying Trims, on page 86.
Applying Paint and Color, on page 87.
Applying Building Materials, on page 91.
Working with QuickPalettes
To enable or disable SmartWand
Click 3D menu > Decorating

Options > Enable SmartWand.
SmartWand is enabled when a
checkmark is visible and
disabled when no checkmark is
visible.
(alternatively) Click Design
menu > Options and under 3D
Preferences choose General.
You can select the Enable
SmartWand checkbox to
enable, or deselect to disable.
Click OK to close the window.
Working with QuickPalettes

As you draw, default colors and materials are applied to the surfaces in your drawing.
With Architect 3D you can control the default colors and materials that are applied
using QuickPalettes.
QuickPalettes are a collection of colors and materials that are designated for the
surfaces in your drawing. When a QuickPalette is active, all of the surfaces are
created using the colors and materials of that QuickPalette. You can also apply one of
the QuickPalette designs to update the surfaces in your drawing all at once, allowing
you to experiment with different looks and update entire rooms with just a few mouse
clicks. After a QuickPalette is applied to an entire room, you can update individual
surfaces using the finishes in a QuickPalette by applying them to only a particular
surface in the room.
QuickPalettes are controlled in the QuickPalette dialog box, where you can specify the
default QuickPalette to be used for subsequent rooms, edit the materials and colors of
each QuickPalette, and create new QuickPalettes. For more information, see Editing
QuickPalettes, which begins on page 96.
Default Palette Applied
Lively Teal QuickPalette Applied
To apply a QuickPalette to a room
1 Click the Libraries tab and choose QuickPalettes from the Libraries drop-down menu. The
QuickPalettes are displayed in the Preview Bar.
2 Drag-and-drop a QuickPalette onto a surface where you want it applied. If SmartWand is disabled,
the QuickPalette is applied.
If SmartWand is enabled, the SmartWand menu is displayed, with the option to apply the
QuickPalette to only that surface, or to all of the surfaces in entire room.
3 Click to apply QuickPalette to the surface(s) you want. The design is updated based on the
QuickPalette.
95
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
Note: If a QuickPalette is applied to an exterior element, each surface is updated individually.

To change the default QuickPalette for drawing
1 Click 3D menu > Decorating Options > QuickPalette to open the QuickPalette dialog box.
2 From the Current QuickPalette drop-down menu, click the palette you want
to use for subsequent surfaces in your drawing.
3 Close the QuickPalette dialog box. As you draw, the surfaces are finished
based on the active QuickPalette youve specified.
Editing QuickPalettes
You can edit QuickPalettes to customize the materials and colors that are used for each surface. You can also create
new QuickPalettes, rename existing QuickPalettes, and delete QuickPalettes (you cannot delete the Default
QuickPalette). These edits are made in the QuickPalette dialog box.
In the example below, the Automatic Room Flooring material is selected in the QuickPalette dialog box, and the
materials original library is displayed in the Preview Bar.
The red surfaces in the 3D previews show exactly where each material or color is applied. You can edit the material or
color associated with each surface by applying a different material or color from the Preview Bar onto the preview in
the QuickPalette dialog box.
Note: For more information on finding paint and colors, see Applying Paint and Color, on page 87. For more
information on finding paint and colors, see Applying Building Materials, on page 91.
To see the surface materials and colors for each palette, choose a different palette from the Current QuickPalette
drop-down menu. The Current QuickPalette is used to apply colors and materials to subsequent items in your drawing.
Editing QuickPalettes
You can rename a QuickPalette or edit its description by typing new text in the Name and
Description text boxes. For even more flexibility, you can create new QuickPalettes by
copying an existing QuickPalette and editing the surface materials and colors.
You can even filter your view based on the surface you want to edit using the Display Filter
drop-down menu at the bottom of the window.
To access the QuickPalette dialog box
1 Click the Libraries tab and choose QuickPalettes from the Libraries drop-down menu.
2 Click the QuickPalette Library drop-down menu and click Edit QuickPalettes. The QuickPalette
dialog box is displayed. To close the dialog box click the X in the top right corner.
(alternatively) Click 3D menu > Decorating Options > QuickPalette.
To customize a QuickPalette
1 Open the QuickPalette dialog box and then click the Current QuickPalette drop-down menu and
choose the QuickPalette you want to edit. The palette is displayed.
2 Click the material or color preview that is associated with the surface you want to change. That color
or material is displayed in the Preview Bar.
3 Find the color or material you want to use and drag-and-drop it onto the QuickPalette surface
material or color you want to customize. The surface is updated.
4 Close the QuickPalette dialog box.

To create a new QuickPalette
1 Open the QuickPalette dialog box, as previously explained and open the QuickPalette you want to
use as a starting point for your new QuickPalette from Current QuickPalette drop-down menu
2 Click the Create Copy button. The Copy QuickPalette dialog box is displayed.
3 Type a name and a description for the custom palette to add details about this palette and then click
OK. The new palette becomes active in the QuickPalette dialog box. You can now customize
QuickPalette and apply it to your design.
Note: You can change the name and description later while a palette is active in the QuickPalette
dialog box.
To rename a QuickPalette
Note: You cannot rename the Default QuickPalette.

1 Open the QuickPalette dialog box and then choose the QuickPalette you want to edit from the
Current QuickPalette drop-down menu. The palette is displayed.
2 Type a new name in the Name text box and then close the dialog box.
(optional) Type a description in the Description field to add details about this palette.
To delete a QuickPalette
Note: You cannot delete the Default QuickPalette.

1 Open the QuickPalette dialog box and then choose the QuickPalette you want to edit from the
Current QuickPalette drop-down menu. The palette is displayed.
2 Click the Delete button at the bottom of the dialog box and then click Yes to confirm that you want to
delete the palette and then close the dialog box.
97
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
Adding a Visual Array

The Visual Array Tool makes it easy to add a line of plants or 3D objects. From lining a path with plants, to edging a
flowerbed with lights, you can enhance your plan with just a few clicks. In this example we will use plants, but the steps
are the same for any other element.
When the Visual Array Tool is active, the Spacing properties become available on the
Properties tab. You should specify the distance you want between each item in the
array and whether that distance is measure as the gap between the items or measure
from the center of each item.
Gap Between spacing distance is measured from the ends of each plant or
object
Center to Center spacing the distance is measured from the centers of each
plant or object
You should be familiar with the plant and 3D object libraries and adding plants and 3D
objects to your design. For more information, see:
Plants Libraries, on page 78.
3D Objects Libraries, on page 74.

To add a line of plants
1 Open the desired Plant or 3D object library and click to select the plant or object you want to add to
your design.
2 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Visual Array Tool. The Properties tab is displayed with tool
options.
3 Type the distance you want between each plant and choose how you want the spacing
measure. Press ENTER to accept each new value.
Building Rooms Using Templates
4 In the design window, click once to set the first point of the array, then drag your cursor in the
direction you want. As you drag, the footprint of each object is displayed.
5 When you reach the length you want, click again to end drawing mode. The objects are placed in a
line, at the spacing you defined.
Building Rooms Using Templates

Architect 3D includes dozens of room templates, which will make designing your home easy and fun. Divided into
several categories, choose the template that suits your needs best.
To place a template
1 Click the Libraries tab and choose Templates from the Libraries drop-down menu. The Templates
categories drop-down menu becomes available.
contents.
3 Scroll through the available templates and drag-and-drop the template you want to onto the design
window.
(optional) Click the Selection Tool and then click and drag the template you just placed into
position.
99
Chapter
Adding 3D Features
Creating New Templates

With Architect 3D you can easily create room templates to suit your specific needs. When you create a template it is
saved to the User Library. If you do not have a User Library folder created for Templates, you can create a new folder
when saving the template. For more information on working with the libraries, see Organizing Library Content, on
page 69.
Note: The 3D Preview option is only available when a 3D view window is open at the time of creating the new
template. The 3D view should be so the objects in the template are visible.
To create a template
1 Once your room is designed exactly to your liking, select all walls, doors, and other features that you
want to include in your template.
2 Click the Libraries tab and choose Templates from the Libraries drop-down menu. The Templates
categories drop-down menu becomes available.
3 Click the Categories drop-down menu and, at the bottom of the

menu, click the Options button and choose Create Template.
The Save Template to Category dialog box is displayed.
4 Click to choose the Template Category or sub-category. You can choose an existing User Library
category or sub-category, or click the New button to create a new User Library category or subcategory.
5 Type a Template Name in the corresponding text box.

(optional) Type a Template Description in the corresponding text box.
(optional) Choose the Preview Style you want to save.
6 Click Save To Library. The template is added to that User Library category and displayed in the
Preview Bar.
Part 3
From the Ground Up
Chapter 7: QuickStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 8: Foundation Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 9: Floor Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 10: Electrical Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 11: Plumbing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 12: Roofing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 13: HVAC Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 14: Deck Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 15: Landscape Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 16: Detail Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 17: Framing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
103
111
115
149
171
181
193
201
209
233
245
Chapter 7
QuickStart
For many people, visualizing their dream home does not start with the outside shape of the building, but with a wish list
of individual rooms. Now you can create complex floor plans from the inside out, by laying out your home design room
by room. Create entire rooms with one click of the mouse! Build an entire floor plan in just seconds with Punch!
QuickStart.
Launching QuickStart
By default, QuickStart launches automatically upon starting the application. You change the interface preferences so
that the application opens directly to the design window instead of QuickStart, if you prefer.
To control QuickStart display
1 Click Edit menu > Preferences > User

Interface.
2 Under Startup, select the Start in

QuickStart checkbox to start in
QuickStart.
To bypass QuickStart and open in the
design window, deselect the Start in
QuickStart checkbox.
103
Chapter
QuickStart
3 Click OK to close the Preferences window.
Show Welcome Screen at Startup

You can toggle the initial QuickStart Help Window on and off, to suit your needs. The Welcome screen offers options
for starting a new project or opening an existing projects. You can also quickly access recent projects youve worked
on with one simple click. Additionally, the Welcome screen provides access to training material, sample plans, and
special offers for Punch! users.
For more information on project settings, see Project Settings, which begins on page 105.
To hide the Welcome screen at Startup
To hide the Welcome window when you launch Architect 3D, click to select the Dont show again
checkbox box on the Welcome window.
(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Preferences > User Interface and deselect Show Welcome
Screen under the Startup section, and then click OK.
(alternatively) On the Help menu click to uncheck Show Welcome Screen.
To show Welcome screen at Startup
Click Help menu > Show Welcome Screen. When enabled, a checkmark is visible.
Project Settings
(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Preferences > User Interface and select Show Welcome Screen
under the Startup section, and then click OK.
Project Settings
When beginning a project, you can start designing immediately using the default project settings, or specify particular
settings to be used throughout your design, such as the number of floors or ceiling heights.
If the Welcome screen is configured to display upon startup (which is the default setting), then you have access to the
New Project Setup dialog box from there (choose New Project (Custom)). If the Welcome screen is not displayed at
startup, you can access the New Project Setup dialog box by clicking File menu > New (or press CTRL+N).
The New Project Setup dialog box includes configured properties as well as a diagram to provide a visual
representation of these properties.
You have the option to specify the bottom floor as a basement. When this option is selected, the Basement Default
Properties become available, and the diagram is updated to include a basement level.
105
Chapter
QuickStart
To setup a project without a basement
1 From the drop-down menu, click to select the total number of floors you want in your project.
2 In the Default Properties section, type the ceiling heights and slab/joist thickness in the
corresponding text boxes.
The exterior wall height is the sum of the ceiling heights and slab/joist thickness, so it is not editable.
3 In the Ground Floor Default Properties section, type the slab/joist thickness.
4 Click OK.
To setup a project with a basement
1 From the drop-down menu, click to select the total number of floors you want in your project.
2 Select the Basement checkbox. The Basement Default Properties become available.
3 In the Default Properties section, type the ceiling heights and slab/joist thickness in the
The exterior wall height is the sum of the ceiling heights and slab/joist thickness, so it is not editable.
4 In the Basement Default Properties section, type the ceiling height and slab/joist thickness in the
The exterior wall height is the sum of the ceiling height and joist thickness, so it is not editable.
5 In the Height Above Grade text field, type a value to specify how much of the basement you want to
appear above grade.
Note: The Height Above Grade value does not affect the overall wall height, it only specifies how
much of the exterior wall height is above grade.
(optional) By default, your project will open to the basement floor. If you want to open to the first floor
above the basement, deselect the Switch to basement when finished checkbox.
6 Click OK.
Adding Rooms
Adding Rooms
You can create rooms with a few simple
clicks of the mouse. Punch! allows you to
use pre-designed room dimensions,
customize these dimensions, or create
your room from scratch.
The QuickStart Rooms toolbar features a
variety of color-coded room types that can
be customized to your wishes. Simply
select your room type, place your room on
the workspace, and change your rooms
dimensions as needed. When youre
finished placing rooms, simply click the
Continue button to update your design!
To control which floor you are working on,
see Work on Floor, on page 266.
To add pre-configured rooms
1 In the Rooms Bar, click the room

type that you want to create and then click on the workspace to place the
room.
Continue to place rooms until youve created the desired design.
2 Click the Continue button to edit your design on the design window.
To control the visibility of overlapping rooms
Right-click the room you want to place in back.
Double-click the room you want to place in front.
To resize rooms
1 Click to select the room you want to resize.

2 Drag a corner point to resize the room.
Viewing a QuickStart Design in 3D

As you design in QuickStart, you can see a 3D view of your design before you begin continue with your drawing in the
design window.
Note: For more information, see Moving Around in 3D, which begins on page 271.
107
Chapter
QuickStart
To see a 3D view in QuickStart
1 Click the 3D Preview button in the top-right corner of the design window. A 3D View is
displayed.
2 Use the navigations tools, available in the 3D View toolbar, to navigate around the drawing.
Setting QuickStart Render Options

With the QuickStart rendering options, you can control the auto-roofing behavior to determine whether or not a roof is
generated with your design. Additionally, you can show or hide both the roof and room ceilings while viewing a 3D
preview.
For information on editing an auto-roof, see Auto-Roof Properties, on page 182.
Generate automatic roofing when finished in QuickStart

controls whether or not a roof is automatically generated for your
design. When selected, a hip roof is automatically generated when
you click the Continue button to open the design in the design
window. When deselected, your design is created without a roof.
Room Ceilings is selected controls the display of ceilings over

rooms in your design. When selected, the room ceilings are
displayed in the 3D view. When deselected, ceilings are not
displayed in the 3D view.
Show Auto Roofing becomes available when Generate automatic roof... is selected. When selected, the autoroof is displayed in the 3D view. When deselected, the auto roof is not displayed.
To configure render options
1 Open the 3D view and click the Navigation and Rendering Options button. The
QuickStart Options dialog box is displayed.
2 Configure the settings you want and then click OK.

Sample plans are a set of pre-designed home plans, not created by an architect. They can be used as-is or can be
edited to your liking. Each of the available sample plans include 2D and 3D previews, as well as room dimensions.
By default, all home styles are displayed. You can narrow the options by choosing the home style you want from the
Style drop-down menu.
109
Chapter
QuickStart
To open a sample plan
1 Click File > Open Sample Plan.

(alternatively) Click Sample Plans on the Welcome window.
2 Click through the style options and choose the one you want. A 2D preview is displayed, as well as
the plans dimensions.
(optional) Click the 3D Preview radio button to see the home in 3D.
3 When you find the plan you want, click Open Sample Plan. The plan is displayed in the design
window.
Chapter 8
Foundation Plan Tab

Just like building in the real world, a good place to start is with solid foundation. The Foundation Plan Tab includes
tools to help you add the foundation details to your plan. You will learn to add stiffener beams, draw piers, and define
post tension. Most of the components added from the Foundation Plan tab are only visible in the 2D view.
Series.
Adding Stiffener Beams

Stiffener beams are used to support the foundation; typically they run from one end of the foundation to the other. You
can control the length, width, and dimension of each beam.
Below are some references that may be helpful as you design:
Stiffener Beam Properties

Elevating Objects
Nudging a Selection & Moving a Selection & Rotating a Selection
To add a stiffener beam
1 On the Foundation plan toolbar, click the Stiffener Beam Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to set the angle and length for the component.
Stiffener Beam Properties

Stiffener Beams are defined by their width and depth. Each of these properties can be increased up to 4'-2". Since
beams are only represented in the 2D view, you wont see changes to the depth reflected in the design window. You
can edit these values on the Properties tab while the tool is selected before you draw or by selecting a stiffener beam
in your drawing.
Note: When editing values in a text box, be sure to press ENTER to accept changes.
111
Chapter
Foundation Plan Tab
Width defines the distance across the beam. Width runs perpendicular to length.
Depth defines the distance from the top to the bottom of the stiffener beam.
When viewing the stiffener beam in 2D, you are looking at a top view. If you are
looking at the stiffener beam from the side, the depth run from top to bottom.
Auto-Dimension Turn on or off the auto-dimensions display by selecting or

deselecting the checkbox.
Length
Width
Below is a representation showing the depth, which is not visible in the 2D view.
Length
Width
Depth
Adding Foundation Piers

Foundation Piers support the foundation. They are concrete pads that add strength under a support column. Even after
you place piers, you can customize them. Foundation piers are visible in the 3D view when using the Framing render
mode.
Foundation Piers Properties

Elevating Objects
To add a foundation pier
1 On the Foundation plan toolbar, click the Foundation Pier Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the component in your design.

Foundation Piers are defined by their diameter and depth. You can edit these values
on the Properties tab while the tool is selected before you draw or by selecting a
stiffener beam in your drawing.
Note: When editing values, always press the ENTER key to accept new values in a
text field.
Adding Post-Tension Strands

Post-tension strands are used to prevent cracking in a concrete slab foundation. They extend from one edge of the
foundation to the other and are bolted into the frame and set in concrete.
Arrow indicates the direction in which the strands are stressed.

Elevating Objects
1 On the Foundation plan toolbar, click the Post-Tension Strand Tool.

Drawing the Foundation Slope

Foundation Slope is typically specified in garages or basement areas where there is a drain. It specifies which direction
the floor area slopes.

1 On the Foundation plan toolbar, click the Foundation Slope Tool.

113
Chapter
Foundation Plan Tab
Chapter 9
Floor Plan Tab

By beginning with QuickStart, walls of each room are automatically generated. Customize your floor plan by adding
doors, windows, stairs, and other components to begin your plan design. Architect 3D makes creating the final home
plan of your dreams, exactly as you want it, simple.
You can define your wall thickness, before placing, and create custom-sized walls in a snap. Further customize your
design by adding windows, doors, stairs, cabinets, and so on.
Series.
Drawing Walls
QuickStart makes it easy to begin your design process, but you can add or delete walls at any time. You can either
draw freeform or to specific dimensions, based on your needs and your design. Wall segments are automatically
joined when you draw, and are placed at right angles, while curved walls and bay walls include angular segments.
You can draw the followings types of walls:
Straight Wall
Curved Wall
Bay Wall
Wall Properties
2D Editing Methods
Changing Segment Length
Customizing Wall Framing Properties
Breaking a Wall
Straight Wall
There are two ways to draw straight wall segments: freeform or custom length.
The Wall Tool creates a straight, freeform wall segment. The angle and length are determined by the start and end
points of the wall you draw.
The Wall (Custom Length) Tool creates a straight wall segment based on a custom defined length that you specify.
The angle is determined by the start and end points of the wall you draw, and the length is based on the values you
specify in the Custom Wall Length dialog box.
115
Chapter
Floor Plan Tab
To draw freeform straight walls
1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Wall Tool from the Walls toolset.
2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag the wall segments to the desired
length and angle.
To draw custom length walls
1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Wall (Custom Length) Tool from the Walls toolset.
2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag the wall segment to the desired
angle. The Custom Wall Length dialog box is displayed when you release the mouse
button.
3 Type the Length you want in the text box and click OK.
Curved Wall
The Curved Wall Tool creates a curved wall based on a diameter and angle you define. The default length for each
segment in the curve is 3'-6", but you can change this on the Properties tab, in the Curved Seg. Length text box,
before you draw.
In the example to the right, a curved wall has been added in the kitchen. The curved segment length used to create
this curved wall was 1'-0".
Drawing Walls
To draw a curved wall
1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Curved Wall Tool from the Curved wall toolset.
2 On the design window, press the mouse button and drag to define the wall length. A
rubber band line appears and follows the pointer. This line signifies the diameter of
your curved wall.
3 Release the mouse button when the wall is the correct length and then drag the mouse clockwise, or
counter-clockwise, until the wall is the shape or angle you want.
Note: Press SHIFT to reverse the arc direction and flip the curved side.
4 Click to place the wall.
117
Chapter
Floor Plan Tab
Bay Wall
The Bay Wall Tool creates an
angular or perpendicular bay
section along an existing wall. You
can choose between an angular or
perpendicular style before you
draw using the Bay Style button on
the Properties tab. Once placed,
the bay style cannot be changed.
Note: As wall attachments, the

width of the bay wall must be
equal to or less than the length of
the wall segment youre attaching
to.
To draw a bay wall
1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Bay Wall Tool from the Curved wall toolset.
2 On the Properties tab, click the Bay Style button and choose the style you want.
3 Use the Drag Along Wall draw method to place an angular or perpendicular bay
section along an existing wall.
Wall Properties
Wall Properties
Once you have drawn walls for your design, you have the option to customize many
features. From wall thickness, floor height, and stud spacing to automatic flooring
options, you have alternatives for almost every feature.
Note: Always press the ENTER to accept new values in a text box.
Wall Style button allows you to choose from a variety of wall styles, including
irregular shapes, gable style, and many more. Wall styles are available to
accommodate different types of roofs.
Wall Height corresponds to the blue height line in the wall style icon. Editing this value adjusts the corresponding
wall segment.
Additional Segment Heights and Pitches are available depending on the wall style. For walls that use multiple
height and pitch settings, edit the values that correspond to the segment in the wall style icon.
Thickness defines the width of the lumber used for framing the wall. The higher the thickness, the wider the stud
boards.
Stud Spacing defines the distance between each stud board in the wall framing.
Curved Segment Length (applies to curved walls only) defines the length of each segment in the curved wall.
Edits to this value must occur before the wall is drawn.
119
Chapter
Floor Plan Tab
Auto-Dimensions checkbox controls the display of dimensions on individual wall segments. Select the checkbox
to enable; deselect to disable. When enabled, you can choose to measure walls from their surfaces or centers.
Note: If automatic dimensioning is off for the entire application, this setting does not enable
dimensions. For more information, see Dimensioning, which begins on page 59.
Callouts checkbox controls the display of dimensions for windows and doors on the selected wall segment.
Select the checkbox to enable; deselect to disable.
Flip Dims button controls which side of the wall the dimensions are displayed.

Straight line segments such as walls, fences, floors, and more can resized easily to adjust one of the ends of the
segment or both ends. Not only can you change the length of a segment, but you can also move an adjoining segment
with the segment.
The Change Segment Length dialog box include a red point and a green point that correspond to end points on the
selected segment. The point you choose is the side that is resized. You can also choose to resize from center.
Note: You may need to manually adjust end points to fine tune their position.
Resize segment from Center- segment is resized to the specified length by adjusting the segment from its
center.
Resize segment from Point (red)- segment is resized to the specified length by adjusting the red point.
Automatic Flooring
Resize segment from Point (green)- segment is resized to the specified length by adjusting the green point.
When the Linked checkbox is selected, the adjoining walls remain perpendicular and are linked to the resized
segment. In the example below, the top segment is resized to 8'-0" and the Linked checkbox is selected, so the
adjoined segments move with it.
To change the wall segment length
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Resize Segment (Custom Length) Tool.
2 Click to select a line segment. The Change Segment Length dialog box is displayed.
3 Select the end point from which you want to resize the segment, or choose Center to
resize the segment from its center.
(optional) Uncheck the Linked box if you want the wall to be resized, but do not want the adjoining
wall to remain perpendicular to it.
4 Type the new length in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen and then click Change.
The wall segment is resized.
For example, when Ft-In units are enabled, 10-0 indicates ten feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten
inches.
Automatic Flooring
By default, enclosed walls are drawn with a 1/2" auto-floor. You can turn the auto-floor on or off on the Properties tab,
as well adjust its depth.
After removing the auto-floor, you can manually draw a floor. For more information, see Adding and Removing
Flooring, which begins on page 136.
121
Chapter
Floor Plan Tab
Auto-Floor On
Auto-Floor Off
To control the auto-floor in a room
1 Click inside an enclosed room to select it. Its properties are displayed on the Properties tab. (Press
the SHIFT key as you click to select more than one room.)
2 On the Properties tab, click to select the Show Floor checkbox to turn on the auto-floor.
Deselect the Show Floor checkbox to turn off the auto-floor.
To change an auto-floor depth
1 Click inside an enclosed room to select it. Its properties are displayed on the Properties tab. (Press
the SHIFT key as you click to select more than one room.)
2 On the Properties tab, click to select the Show Floor checkbox to turn on the auto-floor and then
type the depth you want in the corresponding text box, then press the ENTER key. The auto-floor is
updated.
Automatic Ceiling
By default, enclosed walls are drawn with an auto-ceiling. You can turn the auto-ceiling on or off on the Properties tab.
After removing the auto-ceiling, you can use the Floor Tool to create a manually drawn ceiling. For more information,
see Automatic Flooring, which begins on page 121.
Auto-Ceiling On
Auto-Ceiling Off
Placing a Room Addition
To remove the ceiling over a room
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click inside an enclosed room.
Its properties are displayed on the Properties tab. (Press the SHIFT key as you
click to select more than one room.)
2 Click to deselect the Show Ceiling checkbox. The ceiling is removed from the
selected room.
To replace the ceiling over a room, reselect the Show Ceiling checkbox.
Placing a Room Addition

Using the Room Addition Tool, you can add space to your
design with just two mouse clicks. Quickly add space then
edit the room along with the rest of your design, or
customize the room addition settings first, and then place a
complete room that is ready for finishing touches. Room
additions are wall attachments, so they must be placed
along an existing wall.
Room Addition Settings

Before placing a room addition, you can customize the
settings or edit the addition components like you would
other components in your drawing.
Walls tab
Room Shape Choose between rectangular or

chamfered corner walls.
Room Sizing The text boxes correspond to the letters in

the diagram. When the Use Adjacent Wall Height
checkbox is selected, the room addition walls inherit the
height of the wall where it is attached. To specify a
different room addition wall height, deselect the
checkbox.
Windows and Doors tab
Window Style Choose which style windows are placed

on the walls (none, full-size, 3/4, or fill the walls with
windows).
Door Style Choose which style exterior door is included,

if any.
Exterior Door Choose the location of the exterior door.

The radio buttons correspond to the letters in the
diagram. You can also choose to include an interior
opening by selecting the Add Interior Opening checkbox.
This creates a cased opening leading to the addition.
123
Chapter
Floor Plan Tab
Roofing tab
Roof Style Choose the roof style for the addition (none,
flat, hip).
Roof Options The following options are available:
The Clip Roof at Wall checkbox allows you to stop the

roof where the room addition attaches to the wall. This
is useful when the anchoring wall is part of a multi-floor
design where the roof is not at the same level as the
additions roof. When this option is deselected, the
additions roof extends into the roof like a hip
connector.
Select the Use auto roofing settings if available checkbox to use the automatic roof settings that have been
set. For information on auto-roofs, see Auto-Roof Properties, on page 182.
Type the Soffit Depth, Gable Soffit, and Pitch you want in the corresponding text boxes.

Door Properties
Window Properties
Roof Properties
To place a room addition
1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Room Addition Tool.

(optional) On the Properties tab, click the Options button and edit the walls, windows, door,
or roof settings, and then click OK to close the dialog box.
2 Using the Drag Along Wall drawing method, drag along a wall and release on the side of the wall
where you want the addition placed.
Breaking a Wall
With Architect 3D, its easy it easy to fine tune your rooms,
adding an inset, for example.
Breaking walls is useful for removing a wall section or
creating separate surfaces for applying different colors and
materials. When a wall includes a break, you can select
the segments separately to delete, reshape, or resize the
wall segments. When a color, material, or trim is applied to
a segment, it is applied to only one segment.
In the example to the right, a wall break was used to break
a single wall segment and then resize one of the new
segments to create a half way between two room.
design:

Wall Properties
Applying Trims
Adding Doors and Openings
To insert a wall break
1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Wall Break Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to place the break and create two wall
segments.
Adding Doors and Openings

All doors and cased openings are automatically dimensioned
to neighboring walls, doors, and windows. There are three
types of openings and nine door styles available, as well as
two additional style libraries, and they are all placed in the
same way.
You can add cased openings with or without curvature, interior
and exterior doors, as well as glass doors and sliding doors.
Additionally, theres a stylized panel doors library and a
custom door library, which includes double doors and more
custom options.
Door styles are described in Door Properties, on page 127.
All of the door styles behave the same way expect double
doors.
Double Doors are composed of a left and right side, which
should be added to your design so that the left and right sides adjoin seamlessly. Below you can see the left and right
door in 2D and 3D.
Right Door
Left Door
125
Chapter
Floor Plan Tab
The Double Doors library displays the left and right doors in the Preview Bar.
Door Properties
Applying Building Materials & Applying Paint and Color
Applying Trims
To add a door
1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Door Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the door and release to place.
3 Drag to a side of the wall to define the door swing direction and then click to place the door.
To add a double door
1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Door Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Door Style button and choose the Custom
Doors style.
3 From the Library drop-down menu, choose Double Doors. The left and right
side doors are displayed in the Preview Bar.
4 Choose a left or right side door and then use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the
door and release to place.
5 Drag to either side of the wall to define the door swing direction and then click to place the door.
6 Click the Door Tool again to reset the style.
7 Choose the other side of the door from the Preview Bar and then use the Drag Along Wall drawing
method to position the door and release to place.
8 Drag to either side of the wall to define the door swing direction and then click to place the door.
Door Properties
Door Properties
Doors are defined by their width, height, elevation, and trim size. You can edit the
properties before you draw or after the component has been added to your design by
selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.
Door Style drop-down menu provides access to a variety of door styles.
Note: When choosing a door style for subsequent doors, be sure none of the doors
in your design are selected. Otherwise the new style and properties are applied to the
selection.
Width defines the distance from one side of the door opening to the other. You can change the width by typing a
value or by dragging an end point on the door to the width you want.
Height defines the distance from the bottom of the door opening to the top.
Elevate defines the distance between the auto floor elevation and the bottom of the door.
Trim Size defines the width of the trim around the door. This is not included in the overall height.
127
Chapter
Floor Plan Tab
Hardware styles
Click the + button to choose between Door Knobs or

Handles and Bars hardware styles
Click the Door Hardware button to access the
hardware library. When a style is selected, it is
automatically added to the door.
Vert. Offset defines the vertical position of the
hardware relative to the bottom of the door.
Horiz. Offset defines the horizontal position of the

hardware relative to the hinges.
Swing defines the angle the door is opened. This is set after the door is placed (0 closes the door, negative
angles are acceptable).
Flip Door button flips the door hinge and door swing to the opposite side.
Width
Swing
Height
Horiz. Offset
Trim
Vert. Offset
Adding Windows
Like doors and cased openings, there are an extensive
variety of windows available in Architect 3D. They are
automatically dimensioned to neighboring walls, doors,
and other windows. There are a number of window styles
available in Architect 3D as well as a custom library, and
they are all placed in the same manner.
You can combine windows side-by-side or stacked to
create almost any configuration or place custom style
windows. Window styles are described in Window
Properties, on page 129. Choose the window style before
or after you place the window.
design:
Window Properties
Elevating Objects
Applying Trims
Window Properties
To add a window
1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Window Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the component on wall where you
want it and release to place.
Window Properties
Once windows have been placed, it is easy to resize them. You can do this by specifying exact dimensions, or by
dragging one end, until you have the required size. You can also control the height, elevation and trim size. Some of
the window styles offer pitch and the ability to flip them vertically or horizontally to create beautiful groupings to suit any
room design
Window Style drop-down menu provides access to a variety of window styles.
Note: When choosing a window style for subsequent windows, be sure none of the
windows in your design are selected. Otherwise the new style and properties are
applied to the selection.
Width defines the width of the window opening. You can change the width by typing a value or by dragging an end
point on the window to the width you want.
129
Chapter
Floor Plan Tab
Height defines the height of the window opening.
Elevate defines the distance from the floor that the window is positioned.
Trim Size defines the width of the trim around the window. This is not included in the overall height.
Pitch defines the slope of window styles that include angles. The higher the pitch the more severe the slope.
Grill Style defines the number of horizontal and vertical grills exist for double hung and casement windows.
Flip buttons allows you to change the orientation of non-symmetrical windows.

Pitch
Width
Trim
Height*
Grill Style
Elevate
* Two windows are used in this example. The height of the bottom window only is called
out; the top window has a separate height.
Placing a Staircase
As you create more than one floor in your design, youll want to draw a staircase. Straight staircases and curved
staircases are drawn using the ceiling height, unless you specify a different height on the Properties tab before
drawing the staircase. The center line defines the direction and path of the staircase, while the staircase height value
defines the distance to the top of the staircase.
To create an opening for the stairway in the upper floor, see Adding and Removing Flooring, which begins on page
136. After youve drawn your staircase, you can apply different colors and materials to the steps, railing spindles,
posts, and handrails.
You can draw the followings types of staircases:
Straight Stairway
Curved Stairway
Staircase Properties
2D Editing Methods
Customizing Staircase Framing Properties
Applying Paint and Color & Applying Building Materials
Placing a Staircase
Straight Stairway
You can draw a staircase along a straight line or add
multiple points to create an L-shaped or U-shaped
staircase with landings. You can add as many points as
youd like to customize the shape of the staircase,
however the overall height is controlled by the height
property value. The number of steps in the staircase
depends on the overall height of the staircase as well as
the step height and depth.
Note: After a staircase if drawn you can reverse the

direction by right-clicking the center line and choosing
Reverse Staircase Direction.
To draw a straight stairway
1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Straight

Stairway Tool from the Staircase toolset.
2 In the design window, click to set the start point and drag in the direction you want the
stairs to rise, then click again to set the next point.
3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the stairway and then right click to place.
Curved Stairway
Curved staircases are a single segment that curve in the
direction you draw. The number of steps depends on the
overall height of the staircase as well as the step height
and depth.

To draw a curved stairway
1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Curved

Stairway Tool from the Staircase toolset.
2 Click to set the start point and drag to set the curve in the direction you want the stairs
to rise, then click and again to set the end point and place the staircase.
Note: Hold down the SHIFT key while drawing to constrain the staircase to a perfect arc.
131
Chapter
Floor Plan Tab
Once you have drawn a staircase, you can modify features and location to suit your needs. With Architect 3D you have
control over stairway height, width, riser, and tread dimensions, handrail height and placement, and whether the stairs
are open or enclosed.
Staircase Height defines the distance from the base of the staircase to the top
step.
Staircase Width defines the distance from one side of the staircase to the other
side.
Skirt Walls checkbox controls the display of the walls alongside the staircase.
When selected, the walls are enabled; when deselected they are disabled.
Step Height defines the height of the step risers.
Step Depth defines the depth of the stair treads.
Open checkbox controls if step risers are included. When selected, risers are excluded; when deselected they are
included.
Skirt Walls On
Skirt Walls Off
Open Step
Closed Step
Handrails Height defines the distance from the bottom of the handrail to the top.
Left and Right checkboxes control the display of the left and right handrails. When selected, the handrail is
enabled; when deselected it is disabled.
Closed Stringers checkbox controls whether the stringer is closed along the side of the staircase or open. When
selected, the full stringer is closed along the side of the staircase; when deselected the stringer is cut open with
each step.
Large Base checkbox controls the size of the base of the stringer. When selected, a large base is enabled; when
deselected it is disabled.
Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the displays of dimensions in 2D. If automatic dimensions are not displayed
for the entire drawing, the stair dimensions are not displayed. For details on controlling the automatic dimensions
display Dimensioning, on page 59.
Open Stringer
Closed Stringer
133
Chapter
Floor Plan Tab
Staircase Height
Handrail Height
Staircase Width
Closed Stringers
Step Depth
Step Height
Adding Railings
Using the Straight Railing or Curved Railing tool, you can
add railings to create a barrier around floor openings or
other edges where unequal elevations exist. You can add
railings around floor cutouts, at the top of a staircase,
around raised floor sections, or any other place in your
design.
The shape and configuration of railings can be customized,
and you can apply different materials to the rail, post, and
balusters. You can specify the railing height and baluster
spacing before or after drawing on the Properties tab. As
you draw a railing, each point you click as you draw creates
a post.
design:
Railing Properties
2D Editing Methods
Elevating Objects
To draw a railing
1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Railing Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Draw Method drop-down menu and choose the shape you
want.
3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a railing.
Railing Properties
This example shows a railing drawn using the Open Polygon shape
Railing Properties
Railings are defined by their height, baluster, and post settings. After a railing has been added to your design, you can
edit its properties by selecting the railing and clicking the Properties tab. Below are the available railing properties.
Note: Always press the ENTER key to accept new values in a text box.
Handrail Height defines the distance from the bottom of the handrail to the top
Baluster Spacing defines the distance between each baluster, or spindle.
Include Post checkbox controls if posts are included at each point you clicked
when drawing the rail. When selected, posts are included; when deselected they
are excluded. You can add or remove individual posts using the Add Point and
Remove Point Tools. For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which
begins on page 241.
Post Height defines the height of the posts. You can select individual posts and
edit their height, or double-click the rail to select all posts and then edit the height
so they match.
Curve options control curvature. For more information, see Changing Curve
Tension, which begins on page 238.
Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the displays of dimensions in 2D. If

automatic dimensions are not displayed for the entire drawing, the stair
dimensions are not displayed. For details on controlling the automatic dimensions
Handrail Height
Post Height
Baluster Spacing
135
Chapter
Floor Plan Tab
Adding and Removing Flooring

You can manually draw a floor section that exists independent of an existing floor or surface. This enables you to
customize the shape, thickness, and surface material to create a unique floor section.
You can also remove flooring by defining a cutout area. This works for floors drawing using the Floor Tool as well as
auto-floors created within enclosures.
The following options are available:
Floor Tool
Floor Cutout Tool
Floor Properties
Elevating Objects
Floor Tool
You can use floor sections in place of an auto-floor, for
raised areas in a room, to create ceilings for patios or
porches, or for other situations that call for an adjustable
surface.
To draw flooring
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Floor Tool from the Floor toolset.
2 On the Properties tab, click the Draw Method drop-down menu and choose the shape
you want.
3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a floor section.
This example shows a floor drawn using the Rectangle From Corner shape
Floor Properties
Floor Cutout Tool

You can easily design lofts, creative staircase openings, create an
opening where one does not currently exist.
To draw a floor cutout
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Floor Cutout Tool on the
Floor toolset.
you want.
3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a floor cutout section.
This example shows a floor cutout drawn using the Square From Center shape
Floor Properties
Once a floor or cutout section has been added to your drawing, you can access
flooring properties on the Properties tab:
Flooring Thickness defines the distance from the bottom of the floor section to
the top.
Curve options control curvature. For more information, see Changing Curve Tension, which begins on page
238.
Thickness 1"
Thickness 4"
137
Chapter
Floor Plan Tab
Calculate Area button automatically calculates the square footage of the floor section. The area is displayed on
the Properties tab.
Adding Accessories
You can easily add drapes, curtains, blinds, and more to any window or
door. Accessories are designed to track the walls, meaning they can only
be placed on wall segments and will move with those walls.
There are a number of libraries available with different styles of
accessories. When the tool is active, you can choose the style you want
and then place the accessory, or you can drag-and-drop a different style
onto the accessory in the 3D view. For more information on the Wall
Accessories library, see Wall Accessories Library, on page 77.
Once placed, you can automatically resize the accessory to match a
window size.
Wall Accessory Properties

Nudging a Selection
To add accessories
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Wall Accessories Tool.

2 Select the accessory you want to place and then use the Drag Along Wall drawing method
to place the accessory.
Wall Accessory Properties

Wall Accessories width, height, elevation, and how far they are offset from the wall. You can also adjust their
translucency to create a sheer effect. After an accessory has been added to your design, you can edit its properties in
the Properties tab by selecting the accessory. Below are the available properties.
Adding Cabinets
Accessory Width defines the overall distance from one side of the accessory to
the other side.
Top Elevation defines the elevation of the top of the accessory. Accessories are
positioned vertically based on their elevation, so when you edit this value it
affects the overall elevation of the accessory.
Bottom Elevation defines the elevation of the bottom of the accessory.

Accessories are positioned vertically based on their elevation, so when you edit
this value it affects the overall elevation of the accessory.
Accessory Height defines the overall distance from the top of the accessory to
the bottom.
Wall Offset defines the distance between the wall and the accessory.
Translucency slider controls the opacity of the accessory. For a more sheer
look, increase the transparency.
AutoSize resizes an accessory to match the dimensions of a particular window

or door. To autosize an accessory, click to select it, click the AutoSize button,
and then select the window. The accessory is automatically fit to the dimensions
of that window.
Width
Top
Elevation
Height
Wall Offset
Bottom
Elevation
Adding Cabinets
Cabinets can be added to your design with just a few
mouse clicks. In addition to placing pre-designed
cabinets, you can customize each feature as well as
create a cabinet of your own from scratch. There are
many cabinet styles available and each cabinets
dimensions are customizable.
When the tool is active you can choose the cabinet style
you want from the Properties tab. You can also change
the cabinet style after it has been placed in your drawing
Cabinet styles are described in Cabinet Properties.
design:
Cabinet Properties
139
Chapter
Floor Plan Tab
To add cabinets
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Cabinet Tool.

(optional) On the Properties tab, click the Cabinet Style button and choose the style of
cabinet you want.
2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the component on the side of a wall where
you want it and release to place.
To add an island
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Cabinet Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the island. T
Cabinet Properties
You can easily edit a cabinet after youve placed it in your drawing. From resizing base doors to adding additional
drawers, each aspect of a cabinet is customizable. To access the different faces and components of a cabinet, click
the cabinet Component button on the Properties tab, as described below.
Cabinet Styles
The available properties depend on the active cabinet style. You can choose the cabinet style before you place a
cabinet or after by selecting the cabinet in your design.
Cabinet Properties
Cabinet Components
The Component button lists the components on the active cabinet
style that are available for editing. When you choose one of the
components, its properties are displayed on the Properties tab. The
cabinet components that are available for editing depending on the
active cabinet style. For example, the Full Cabinet style includes
Top Cabinet and Top Door components, while the Base Cabinet
style does not. Each of the available Component properties are
described below.
Note: Always press the ENTER to accept new values in a text

box.
Top Cabinet
Height defines the height of the overall height of the top cabinet component.
Note: The width of the top cabinet is controlled by the base cabinet.
Depth defines the distance from the front of the cabinet to the wall.
Elevation defines the distance between the counter top and the base of the top
cabinet.
Shelves Width defines how wide the shelves are. The overall width of the top
cabinet is determined by the base cabinet, so when the shelves width is
adjusted, it affects the width of the top cabinet space.
Count defines the number of shelves that exist.
Stack Right add Stack Left checkboxes control if the shelves are included and
stacked on one or both sides of the top cabinet. When selected, shelves are included; when deselected they are
excluded.
Top Door/Base Door/Drawers
Note: The size of components is limited to the available space on the cabinet surface. If you enter a value that is
larger than the available space, the maximum size is used by default. After updating a size, you may have to adjust the
component position.
Width defines the distance from one side of an individual door or drawer to the
other side.
Height defines the distance from the bottom of an individual door or drawer to
the top.
Elevation defines the distance between the bottom of cabinet and the base of
the component.
Side Offset defines the distance that the component is positioned from the side
of the cabinet.
Count defines the number of doors or drawers.
Stack Doors/Stack Drawers checkbox controls whether base cabinet doors and
drawers are position side-by-side or stacked one on top of the other. When
selected, the components are stack on top of each other; when deselected they
are positioned side-by-side (available for Base Door and Drawers only).
Mirror Hardware checkbox controls the position of the door hardware. When
selected, all of the hardware is positioned at the same location on each door; when deselected the hardware is
positioned in the top corner of the inside edge.
Inset checkbox controls the display of the door or drawer. When selected, the component is inset as an opening;
when deselected the door or drawer is displayed. (available for Base Door and Drawers only).
141
Chapter
Floor Plan Tab
Facing Style button provides style options for the door and drawer faces.
Hardware Library button provides access to the

Cabinet Knobs and Pulls libraries.
Hardware Style button opens the hardware library

styles. When a style is selected it is automatically
applied to the hardware.
Hardware Positioning allows you to click an

arrow to move the hardware in that direction.
Base Cabinet
Width defines the overall distance from one side of the cabinet to the other side.
Height defines the distance from the bottom of the base cabinet to the top of the
base cabinet.
Depth defines the distance from the front of the cabinet to the wall.
Toe Kick defines the height of the toe kick, measured up from the bottom of the
cabinet.
Style Height defines the distance between the top and bottom edges of the
doors and drawers and the edges of the cabinet. When this value is adjusted,
the size and position of the doors and drawers is affected.
Style Width defines the distance between the side edges of the doors and
drawers and the edges of the cabinet. When this value is adjusted, the size and
position of the doors and drawers is affected.
Desk Opening checkbox controls whether or not the cabinet includes an

opening in the center. When selected, an opening is added, and you can adjust
the Width in the corresponding text box. When deselected, an opening is not included.
Flip Corner Position button flips the corner where the angled outward facing cabinet is positioned to the opposite
corner (applies to corner style cabinets only).
Adding Columns
Counter Top
Thickness defines the distance from the bottom of the counter top to the top.
Overhang Front defines the distance the front edge of the counter top extends
out from the cabinet.
Overhang Back defines the distance the back edge of the counter top extends
out from the cabinet (applies to island cabinets only).
Overhang Left defines the distance the left edge of the counter top extends out
from the cabinet.
Overhang Right defines the distance the right edge of the counter top extends
Backsplash
Backsplash Height defines the distance backsplash extends up from the

cabinet.
Backsplash Depth defines the distance from the front of the backsplash to the
wall.
Left, Right, and Back Visible checkboxes control the visibility of the backsplash
on that corresponding side. When selected, a backsplash is visible on that edge;
when deselected it is not visible.
Adding Columns
Columns can be added to your design for structural or decorative
purposes.
Column are made up of three components, and you can
customize the size and style of each. When placed in your
drawing, the nearest ceiling height is detected and the column is
drawn to that height.
Column Properties
2D Editing Methods
Elevating Objects
To add a column
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Column Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the column in your design.
143
Chapter
Floor Plan Tab
Column Properties
Columns are defined by their width, height, and the properties of their three components: Cap, Shaft, and Base. You
can easily edit a column after youve placed it in your drawing.
Total Width defines the overall width of the entire column, including the base,
shaft, and cap components.
Total Height defines the overall height of the entire column, including the base,
shaft, and cap components. You can enter the height manually or, if there is a
surface to which you want the column to extend, such as a ceiling or elevated
floor section, you can choose that surface from the list of detected surfaces.
Cap Properties includes the Width, Height, and Style for the column cap.
Shaft Properties includes the Width and Style for the column shaft.
Base Properties includes the Width, Height, and Style for the column base.
Editing Floor Properties
Editing Floor Properties

As you create your design, you may want to give a floor a unique name, change the ceiling height for an entire floor, or
reorganize floors as you add more levels. You can edit a floors properties and maintain control over various floor
levels at once or individually. The Edit Current Floor dialog box provides access to the floor properties, each
corresponding to an area in the displayed diagram, so you can see what you are editing.
Note: When editing a floor you must be working on that floor. For information on moving between floors, see Work
on Floor, on page 266.
Floor Properties
The Floor Properties control the overall wall height for the current floor, including the following settings that you can
edit:
145
Chapter
Floor Plan Tab
Name type a unique name for the floor. This is

displayed in the Working Floor drop-down
menu.
Ceiling Height type the height you want in the

Ceiling Height text box. Notice, the ceiling
height affects the Exterior Wall Height value,
which is the overall height of the wall.
Slab/Joist Thickness type the slab or joist

thickness you want in the corresponding text box. Notice, the value affects the Exterior Wall Height value, which is
the overall height of the wall.
Apply to existing structures checkbox applies the new ceiling height to the existing structures on this floor;
deselecting this option applies the new ceiling height to subsequent structures only.
Floor Elevation
The Floor Base Elevation settings control the elevation of the floors. You can also control how existing elements are
affected by elevation adjustments in the Automatic Elevation Adjustments section.
Floor is above drop-down menu specifies the

current floors vertical position in relation to
other floors. To adjust a floors Base Elevation,
the Floor is above setting must be None.
Base Elevation defines the elevation of the

floor base. A negative value results in below
grade.
Automatic Elevation Adjustments options

specify whether or not you want the elevation
adjustments to affect existing walls and interior
elements, and exterior elements on the current
floor and the floors above. When selected, the
option is enabled.
Note: It is recommended that existing walls and interior elements are elevated automatically so
they maintain the same elevation as the floor they are on.
To edit floor properties
1 Move to the floor you want to edit and then choose Edit Current
Floor from the Working Floor drop-down menu. The Edit Current
Floor dialog box is displayed.
2 Edit the floor properties as needed and then click OK.
Adding and Deleting Floors
Adding and Deleting Floors

You can add up to 20 floor levels to your design, depending on your software program. Each floor can be associated
with the elevation and ceiling height of the floor below it, or independent of the floor below it. When floor levels are
stacked on top of each other, making their height and elevations relative ensures that each level is positioned at the
correct elevation so walls and other elements are easily and accurately placed.
Adding Floors
The New Floor dialog box includes options for setting the floor height, elevation, and how elevation adjustments affect
existing floors on upper levels.
New Floor Name type a unique name for the floor. This is displayed in the Working Floor drop-down menu.
Note: A default floor name is automatically populated in the field, but each floor name must be
unique so only one floor can use the default name.
Ceiling Height type the height you want in the Ceiling Height text box. Notice, the ceiling height affects the
Exterior Wall Height value, which is the overall height of the wall.
Slab/Joist Thickness type the slab or joist thickness you want in the corresponding text box. Notice, the value
affects the Exterior Wall Height value, which is the overall height of the wall.
Floor is above drop-down menu specifies the new floors vertical position in relation to other floors.
To add a new top floor choose the current top level floor.
To insert between floors, choose the floor you want the new level to be above.
Note: When inserting a new floor, the Controls elevations for floors above new floor checkbox
becomes active. When selected, the floors above the new floor are elevated based on the exterior
wall height of the new floor. When deselected, the floors above the new floor are not repositioned.
To add a new bottom floor choose None.
Note: When None is selected, the Base Elevation text box becomes active. Type the elevation you
want for the base floor.
Automatic Elevation Adjustments options specify whether or not you want the elevation adjustments to affect
existing walls and interior elements, and exterior elements on the current floor and the floors above. When
selected, the option is enabled. This option is only available when the Controls elevations for floors above new
floor checkbox is selected.
Note: It is recommended that existing walls and interior elements are elevated automatically so
they maintain the same elevation as the floor they are on.
147
Chapter
Floor Plan Tab
Copy perimeter walls to new floor from drop-down menu allows you to cope the perimeter walls from an
existing floor level and draw them on your new floor level.
To add or insert a new top floor
1 Click the Working Floor drop-down menu and choose Add/Insert Floor. The New Floor dialog box
is displayed.
2 Type a descriptive name in the New Floor Name text box.

3 Type the floors ceiling height and slab/joist thickness in the corresponding text boxes.
4 In the Floor Base Elevation section, click the Floor is above drop-down menu and choose the
position you want for the new floor.
Set the elevation options as needed, depending on the position of the new floor level.
(optional) If you want to copy the exterior walls from an existing floor to your new top floor, click the
Copy perimeter walls to new floor from drop-down menu and choose from which floor the walls
should be copied.
5 Click Add to add the new floor level.

6 Click Add to insert the new floor.
Deleting Floors
You can delete any of your existing floors, however at least one floor must remain. When you delete a floor, all of the
floors contents are deleted with it.
To delete a floor
1 Click the Working Floor drop-down menu and choose the floor you want to delete.
2 Click the Working Floor drop-down menu again and then click Delete Current Floor.
A confirmation window is displayed.
3 Click Yes to delete the floor. The floor and all of its contents are removed from your design.
Chapter 10
Electrical Plan Tab

Adding electrical components to your home design is a simple matter of selecting the component you want to place
and clicking on your drawing plan. You can even turn the lights on and off!
Architect 3D provides handy placement features, such as associative dimensioning and wall tracking. Using
associative dimensioning, you can place components a specific distance from a neighboring wall or other electrical
component. Automatic wall tracking makes sure you place components, such as outlets and switches, without error.
Series.
Placing Receptacles
Architect 3D makes it simple to add electrical
components to your home plan. Using the
convenient tabbed utility tools, simply select the
components you want to place and click.
Dimension lines automatically appear, making it
easy to place components a specific distance from
a neighboring electrical component or wall
segment.
Youll notice that when placing certain outlets and
switches, the component is automatically tracked
to the wall segment, making accurate placement
simple. Floor and ceiling outlets are not tracked to
walls.
While a receptacle tool is active, or a receptacle is
selected in your drawing, you can choose a
receptacle style on the Properties tab. From the
drop-down menu, choose a Custom or Standard
library and then select the style you want on the
Preview Bar. The receptacle in your drawing is updated, and you can see the style in the 3D view. The Wall
Receptacle library is shown here, however the Floor Receptacle and Ceiling Receptacle libraries are organized
similarly.
Note: As you hover over each preview, its description is displayed.

You can further customize receptacles and switches using the following editing methods:
2D Editing Methods
Elevating Objects
149
Chapter
10 Electrical Plan Tab
Wall Receptacle
Wall receptacles are tracked along walls. Dimensions are
displayed as you drag the receptacle along the wall, indicating the
distance from the center of the receptacle to the nearest wall or
other electrical component.
You can choose the style you want on the Properties tab when the
Receptacle tool is active or a receptacle is selected in your
drawing.
To place a wall receptacle
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Wall Receptacle Tool from the Receptacle
toolset.
2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the receptacle on the side of a
wall where you want it and release to place.
Floor Receptacle
Floor receptacles are placed on the floor surface. Dimensions are
displayed as you move the cursor around the design window, indicating
the distance from the center of the receptacle to the nearest wall or other
electrical component.
If an auto-floor is detected, the receptacle is placed at an elevation that
considers the auto-floor depth. If changes are made to the auto-floor depth
after a floor receptacle is placed, the receptacles elevation also needs to
be adjusted.
Receptacle tool is active or a receptacle is selected in your drawing.
To place a floor receptacle
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Floor Receptacle Tool from the Receptacle
toolset.
2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the receptacle in your design.
Placing Receptacles
Ceiling Receptacle
Ceiling receptacles are placed on the ceiling surface. Dimensions are
displayed as you move the cursor around the design window,
indicating the distance from the center of the receptacle to the nearest
wall or other electrical component.
Ceiling receptacles are placed at the auto-ceiling elevation. If the
ceiling for a room is disabled, it is placed at 0 by default. You can then
adjust the receptacle elevation as needed.
Receptacle tool is active or a receptacle is selected in your drawing.
To place a ceiling receptacle
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Ceiling Receptacle Tool from the Receptacle
toolset.
2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the receptacle in your design.
151
Chapter
Wall Switch
Switches are tracked along walls. Dimensions are displayed as
you drag the switch along the wall, indicating the distance from the
center of the receptacle to the nearest wall or other electrical
component.
Switch Tool is active or a switch is selected in your drawing.
To place a switch
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Switch Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the switch on the side of a wall
where you want it and release to place.
Switch Connector Tool

Its easy to add switch connectors to your home design. Using the Switch Connector Tool, just click and drag to define
the connection. Once placed you can move a switch connector by dragging the entire segment or one of the end
points. Connectors are only visible in the 2D view.
To place a switch connector
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Switch Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to draw from a switch or electrical component to
another electrical component and release to place the connector.
Note: Hold down the SHIFT key while drawing to constrain to a perfect arc.
Adding Lighting
Adding Lighting
You can add interior and exterior lighting to your design with just a couple of mouse clicks. Each light has its own
properties so you can control settings individually. The following lighting options are available:
Fixture Lights
Flood Lights
Light Properties
2D Editing Methods
Elevating Objects
Adding Lighting and Shadows
Fixture Lights
Adding fixture lighting to your design is very similar to
adding other electrical components; however, they do not
track directly to walls or automatically display
dimensioning.
Architect 3D provides many light styles to choose from,
including recessed canned lights, heat/vent lights,
directional lights, even landscape lights. In addition, you
can control the type and intensity of illumination that each
fixture generates.
Before placing a light fixture in your drawing, choose a
Light Style on the Properties tab. Once the light is place, its
style cannot be changed.
To add a fixture lighting
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Fixture Light Tool.

2 Choose the light style on the Properties tab.
153
Chapter
3 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the light in your design.
Flood Lights
Flood lights are added just like outlets and switches; they
attach to and track along walls and their lighting, which
can be turned off and on, is displayed in 3D View. You
can change the flood lights elevation or position after it
has been placed.
To add a flood light
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Flood Light Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the light on the side of a wall where
Light Properties
Lights are defined by their beam and glow. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the component has
been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab. Changes to light settings are visible in the 3D
view.
Note: When editing settings, always click the Apply button to accept changes.
Light Properties
Beam checkbox controls the visibility of the beam dispersed by the light fixture.
When selected, the beam displayed in the 3D view; when deselected the beam is
not visible.
Ambient checkbox controls the visibility of ambient light in the room. When
selected, ambient light is displayed in the 3D view; when deselected ambient light
is not visible.
Dimmer slider controls the brightness of the beam. Drag the slider or click the left and right arrows to decrease or
increase the brightness.
Radius slider controls the size of the beam. Drag the slider or click the left and right arrows to decrease or
increase the radius size.
Falloff slider controls the how diffused the edges of the beam are displayed. Drag the slider or click the left and
right arrows to decrease or increase the amount of diffusion. The lower the falloff the sharper the edges; the
higher the falloff the more diffused the edges.
Beam On
Ambient On
Radius 5
Beam Off
Ambient Off
Radius 30
155
Chapter
Falloff 0
Falloff 4
Glow checkbox controls the glow at the light source. When selected, the glow is visible at the light source; when
deselected the glow is not visible. When the glow is enabled, you can edit the following settings:
Glow Dimmer slider controls the brightness of the glow. Drag the slider or click the left and right arrows to
decrease or increase the brightness.
Glow Size slider controls the size of the glow. Drag the slider or click the left and right arrows to decrease or
increase the glow size.
PhotoRender settings are applied when rendering your 3D view using Photo Realistic Rendering mode. To see
the Photo Render settings you must render the view.
Casts Shadows checkbox controls whether shadows are rendered. When selected, objects cast shadows;
when deselected shadows are excluded.
Color preview controls the color of the light that is generated. Click the preview to open to Color window, where
you can choose the color you want.
Adding a Ceiling Fan

Placing ceiling fans is as simple as one mouse click. Once
you place a ceiling fan, you can move it by dragging or by
specifying exact coordinates.
The available ceiling fan styles are displayed on the
Properties Bar when the Ceiling Fan Tool is active or when a
ceiling fan is selected in your drawing. You can change the
ceiling fan style by selecting the style you want in the Preview
Bar.
Placing Phone and Cable Outlets

AutoSnap
and Alignment Options

Objects
Elevating
To add a ceiling fan
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Ceiling Fan Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the ceiling fan in your design.
Placing Phone and Cable Outlets

Placing phone and cable jacks is exactly like placing wall
outlets and switches. Youll notice that when placing jacks,
the component is automatically tracked to the wall
segment, making accurate placement simple. The phone or
cable jack is displayed with dimensions as you drag to
position it along the wall, which indicate the distance from
the center of the jack to the nearest wall or other electrical
component.
The following jacks are available in the Outlet toolset.
157
Chapter
2D Editing Methods
Elevating Objects
To place a phone or cable outlet
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the jack you want from the Outlet toolset.
2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the jack on the side of a wall where you want
it and release to place.
Adding Smoke Detectors

Smoke detectors can be placed either along a wall or on a
ceiling.
The smoke detector is displayed with dimensions, as you
drag along a wall or move the cursor around the design
window, which indicate the distance from the center of the
component to the nearest wall or other electrical component.
design:
2D Editing Methods
Elevating Objects
To place a smoke detector on a wall
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Smoke

Detector Tool.
2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the smoke detector on the side of a
Adding Thermostats
To place a smoke detector on a ceiling
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Smoke Detector Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the smoke detector in your design.
Adding Thermostats
Placing thermostats is exactly like placing wall outlets and
switches. Youll notice that, when placing, the component is
automatically tracked to the wall segment, making
accurate placement simple.
design:
2D Editing Methods
Elevating Objects
To place a thermostat
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Thermostat Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the thermostat on the side of a wall
159
Chapter
Adding Home Theater Components

Creating and customizing your home theater couldnt be easier. There is an entire set of
tools available to add audio and video components to your design, with just a couple of
mouse clicks. These components have default elevations and orientations. For example,
the Video Projector Tool attaches the video projector to the ceiling. You can reposition any
of the home theater components using basic editing techniques.
The home theater components are displayed with dimensions, as you drag along a wall or
move the cursor around the design window, which indicate the distance from the center of
the component to the nearest wall or other components in the design.
The toolset shown to the right displays the available components in the Home Theater
toolset.
Rotating a Selection
Elevating Objects
To add a flat screen television
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Flat Screen Television Tool from the Home
Theater toolset.
By default, the television is placed on the floor.
To add a video projector
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Video Projector Tool from the Home Theater
toolset.
By default, the television is placed on the floor. By default, the video projector is
attached to the ceiling, based on the default ceiling height.
Adding Home Theater Components
To add a satellite dish
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Satellite Dish Tool from the Home Theater
toolset.
2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the component in your design. By
default, the satellite dish is placed at ground level.
To add a satellite receiver
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Satellite Receiver Tool from the Home Theater
toolset.
default, the receiver is placed on the floor.
To add wall speakers
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Wall Speaker Tool from the Home Theater
toolset.
2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the wall speaker on the side of a
161
Chapter
To add ceiling speakers
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Ceiling Speaker Tool from the Home Theater
toolset.
The ceiling speaker is placed based on the auto ceiling elevation.
To add floor speakers
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Floor Speaker Tool from the Home Theater
toolset.
Adding Home Security Components

Home security components are available to suit all levels of security, from
light and heat detection to cameras and control panels. These components
have default elevations and orientations. For example, the Dome Camera
Tool attaches a camera to the ceiling. You can reposition any of the home
security components using basic editing techniques.
The home security components are displayed with dimensions, as you drag
along a wall or move the cursor around the design window, which indicate
the distance from the center of the component to the nearest wall or other
components in the design.
The toolset shown to the right displays the available components in the
Home Security toolset.
Elevating Objects
To add a security camera to a wall
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Security Camera Tool from the Home Security
toolset.
2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the component on the side of a
To add a dome camera to a ceiling
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Dome Camera Tool from the Home Security
toolset.
default, the dome camera is attached to the ceiling, based on the auto ceiling elevation.
163
Chapter
To add a security contact
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Security Contact Tool from the Home Security
toolset.
To add a motion detector
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Motion Detector Tool from the Home Security
toolset.
wall where you want it and release to place. The motion detector is placed at a default elevation near
the ceiling.
To add a wall-mounted glass break detector
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Wall Mount Glass Break Detector Tool from
the Home Security toolset.
wall where you want it and release to place. The glass break detector is placed at a default elevation
on the wall.
To add a ceiling-mounted glass break detector
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Ceiling Mount Glass Break Detector Tool from
By default, the glass break detector is attached to the ceiling, based on the auto ceiling elevation.
To add a photo beam
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Photo Beam Tool from the Home Security
toolset.
2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the component in your design. In
the example below, the photo beam has been rotated to fit into a corner.
To add a security keypad
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Security Keypad Tool from the Home Security
toolset.
To add a security control panel
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Security Control Panel Tool from the Home
Security toolset.
165
Chapter
To add a heat detector
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Heat Detector Tool from the Home Security
toolset.
default, the heat detector is attached to the ceiling, based on the auto ceiling elevation.
To add a wall-mounted access keypad
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Security Access Keypad Wall Mount Tool from
To add a pedestal-mounted access keypad
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Security Access Keypad Pedestal Mount Tool
from the Home Security toolset.
Adding Home Automation Components

Automated components can help to make your home simpler and more efficient.
There are a number of automation components available in Punch! from network
routers to intercoms, and more. These components have default elevations and
orientations. For example, the Backup Generator is placed on the ground, however
the Backup Generator Panel attaches to a wall at a default elevation. You can
reposition any of the home automation components using basic editing techniques.
The home automation components are displayed with dimensions, as you drag
along a wall or move the cursor around the design window, which indicate the
distance from the center of the component to the nearest wall or other components
in the design.
The toolset shown to the right displays the available components in the Home
Automation toolset.
Elevating Objects
Moving a Selection
To place a home automation touch-panel
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Home Automation Touch-Panel Tool from the
Automation toolset.
To place a network router
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Network Router Tool from the Automation
toolset.
167
Chapter
To place a photocell
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the PhotoCell Tool from the Automation toolset.
To place a backup generator
1 On the Electrical plan toolbar, click the Backup Generator Tool from the Automation
toolset.
To place a backup generator panel
1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Backup Generator Panel Tool from the Automation
toolset.
To place a circuit panel
1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Circuit Panel Tool from the Automation toolset.
To place a conduit
1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Conduit Tool from the Automation toolset.
Conduit is visual representation that is displayed in 2D, but not in 3D.
To place a freeze detector
1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Freeze Detector Tool from the Automation toolset.
To place an intercom
1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Intercom Tool from the Automation toolset.
wall where you want it and release to place. The intercom is placed at a default
elevation on the wall.
169
Chapter
To place a battery power supply
1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Battery Power Supply Tool from the Automation
toolset.
Chapter 11
Plumbing Plan Tab

Once youve completed your floor plan, the next step in the design process is to plan your utilities. Architect 3D
features a suite of plumbing fixtures from basic toilets to spa tubs. Other important considerations are gas bibs and
floor drain placement, also included in Architect 3D. Most plumbing objects are designed to track the walls, meaning
they can only be placed on wall segments to offer flawless design. Tubs and showers are automatically annotated and
dimensions appear, as you add plumbing, to ensure accurate placement. Each plumbing component is simple to
include in your drawing, with the flexibility to modify it at any time.
Series.
Placing an Outdoor Hose Bib or Gas Bib

When you place an outdoor hose bib or a gas bib,
dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to
place objects a specific distance from a neighboring
plumbing fixture or the end of a wall segment. Youll notice
that when placing hose bibs, the object is automatically
tracked to the wall segment, making accurate placement
simple. As you drag to position the bib, dimension lines
indicate the distance from the center of the bib to the
nearest wall end or plumbing fixture.
The following tools are available from the Bib toolset.

Elevating Objects
To place a hose bib
1 On the Plumbing plan toolbar, click the Hose Bib Tool from the Bib toolset.
2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the bib on the side of a wall
171
Chapter
11 Plumbing Plan Tab
To place a gas bib
1 On the Plumbing plan toolbar, click the Gas Bib Tool from the Bib toolset.
2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the bib on the side of a wall
Adding Floor Drains

Once youve completed your plumbing plan, the final step is to
add floor drains to your design. Adding floor drains is as simple
as a mouse click.
Elevating Objects
Moving a Selection
Nudging a Selection
To add a floor drain
1 On the Plumbing plan toolbar, click the Floor Drain Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the floor drain in your design.
Placing Toilets
Placing Toilets
Architect 3D makes it simple to add plumbing to your home plan.
Dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to place
objects a specific distance from a neighboring plumbing fixture
or wall segment. Youll notice that, when placing toilets, the
object is automatically tracked to the wall segment, making
accurate placement simple.
When the tool is active you can choose the style you want from
the Properties tab. You can also change the style after the toilet
has been placed by selecting the toilet in your drawing and
choosing a different style.
Toilet Properties
Elevating Objects
Moving a Selection & Nudging a Selection
To place a toilet
1 On the Plumbing plan toolbar, click the Toilet Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the toilet on the side of a wall
Toilet Properties
Toilets are defined by their length, width, and how far they are offset from the wall. You can edit the properties after the
object has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.
Note: When editing values in a text box, be sure to press ENTER to accept changes.
173
Chapter
Length defines the distance from one side of the toilet to the other side.
Width defines the distance from the back of the toilet to the front.
Offset defines the distance between the wall and the back of the toilet.
Description button opens the Description dialog box. For more information
on editing descriptions, see Component Description, on page 51.
Flip button allows you to flip the side where the hardware is positioned.
Styles library includes the available toilets and bidets styles. You can choose
the style before or after you place the toilet.
Length
Width
Offset
Placing Sinks
As with toilets, sinks are automatically tracked to wall segments,
as you place them, as well as automatically dimensioned to
neighboring walls and plumbing fixtures. As you drag along a
wall, the dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of
the sink to the nearest wall end or plumbing fixture.
When the tool is active you can choose a bathroom or kitchen
sink style from the Properties tab. You can also change the style
after the sink has been placed by selecting the sink in your
drawing and choosing a different style.
Sink Properties
Elevating Objects
To place a sink
1 On the Plumbing plan toolbar, click the Sink Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the sink on the side of a wall where
Sink Properties
Sink Properties
Sinks are defined by their length, width, and how far they are offset from the wall. You can edit the properties after the
component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.
Note: When editing values, always press the ENTER key to accept new values in a text field.
Length defines the distance from one side of the sink to the other side.
Width defines the distance from the back of the sink to the front.
Offset defines the distance between the wall and the back of the sink.
Description button opens the Description dialog box. For more information on
editing descriptions, see Component Description, on page 51.
Styles library includes the available sink styles. You can choose the style before
or after you place the sink. There are two sink libraries to choose from:
Length
Offset
Width
175
Chapter
Placing Bath Tubs

In addition to associative dimensioning and wall tracking as
you place a tub, Architect 3D automatically adds annotation
to your design when the tub is placed. This makes reading
home plans simple. If you dont find the exact sized tub you
are looking for, simply place a tub that is similar in size, then
adjust the tub or spa properties to the exact size you want for
your home design. As you drag along a wall, the dimension
lines indicate the distance from the center of the sink to the
nearest wall end or plumbing fixture.
When the tool is active you can choose a bath tub style from
the Properties tab. You can also change the style after the
bath tub has been placed by selecting the tub in your
design:
Bath Tub Properties

Elevating Objects
To place a bath tub
1 On the Plumbing plan toolbar, click the Bath Tub Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the bath tub on the side of a wall
Bath Tub Properties

Bath Tubs are defined by their length, width, and how far they are offset from the wall. You can edit the properties after
the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.
Note: When editing values, always press the ENTER key to accept new values in a text field.
Placing a Shower
Length defines the distance from one side of the tub to the other side.
Width defines the distance from the back of the tub (edge against the wall) to the
front.
Offset defines the distance between the wall and the back of the tub.
Flip allows you to flip the side where the hardware is positioned.
Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the display of the tub dimensions. When

selected, tub dimensions are displayed.
Styles library includes the available bathtub styles. You can choose the style
before or after you place the tub.
Width
Length
Offset
Placing a Shower
Showers are placed in the same manner as bath tubs. In addition
to associative dimensioning and wall tracking, as you place a
shower, Architect 3D automatically adds annotation to your
design, once the shower is placed. If you dont find the exact
sized shower you are looking for, simply place a shower that is
similar in size, then adjust the shower properties to the exact size
you want for your home design. As you drag along a wall, the
dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the
shower to the nearest wall end or plumbing fixture.
When the tool is active you can choose a shower style from the
Properties tab. You can also change the style after the shower
has been placed by selecting the shower in your drawing and
choosing a different style.
Shower Properties
Elevating Objects
To place a shower
1 On the Plumbing plan toolbar, click the Shower Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the component on the side of a wall
177
Chapter
Shower Properties
Showers are defined by their length, width, and how far they are offset from the wall. You can edit the properties after
the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.
Note: When editing values, always press the ENTER key to accept new values in a text box.
Length defines the distance from one side of the shower to the other side.
Width defines the distance from the back of the shower to the front.
Offset defines the distance between the wall and the back of the shower.
Flip allows you to flip the side where the hardware is positioned.
Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the display of the shower dimensions.

When selected, shower dimensions are displayed.
Styles library includes the available shower styles. You can choose the style
before or after you place the shower.
Placing the Water Heater
Placing the Water Heater

Adding a water heater to your home plan is as simple as a mouse click.
Dimensions are displayed as you move the cursor around the design
window, which indicate the distance from the center of the object to the
nearest wall or other component.

Elevating Objects
To place a water heater
1 On the Plumbing plan toolbar, click the Water Heater Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the water heater in your design.
179
Chapter
Chapter 12
Roofing Plan Tab

One of the features that will set your design apart from all others will be its roofline. Using the roofing tools available in
Architect 3D, you can design intricate roofs with ease. From basic rooflines, like hipped or gable, to less common ones,
like saltbox, gambrel, or a roof over a bay window, you will be able to create any roof to match the style of your home
plan.
Automatically Adding a Roof

You can add a hip roof or a gable roof to an enclosure with just
two mouse clicks. If a gable wall style is detected, the roof
panels are created, matching the wall pitch.
The roofs properties are controlled by the Automatic Roof
Options, where you can specify the roof pitch, soffit depth,
generation preferences, and framing options.
After an auto-roof is generated, edit the roof panels as you
would a typical, manually drawn roof, and the panels can be
updated when you make changes to the perimeter walls. To
control auto-roof settings, see Auto-Roof Properties, on page
182.
To remove the roof, delete the roof panels in the design
window.
To automatically add a hip roof
1 Move the cursor over the outer walls of your design until you see a light blue highlighted perimeter.
Click the perimeter. After selection, it becomes yellow and the Perimeter properties are displayed on
the Properties tab.
2 On the Properties tab, click Generate Roof. A hip roof is generated based on the current automatic
roof options.
181
Chapter
12 Roofing Plan Tab
Auto-Roof Properties
Automatic roofs are built instantaneously, however can control the settings that are used and update the roof if you
need to adjust it. Auto-roof properties are controlled in the Automatic Roof Options window.
Roof Pitch Select either Ratio or Angle to

specify how you want to set the roof pitch and
then type the pitch you want in the
corresponding text box.
Soffit Depth Type the depth you want in the

Soffit Depth text box.
Roof Perimeter
When the Automatically generates panels

when changed checkbox is selected, the
roof panels are created automatically, and
updated automatically if the perimeter walls
are moved or resized. When deselected,
you must click the Build Roof button on the
Properties tab to generate the panels
manually.
When the Clips automatic roofs on other
floors checkbox is selected, roof panels are
removed from the interior of other levels so
a roof is not built inside.
Framing Options control the underlying roof
framing. To see the roof framing you must use the Framing render style in the 3D view. For more information, see
Accessing the 3D Rendering Styles, which begins on page 275.
Rafter Size defines the width of the rather boards.

Rafter Spacing defines the distances between each rafter board.
Rafter Material specifies the rafter building material.
Note: For truss roof framing, you should create a roof using one of the roof shape tools or freehand
roof tools.
To edit automatic roof options
the Properties tab.
2 On the Properties tab, click the Options button.

3 Edit the options as needed and then click OK.
Adding a Predefined Roof Shape

There are several styles of roofs available in Architect 3D.
Automatic dimensioning makes it easy to achieve exact
placement.
When the tool is active you can edit the properties on the
Properties tab. You can also edit the properties after the roof
has been placed by selecting the roof in your drawing.
Be sure you are working on the floor where you want to add
the roof (for example, to draw a roof over a one-story
structure you should be on the first floor).
The following components are available in the Roof Shapes
toolset.
Using the Freehand Roof Tools

Roof
Properties
Elevating Objects
Wall Properties (for matching the gable ends of these roof style)
Customizing Roof Framing Properties
AutoSnap
To draw a predefined roof shape
1 On the Roof plan toolbar, click the tool you want from the Roof Shape toolset.
2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to draw the roof to the shape and size you want.
Note: The arrows show which way the roof section descends. The elevation of the roof is displayed
in the design window.

Architect 3D includes freehand roof tools that provide versatility and power, when drawing complex roofing plans.
Using the three-point and four-point freehand tools, roof sections are attached to walls, making it easy to draw them
the necessary size the first time. After drawing roof sections, all parts of it can be customized, for example, pitch,
placement, or shape. With the three- and four-point freehand tools you can specify a width for soffit.
You can resize and reshape the roof by dragging end points. You can also drag the arrow in the center of the roof
section to rotate it and change the direction of the roof slope, or right-click an edge and choose Set Slope to Edge to
specify which edge of the roof slopes to the top of the wall.
The following freehand roofs are available:
Freehand Roof
Four-Point Freehand Roof (in the Freehand Roof toolset)
Three-Point Freehand Roof (in the Freehand Roof toolset)
Roof Properties
183
Chapter
12 Roofing Plan Tab
Elevating Objects
Wall Properties (for matching the gable ends of these roof style)
Series.
Freehand Roof
The Freehand Roof Tool allows you to create a roof section using
a 2D shape draw method. You can set the pitch and the point to
which the elevation is measured on the Properties tab before or
after you add the roof. The elevation of each selected point of the
roof section is notated; use these specs to match other roof
sections.
To draw a freehand roof
1 On the Roof plan toolbar, click the Freehand Roof Tool.

you want.
3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a freehand roof section.
Freehand roof drawn using the Closed Polygon draw method
Four-Point Freehand Roof

The Four-Point Freehand Roof Tool creates a rectangular roof
section attached to a wall. The roof is drawn to cover the entire
wall segment. You can define the pitch and the soffit settings
on the Properties tab before you add the roof, and then edit the
pitch and elevation after the roof has been placed.
As you draw the roof, a rubber band line is displayed and
follows the pointer. This line signifies the direction the roof
section will rise. Also, dimensions are displayed as you draw.
To draw a four-point freehand roof
1 On the Roof plan toolbar, click the Four-Point Freehand Roof Tool from the Freehand
Roof toolset.
2 Position your cursor on a wall in the design window then click and drag away from the
wall section. Release the mouse button to place.
Note: The elevation of each selected point of the roof section is notated; use these specs to match
other roof sections.
Three-Point Freehand Roof

The Three-Point Freehand Roof Tool creates a triangular
roof section attached to a wall. The base of the roof is
drawn to cover the entire wall segment. You can define the
pitch and the soffit settings on the Properties tab before
you add the roof, and then, if necessary, edit the pitch and
elevation after the roof has been placed.
As you draw the roof, a rubber band line is displayed and
follows the pointer. This line signifies the direction the roof
section will rise. Also, dimensions are displayed as you
draw.
To draw a three-point freehand roof
1 On the Roof plan toolbar, click the Three-Point Freehand Roof Tool from the
Freehand Roof toolset.
2 Position your cursor on a wall in the design window then click and drag away from the
wall section. Release the mouse button.
185
12 Roofing Plan Tab
Chapter
Note: The elevation of each selected point of the roof section is notated; use these specs to match
other roof sections.
Adding a Dormer
Dormers can add space to your interior and a unique look to
your exterior. You can quickly add a dormer to a roof panel
in your design with the Dormer Tool.
design:
Roof Properties
Elevating Objects
Wall Properties
Applying Building Materials & Applying Paint and
Color
Dormer Components
Dormers are composed of multiple components, including roof panels, a dormer cutout to remove the existing roof
section where the dormer is added, a window, and dormer styled walls. You can edit each of these components
individually after the dormer is placed.
Roof panels
Dormer cutout
Dormer wall
Window
Adding a Dormer
Dormer Properties
When you add a dormer, it is placed based on the properties that are defined on the Properties tab. You can edit these
properties before you add the dormer, however to edit the dormer properties after it is placed, you must edit the
individual components that make up the dormer.
Note: Press ENTER to accept new values in text boxes.
Dormer Style lets you choose the type of dormer you want to add to your roof.
Note: You cannot change the dormer style after the dormer has been added to your design.
Sizing defines the overall width and height of the dormer.
Base Pitch defines the slope of the dormer walls. The wall pitch ultimately affects the depth of the dormer from
the roof; a higher the pitch value results in a more shallow dormer, while a lower pitch value creates a dormer that
extends further from the roof. If the Base Pitch does not match the existing roofs pitch, you may need to adjust the
dormer to position it correctly.
When the Use Detected Pitch checkbox is selected, the Base Pitch value is ignored and the dormer walls are
created to match the pitch of the existing roof panel.
Gable/Hip Pitch defines the slope of the roof panels for gable and hip style dormers. The higher the pitch, the
steeper the roof slope. For example, 10:12 means the roof rises 10 for every 12 of the roof.
Shed Pitch defines the slope of the roof panel for a shed style dormer. The higher the pitch, the steeper the roof
slope.
Display Pitch Angles checkbox controls how the pitch values are displayed. When selected, the pitch values
change to show the pitch angle in the text boxes rather than inches.
Include Windows checkbox control whether windows are included with the dormer. When selected, windows are
included. You can edit windows in a dormer just like any other window in your design.
187
12 Roofing Plan Tab
Chapter
Gable/Hip Pitch
Height
Base Pitch
Width
To add a dormer
1 On the Roof plan toolbar, click the Dormer Tool.

2 Choose the Dormer Style on the Properties tab and edit the Sizing and Pitch settings as
needed.
3 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the dormer on a roof panel in your design.
Creating a Dormer Cutout

A cutout tool is available for removing part of a roof panel.
This way you can manually draw cutouts using the
available draw method shapes. Dormer cutouts must be
drawn on an existing roof panel in your design, and the
entire shape must exist on the same roof panel.
design:
Changing Curve Tension

Roof Properties
Elevating Objects
Roof Properties
To add a dormer cutout
1 On the Roof plan toolbar, click the Dormer Cutout Tool.

you want.
3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw the cutout section on a roof panel.
This example shows a dormer cutout drawn using the Rectangle From Corner shape
Roof Properties
Once drawn, roof sections can be altered to suit your design. From resizing to rotating the slope to changing its pitch,
Architect 3D makes it simple to create even the most complex roofline. Roofs are defined by their pitch, elevation, size,
and their slope direction. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the component has been added to your
design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.
Note: Press ENTER to accept new values in text boxes.
Pitch affects how steep a roof appears. For example, 10:12 means the roof rises
10 for every 12 of the roof. To create a flat roof, select Custom and type 0.0 in
the text box.
Elevation specifies whether the roof elevation is measured from the ground to
the base of the roof section or from the ground to the peak of the roof section.
Pitch Angle allows you to specify an angle for the pitch.

automatic dimensions are not displayed for the entire drawing, roof dimensions
are not displayed. For details on controlling the automatic dimensions display Dimensioning, on page 59.
Slope Direction is controlled on the roof in the design window. Drag the arrow, or right-click an edge and choose
Set Slope to Edge.
Elevation measured to Base
Elevation measured to Peak
Note: Rotation is constrained to 15-degree increments.
189
Chapter
12 Roofing Plan Tab
Adding a Skylight
Skylights are windows cut into the roof. They add a touch of elegance, in addition
to letting in more natural light. When the tool is active you can choose the Skylight
style you want from the Properties tab. You can also change the skylight style
before or after it has been placed in your drawing. Skylights must be placed on an
existing roof panel in your design.
Skylight Properties
Elevating Objects
To add a skylight
1 On the Roof plan toolbar, click the Skylight Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the skylight in your design.
Skylight Properties
Skylights are defined by their width, height, and trim size. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the
Skylight Style drop-down menu provides access to a variety of skylight styles.
The Custom Skylight style includes a number of additional categories to choose from.
Drawing a Gambrel Roof
Width defines the distance from one side of the skylight to the other.
Height defines the distance from the bottom of the skylight to the top.
Trim defines the width of the trim around the skylight. This is not included in the overall height or width.
Drawing a Gambrel Roof

The Gambrel roof, or barn roof, is a popular style because it increases the
usable space in the loft/attic area. A gambrel roof is composed of two pitches.
The lower sections are created using the Four-Point Freehand Roof Tool,
while the upper pitch will be drawn using the Gable Roof Tool.
Four-Point Freehand Roof

Roof Properties
Breaking a Wall
Drawing Walls
To draw a gambrel roof
1 Use the Four-Point Freehand Roof Tool to draw a roof section on one of the walls.
2 Draw a matching four-point freehand roof on the opposing wall using the same roof pitch.
(alternatively) Use copy and paste to create a copy of the existing roof section and change the roof
direction so the panel are the exact same dimensions.
191
Chapter
12 Roofing Plan Tab
At this point there will be a gap between the two roof sections; this gap will be filled with the Gable
Roof section.
Note: Note the elevation that is specified in red as the upper elevation of the roof section.
3 Use the Gable Roof Tool to draw a gable roof between the two freehand roof panels. The roof pitch
should not be as steep as the lower roof sections.
4 Elevate the gable roof to the top elevation of the freehand roof panels.
Note: The previous example specified 12:12 and 4:12 pitches, but any combination of pitches will
work for this roof.
Chapter 13
HVAC Plan Tab

Correctly adding HVAC ducts and units is an important part of the home design process. Architect 3D makes it easy to
flawlessly design your HVAC system, making sure all rooms receive adequate ventilation.
Once you place HVAC, with a few mouse clicks, its easy to adjust or move components. You can even move
components by a specific distance, based on Cartesian or Polar coordinates, or rotate items, as needed.
Series.
Placing Air Ducts

Architect 3D features several sized air ducts to ensure the perfect HVAC plan. To place air ducts, simply click and
drag. Air ducts are drawn horizontally and vertically, just as standard HVAC ducts are actually placed in a new home.
You can move air ducts by dragging, by a specific distance, or rotate them to fit your home design.
If you dont find the perfectly-sized air duct for your home plan, you can edit the width and depth on the Properties tab
before or after you draw the air duct. Air ducts are visible in the 2D view only.
Air Duct Properties

Elevating Objects
To place an air duct
1 On the HVAC plan toolbar, click the Air Duct Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to set the angle and length for the air duct.
Air Duct Properties

Air ducts are defined by their width and depth. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the component has
been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.
193
Chapter
13 HVAC Plan Tab
Note: When editing values, always press the ENTER key to accept new values in a text box.
Width defines the distance from one side of the air duct to the other (length is
the distance from end point to end point).
Depth defines the distance from the bottom of the air duct to the top (this
dimension is not represented in 2D).
Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the display of dimensions in 2D. If

automatic dimensions are not displayed for the entire drawing, the air duct
dimensions are not displayed. For details on controlling the automatic
dimensions display Dimensioning, on page 59.
Placing Vents and Registers

Placing vents and registers involves one mouse click. Once youve placed vents, you can move them by dragging or
defining specific coordinates. You can even rotate vents at custom angles to fit your design. Architect 3D provides
several vents to choose from, including floor and ceiling vents.
You can choose the register style on the Properties tab before or after your place it in your design.
To following options are available from the Register/Return toolset:
Floor Register
Wall Register/Vent
Ceiling Register/Vent

Elevating Objects
Floor Register
Floor registers are placed at the auto-floor elevation, if the
auto-floor is enabled. Otherwise, the register is placed at the
base elevation for the current floor. If youve created a floor
manually (using the Floor Tool) you should adjust the register
elevation to match that of the floor.
register has been placed by selecting the register in your
Placing Vents and Registers
To place a floor register
1 On the HVAC plan toolbar, click the Floor Register Tool from the Register/Return
toolset.
Wall Register/Vent
Wall registers and vents are placed on a wall at a default
elevation. As you drag along a wall, the dimension lines
indicate the distance from the center of the register/vent to the
nearest wall end or wall attachment.
When the tool is active you can choose the style you want
from the Properties tab. You can also change the style after
the register/vent has been placed by selecting the component
in your drawing and choosing a different style.
There are two libraries available: Return Vents and Supply
Registers. When a library is selected, its contents are
displayed in the Preview bar.
195
Chapter
13 HVAC Plan Tab
To place a wall register/vent
1 On the HVAC plan toolbar, click the Wall Register/Return Tool from the Register/
Return toolset.
2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the register/return on the side of
a wall where you want it and release to place.
Ceiling Register/Vent
Ceiling registers are placed at the auto ceiling elevation. If
youve created a ceiling manually (using the Floor Tool) you may
need to adjust the register/vent elevation to match that of the
ceiling.
register/vent has been placed by selecting the component in
your drawing and choosing a different style.
There are two libraries available: Return Vents and Supply
Registers. When a library is selected, its contents are displayed
in the Preview bar.
To place a ceiling register/vent
1 On the HVAC plan toolbar, click the Ceiling Register/Return Tool from the Register/
Return toolset.

Adding heating and air conditioning units only involves one
mouse click. Once placed, you can move units by specific
distances, drag to move them, and even rotate them to fit
your home design.
design:

Elevating Objects
Applying Paint and Color & Applying Building
Materials
To add a furnace
1 On the HVAC plan toolbar, click the Furnace Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the furnace in your design.
To add an air conditioner
1 On the HVAC plan toolbar, click the Air Conditioner Tool from the Heating & Cooling
toolset.
2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the furnace in your design.
197
Chapter
13 HVAC Plan Tab
To add a heat pump
1 On the HVAC plan toolbar, click the Heat Pump Tool from the Heating & Cooling
toolset
2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the heat pump in your design.
Placing Heaters and Radiators

As you place heaters and radiators in your home plan,
the component is automatically tracked to the wall
segment, making accurate placement simple.
Dimension lines automatically appear, as you drag and
after it is placed, making it easy to place heaters a
specific distance from a neighboring HVAC component
or wall segment.
When the tool is active you can choose the style you
want from the Properties tab. You can also change the
style after the heater or radiator has been placed by
selecting the component in your drawing and choosing a
different style.
Heater and Radiator Properties

Elevating Objects
Materials
To place a heater
1 On the HVAC plan toolbar, click the Heater/Radiator Tool.

2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the heater on the side of a wall

Once placed, heaters and radiators are defined by their length, width, and how far they are offset from the wall. You
can edit the properties after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties
tab.
Note: When editing values, be sure to press ENTER to accept new values in a text box.
Length defines the span of the heater or radiator along the wall.
Width defines the distance from the back of the heater or radiator to the front.
Offset defines the distance between the wall and the heater or radiator. To
position it right up against the wall, set the value to 0.
editing descriptions, see Component Description, on page 51. The description
is used in Estimator.
Styles library provides a variety of heaters and radiators to choose from. You
can choose the style before or after you place the component.
Length
Width
Offset
199
Chapter
13 HVAC Plan Tab
Chapter 14
Deck Plan Tab

If you are looking for a way to add more living space to your existing home, but dont want to build an addition, you
might consider adding a deck. Architect 3D contains an extensive toolset for designing outdoor living areas.
You will learn how to design multi-story and multi-level decks, including options for handrails, skirt trim, and steps.
Series.
Adding a Deck
Adding a deck is a great way to add living space to your home. With Architect 3D, you can build freeform deck sections
on the fly, with or without railings, or use wall trace tools to create a deck along an existing wall. All sections can be
altered if you change your mind in the middle of the design process. The two Trace Wall Deck tools make designing a
deck against an intricate set of exterior walls simple. At any time during the designing process, you can view your work
in 3D.
When a deck tool is active you can edit the deck properties on the Properties tab. You can also change the properties
after the deck has been placed by selecting the deck to access its properties. Some deck properties are only available
after the deck has been added, for example stairs.
Deck Properties
Elevating Objects
Customizing Deck Framing Properties
201
Chapter
14 Deck Plan Tab
Freeform Deck
Using the Freeform Deck tools you can create a deck with a
railing or a deck without a railing. The default drawing shape is
a polygon. To create a deck using a different shape, choose
the shape you want on the Properties tab before you draw the
deck.
To add a freeform deck shape
1 On the Deck plan toolbar, click one of the Deck tools from the
Freeform Deck toolset.
2 On the Properties tab, click the Draw Method drop-down menu

and choose the shape you want.
3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a freeform

deck.
This example shows a deck drawn using the Closed Polygon shape
Wall Trace Deck

Using the Wall Trace Deck tools you can automatically
create a deck that traces an existing wall in your design.
For rectangular deck shapes that conform to the existing
perimeter, use the Wall Trace Tool. The start point for the
deck defines the center of the deck.
Note: Only the edges of the deck that are away from the
house perimeter will have railings.
To add a wall trace deck
1 On the Deck plan toolbar, click the Deck Wall Trace Tool from the Wall Trace Deck
toolset.
2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to drag the deck to the shape and size you
want. The edge along the walls automatically conforms to match the shape.
Adding a Deck
Custom Deck Wall Trace Tool

For more complex perimeters, use the Custom Wall Trace Tool to trace the exterior and define points so your deck
matches the unique shape you want perfectly. This deck must start along a wall, but then the shape is defined by the
points you place as you draw.
To add a custom wall trace deck
1 On the Deck plan toolbar, click the Custom Deck Wall Trace Tool from the Wall Trace
Deck toolset.
2 Click and drag along a wall to define the direction you want the deck to be drawn. A
rubber band arrow is displayed and follows the pointer. Release the mouse button.
3 Click another point along a wall to define the last point of the deck along the wall.
4 Continue to click points to define the shape of the deck and right-click to finish. The deck
automatically conforms to the wall.
203
Chapter
14 Deck Plan Tab
Deck Properties
Decks are defined by their height, skirting, and handrails. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the
Deck Height defines the distance from the base of the deck to the top surface.
By editing the height of a deck you can create elaborate designs using multi-level
decks.
Skirting checkbox controls if skirting is enabled around the sides of the deck.
When selected, skirting is enabled. You can choose to include skirt trim on only
certain sides, and also customize the skirting by applying colors or materials.
Calculate Area button calculates the area of the deck.
Include Handrails checkbox controls if handrails are included on the selected

edge. When selected, handrails are enabled. You can include or remove
handrails from one side of the deck or multiple sides.
Handrails Height defines the distance from the bottom of the handrail to the top.
Baluster Spacing defines the distance between each baluster or spindle.
Include Post checkbox controls if posts are included at each point you clicked
when drawing the rail. When selected, posts are included; when deselected they
are excluded. You can add or remove individual posts using the Add Point and
Remove Point Tools. For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which
begins on page 241.
Post Height defines the height of the posts. You can select individual posts and
edit their height, or double-click the rail to select all posts and then edit the height
so they match.
Steps you can add steps to any side of your deck by selecting the deck edge and
clicking the Insert New button. By default, steps are added to the center of the deck side, but can be moved easily
into any position.
Open checkbox controls if step risers are included. When selected, risers are excluded; when deselected they
are included.
238.
Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the display of dimensions in 2D. If automatic dimensions are not displayed
for the entire drawing, the deck dimensions are not displayed. For details on controlling the automatic dimensions
Editing Deck Step Properties

Using Architect 3D, you can add steps to any side of your deck and customize them to meet your needs. By default,
steps are added to the center of the deck side, but can be moved easily into any position.
Note: Steps are added to a deck by clicking the Insert New button when a deck edge is selected.
Adding Custom Deck Railings
Step Width defines the distance from one side of the steps to the other side.
Total Height defines the distance from the base of the steps to the top step.
This is especially useful when designing multi-level decks, when you do not want
the steps to reach the ground, just the next deck level.
Left and Right checkboxes control the display of the left and right handrails.
When selected, the handrail is enabled; when deselected it is disabled.
Adding Custom Deck Railings

Customizing railings is easy with Architect 3D; you can simply add railings to any side of your deck.
The shape and configuration of railings can be customized, and you can apply different materials to the rail, post, and
balusters. You can specify the railing height and baluster spacing before or after drawing on the Properties tab. As you
draw a railing, each point you click as you draw creates a post.
Railing Properties
2D Editing Methods
Elevating Objects
To draw a deck railing
1 On the Deck plan toolbar, click the Deck Railing Tool.

you want.
3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a deck railing.
This example shows a railing drawn using the Open Polygon shape
Railing Properties
Once you have drawn a railing, you can modify features and location to suit your needs. Using Architect 3D, you gain
total control over railing handrail height, baluster spacing, and railing posts.
For more information on editing railing, see Railing Properties, on page 135.
Placing a Custom Staircase

In addition to the Insert Steps feature, Architect 3D gives you the option of easily drawing custom staircases. Straight
staircases and curved staircases are drawn using the ceiling height, unless you specify a different height on the
Properties tab before drawing the staircase.
The center line defines the direction and shape of the staircase, while the staircase height value defines the distance to
the top of the staircase.
205
Chapter
14 Deck Plan Tab
To create an opening for the stairway in the upper floor, see Creating a Deck Cutout, which begins on page 207. After
youve drawn your staircase, you can apply different colors and materials to the steps, railing spindles, posts, and
handrails.
You can draw the followings types of staircases:
Straight Stairway
Curved Stairway
2D Editing Methods
Straight Stairway
You can draw a staircase along a straight line or add
multiple points to create an L-shaped or U-shaped
staircase with landings. Either way, the number of steps
depends on the overall height of the staircase.

To draw a straight stairway
1 On the Deck Plan toolbar, click the Straight Stairway Tool from the Staircase toolset.
2 In the design window, click to set the start point and drag to define the staircase, in the
direction you want the stairs to rise, then click and again to set the next point
3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape and then right click to place.
Curved Stairway
Curved staircases are a single segment that curve in the
direction you draw. The number of steps depends on the
overall height of the staircase.

To draw a curved stairway
1 On the Deck Plan tab, click the Curved Stairway Tool from the Staircase toolset.
2 Click to set the start point and drag to set the curve in the direction you want the stairs
to rise, then click and again to set the end point and place the staircase.
Note: Hold down the SHIFT key while drawing to constrain the staircase to a perfect arc.
Once you have drawn a staircase, you can modify features and location to suit your needs. With Architect 3D, you
have total control over stairway width, riser, and tread dimensions, as well as handrail height and placement. For more
information on editing stairs, see Staircase Properties, on page 132.
Creating a Deck Cutout

You can easily create a space in your deck to insert a pool
or hot tub by using the Deck Cutout Tool.
design:

Elevating Objects
207
Chapter
14 Deck Plan Tab
To draw a deck cutout railing
1 On the Deck plan toolbar, click the Deck Cutout Tool.

you want.
3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a deck cutout section.
This example shows a deck cutout drawn using the Rectangle From Center shape
Chapter 15
Landscape Plan Tab

From adding a flower bed near your front door to designing an elaborate pool area, Architect 3D contains an extensive
toolset to help you design your outdoor living areas.
You will learn to add a pond, pathways, and fencing to your home plan. In addition, you can create flower beds that you
can landscape, using flowers, shrubs, and trees, accessible from the Plant library.
Note: For information on adding plants to your design, see Plants Libraries, on page 78.
Series.
Defining the Property Line

If you are working in a confined or unusually-shaped area, you may want to define the property lines. The property line
only appears in the 2D design window.
If you know the exact coordinates you can enter them using the Survey Coordinates window and define your property
line based on the data you input (you can also edit a manually drawn property line and adjust the points based on
coordinates). There are three coordinate modes available when adding a property line based on coordinates.

Reshaping
and Resizing 2D Objects

Elevating Objects
Dimensioning
AutoSnap
209
Chapter
15 Landscape Plan Tab
To add a property line manually
1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click Property Line Tool.

you want.
3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a property line.
This example shows a railing drawn using the Closed Polygon shape
To add a property line by specifying coordinates
1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, double-click Property Line Tool.

2 Choose the Coordinate Mode and click the Add button. The options differ depending on
the reference meridian.
Azimuth
3 Specify the survey coordinates and click OK.

4 Click OK to draw the property line.
Bearing
Relative
Adding a Fill Region
Adding a Fill Region

From simple, rectangular garden entryways and flower beds to elaborate
planting areas, Architect 3D makes designing them easy. You can also show
mulch around trees or shrubs, or to add a pond or stream to your landscaping.
Ground fill regions have a default mulch material applied, which can be updated
by applying a different material to the region in the 3D view window. As you
draw fills, a rubber band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Also,
dimensions are displayed as you draw.
After you draw a ground fill region, you can change the material that is applied
to the fill, or you can fill the region with plants, or even add edging around the
border. When filling with plants, you should make sure to give them enough
space to account for their growth potential.
Above in an example of a ground fill region filled with plants and edging added

Elevating Objects
Dimensioning
To add a ground fill region
1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Ground Fill Region Tool.
you want.
3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a fill region.
211
Chapter
This example shows a ground fill region drawn using the Rectangle From Corner shape
To fill a ground fill region with plants
1 Draw a ground fill region (see To add a ground fill region, on page 211).
2 Choose the plant you want to add in the fill region (for information on accessing plants, see Plants
Libraries, on page 78).
3 Right-click an edge of the ground fill region and choose Plant Fill. The Plant Fill dialog box is
displayed.
4 Choose the settings you want and then click OK.

To add edging around a ground fill region
1 Draw a ground fill region (see To add a ground fill region, on page 211).
2 Right-click an edge of the ground fill region and choose Create Edging Border.
To edit the edging, see Edging Properties, on page 220.
Drawing a Patio
Drawing a Patio
Easily customize your outdoor living space by adding a
patio. You can edit the patio thickness on the Properties tab
before or after you draw the patio. Patios are drawn with a
default material, which you can change by applying a
different material.
design:
Patio Properties
Elevating Objects
Dimensioning
To add a patio
1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Patio Tool.

you want.
3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a patio.
Patio Properties
Patios are defined by their thickness. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the component has been
added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.
Patio Thickness defines the distance from the bottom of the patio section to the
top.
Thickness 2"
Thickness 6"
213
Chapter
Calc. Area button automatically calculate the square footage of the patio section. The area is displayed on the
Properties tab.
Adding Outdoor Cabinets

Outdoor Cabinets can be added to your design with just a
few mouse clicks. In addition to placing pre-designed
cabinets, you can customize each feature as well as create a
cabinet of your own from scratch.
When the tool is active you can choose the cabinet style you
want from the Properties tab. You can also change the
cabinet style after it has been placed in your drawing.
Cabinets are added with default properties, but you can
customize almost every aspect of a cabinet to make it your
own.
design:
Outdoor Cabinet Properties

Elevating Objects
To add an outdoor cabinet
1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Outdoor Cabinet Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the outdoor cabinet in your design.

You can easily edit a cabinet after youve placed it in your drawing. From resizing base doors to adding additional
drawers, each aspect of a cabinet is customizable. To access the different faces and components of a cabinet, click
the cabinet Component button on the Properties tab.
Cabinet Styles
The available properties depend on the cabinet style. You can change the cabinet style at any time as you design.
Cabinet Components
The Component button lists the components on the active cabinet
style that are available for editing. When you choose one of the
components, its properties are displayed on the Properties tab.
The cabinet components that are available for editing depending
on the active cabinet style. For example, the Base Cabinet style
includes Base Cabinet and Base Door components, while the Gas
Grill styles do not include door components. Each of the available
Component properties are described below.
Note: Always press the ENTER to accept new values in a text

box.
215
Chapter
Base Cabinet
Width defines the overall distance from one side of the cabinet to the other side.
Height defines the distance from the bottom of the base cabinet to the top of the
base cabinet.
Depth defines the distance from the front side of the cabinet to the back.
Toe Kick defines the height of the toe kick, measured up from the bottom of the
cabinet.
Style Height defines the distance between the top and bottom edges of the
doors and drawers and the edges of the cabinet. When this value is adjust, the
size and positioned of the doors and drawers is affected.
Style Width defines the distance between the side edges of the doors and
drawers and the edges of the cabinet. When this value is adjust, the size and
positioned of the doors and drawers is affected.
Desk Opening checkbox controls the whether or not the cabinet includes an
opening in the center. When selected, an opening is added, and you can adjust
the Width in the corresponding text box. When deselected, an opening is not included.
Flip Corner Position button flips the corner where the angled outward facing cabinet is positioned to the opposite
corner (applies to corner style cabinets only).
Width
Height
Style Height
Depth
Style Width
Toe Kick
Base Door/Drawers
Width defines the distance from one side of an individual door or drawer to the
other side.
Height defines the distance from the bottom of an individual door or drawer to
the top.
Elevation defines the distance between the bottom of cabinet and the base of
the component.
Side Offset defines the distance that the component is positioned from the side
of the cabinet.
Count defines the number of doors or drawers.
Stack Doors/Stack Drawers checkbox controls whether base cabinet doors and
drawers are position side-by-side or stacked one on top of the other. When
selected, the components are stack on top of each other; when deselected they
are positioned side-by-side.
Mirror Hardware checkbox controls the position of the door hardware. When
selected, all of the hardware is positioned at the same location on each door;
when deselected the hardware is positioned in the top corner of the inside edge.
Inset checkbox controls the display of the door or drawer. When selected, the component is inset as an opening;
when deselected the door or drawer is displayed. (available for Base Door and Drawers only).
Facing Style button provides style options for the door and drawer faces.
Hardware Library button provides access to the

Cabinet Knobs and Pulls libraries.
Hardware Style button opens the hardware library

styles. When a style is selected it is automatically
applied to the hardware.
Hardware Positioning allows you to click an

arrow to move the hardware in that direction.
217
Chapter
Counter Top
Thickness defines the distance from the bottom of the counter top to the top.
Overhang Front defines the distance the front edge of the counter top extends
Overhang Back defines the distance the back edge of the counter top extends
Overhang Left defines the distance the left edge of the counter top extends out
from the cabinet.
Overhang Right defines the distance the right edge of the counter top extends
Bar Top
Backsplash Height defines the distance backsplash extends up from the

cabinet.
Backsplash Depth defines the distance from the front of the backsplash to the
back of the cabinet.
Left, Right, and Back Visible checkboxes control the visibility of the backsplash
on that corresponding side. When selected, a backsplash is visible on that edge;
when deselected it is not visible.
Thickness defines the distance from the bottom of the bar top to the top.
Back Depth defines the distance the bar top extends away from the back of the
cabinet.
Left Depth defines the distance the bar top extends away from the left
backsplash (Left backsplash must be enabled).
Right Depth defines the distance the bar top extends away from the right backsplash (Right backsplash must be
enabled).
Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways and Driveways

In Architect 3D, you can design sidewalks, pathways, and
driveways using the same tool. Once a pathway is drawn,
you can customize it by applying any material to suit your
needs.
By default, the pathway is drawn using a curved style. You
can change this, as well as the width, on the Properties tab
before or after you draw.
Pathways are drawn with a default material, which you can
change by applying a different material.
design:
Pathway/Driveway Properties
Elevating Objects
To add a pathway
1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Pathway/Driveway Tool.

2 In the design window, click to set the start point and drag to define the shape of the
pathway or driveway.
3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the pathway or driveway and then right-click
to place.
In this example the width is 4'-0" and the Style is Straight.
Pathways and driveways are defined by their width and whether they are curved or straight. You can edit the
properties before you draw or after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the
Properties tab.
Pathway Width defines the distance from one side of the pathway to the other
side.
Pathway Style specifies a curved or straight pathway.
Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the displays of dimensions in 2D. If automatic

dimensions are not displayed for the entire drawing, the pathway dimensions are
not displayed. For details on controlling the automatic dimensions display
Dimensioning, on page 59.
Calc. Area button automatically calculate the square footage of the pathway. The
area is displayed on the Properties tab.
219
Chapter
Adding Edging
Architect 3D makes it easy to place edging around flower
beds or along walkways. Once drawn, you can apply colors
or materials to the edging so it blends with your home plans
color scheme.
Edging is drawn with a default material, which you can
change by applying a different material. You can also edit
the edging properties on the Properties tab before or after
you draw.
design:
Edging Properties
Elevating Objects
Applying Building Materials & Applying Paint and
Color
To add edging
1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Edging Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Draw Method drop-down menu and choose the shape you
want.
3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw edging.
Edging Properties
Edging is defined by its width, depth, height, spacing, and the style. You can edit the properties before you draw or
after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.
Edging Properties
Edging Width defines the distance from one side of a piece of edging material to
the other side of a piece of edging.
Edging Depth defines the distance from the front of the edging to the back.
Flip Face allows you to flip the front and back edges of the edging.
Edging Height defines the distance from the base of the edging to the top.
Vary Heights when selected the edging is displayed with ragged, varied
heights along the entire segment. When deselected, the edging is the same
height along the entire segment.
Vary Heights Disabled
Vary Heights Enabled
Edging Spacing defines the distance between each piece of edging material.

automatic dimensions are not displayed for the entire drawing, the edging
Styles library includes the available edging and border styles. You can choose the style before or after you place
the edging.
Spacing 0
Spacing 3"
Depth
Width
Spacing
Height
221
Chapter
Drawing Fences and Gates

With Architect 3D, you can draw fences and gates with
ease. Once a fence or gate is drawn, you can customize it
by applying any material or paint color.
The following options are available from the Fence toolset:
Fence
Fence Gate

design:
Fence and Gate Properties

Elevating Objects
Materials
Fence
Fences are drawn to follow your topography. When the tool is active you can choose the style you want from the
Properties tab. You can also change the style after the fence has been placed by selecting the fence in your drawing
and choosing a different style.
The pre-configured fence styles have set measurements that cannot be changed. To add a fence that you can edit,
either before or after you draw, choose the Custom fence option on the Properties tab.
This is an example of a Custom fence with an Iron Ornamental material applied
To add a fence
1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Fence Tool from the Fence toolset.
fence.
3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the fence and then right click to place.
Fence Gate
Using the Gate Tool you can add a gate along a fence segment. The gate style always conforms to the fencing
material, so if a gate is placed on a privacy fence, the gate will be a privacy fence gate. You can set the gate width on
the Properties tab before you add it, or by dragging its end points after youve added it in your design.
To add a gate to a fence
1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Gate Tool from the Fence toolset.
2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the gate on the fence and release
to place.

The properties that are available for a fence depend on the fence style. Pre-configured fence styles have set
dimensions that cannot be edited. The Custom fence style is defined by the span length and height, post width and
height, and the gate height. Gates inherit the fence style.
Fence Styles
223
Chapter
Custom Style
Span Length defines the length of each section in the run of the fence.
Span Height defines the distance from the bottom of the fence section to the top.
Post Width defines the distance from one side of the post to the other side.
Post Height defines the distance from the bottom of the post to the top.
Gate Height defines the distance from the bottom of the gate to the top.
Span Length
Post Width
Post Height
Span Height
Gate Height
Drawing Retaining Walls

Architect 3D makes it easy to add interest and functionality to
your outdoor living areas by adding retaining walls. Retaining
walls can be used to create raised planting beds, to line an
above-ground swimming pool, to separate two varied height
areas in a lot, and more.
When the tool is active you can choose the wall style you
want from the Properties tab. You can also change the wall
style after it has been placed in your drawing.
design:
Retaining Wall Properties

2D Editing Methods
Elevating Objects
To add a retaining wall
1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Retaining Wall Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to set the angle and length for the retaining wall.

Retaining walls are defined by their wall style, thickness, height, and in some cases their slope. For more information
on editing walls, see Wall Properties, on page 119.
Designing a Sprinkler System

Architect 3D will be useful to design a sprinkler system for your yard. All of the irrigation tools are available from the
Irrigation toolset on the Landscape plan tab.
Reshaping

Elevating Objects
AutoSnap
Sprinkler Head
By placing a series of sprinkler heads, with various
coverages, you will achieve a complete watering pattern.
Sprinklers are visible in the 2D view only.
To add a sprinkler head
1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Sprinkler Head Tool from the Irrigation
toolset.
2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to define the radius and then drag to specify
the coverage area for the sprinkler. Release to place.
225
Chapter
Irrigation Water Line

Water lines are used to represent the connections in an irrigation system. These are visible in the 2D view only.
To add an irrigation water line
1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Irrigation Water Line Tool from the Irrigation
toolset.
Irrigation Zone
Irrigation zone markers provide a 2D representation of the various zones in your irrigation system.
To add an irrigation zone
1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Irrigation Zone Tool from the Irrigation
toolset.
2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place each zone in your design.
Designing a Sprinkler System
Irrigation Control Panel

You can add an irrigation control panel to a wall in your design.
Once placed, you can reposition or adjust the elevation of the
control panel.
To add an irrigation control panel
1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Irrigation Control Panel Tool from the
Irrigation toolset.
2 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to position the control panel on the side of a
227
Chapter
Irrigation Backflow Valve

Backflow valves can be an integral part of your irrigation
system, and in some case, a legal requirement. You can
easily add backflow values to your design, and see them in
both the 2D and 3D views.
To add an irrigation backflow valve
1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Irrigation Backflow Valve Tool from the
Irrigation toolset.
2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place each valve in your design.
Rain Sensor
You can place rain sensors to help increase the efficiency of your irrigation system and conserve water and energy,
when possible. Place rain sensors in a location that is unobstructed by overhangs or branches for an accurate
measurement.
To add a rain sensor
1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Rain Sensor Tool from the Irrigation toolset.
2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place each sensor in your design.
Drawing Topography Elements
Drawing Topography Elements

You can draw contours lines to represent the topography of
your lot. Contour lines represent a series of connected
points that share the same elevation. You begin by choosing
a general shape for your contour, setting the elevation, and
then choosing the drawing method. When used together,
multiple lines set at varying elevations creates dips or berms
in your landscape.
The contour tools are available from the Topography toolset
on the Landscape plan tab.
When the tool is active you can set the topography line elevation on the Properties tab. You can also change the
elevation of the topography line after it has been placed in your drawing.
There are a number of drawing methods for creating topography. The default shape is a polygon, which you can draw
as an enclosed or open shape. For details on draw methods, see Detail Plan Tab, on page 233. Below is an example
of using topography lines to create a berm, where the inner contour lines are set to higher elevations.
Note: Elevations for topography are not cumulative, each is relative to the working elevation of your drawing.
Topography Element Properties

229
Chapter
To add topography lines
1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Topography Line Tool from the Topography
toolset.
you want.
3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw the topography.
This example shows a railing drawn using the Closed Curve Polygon shape
Topography Element Properties

Topography elements are defined by their shape and elevation. You can edit the properties before you draw or after
the element has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.
Elevation defines the elevation at which the contour line is positioned, relative to
the ground.
Edit Level Select Object to resize the whole object or Points to edit individual
points on the shape.
Open & Closed options specify if the shape is open-ended or contained. When
closed, the elevation applies to the entire contour creating more of a full shape;
when open the contour blends with the lower elevation at the opening creating a
more shallow shape.
Convert to Build Pad button creates a flat area regardless of topography lines
that exist.
Adding Slopes
Adding Slopes
Many topographical maps show slopes, rather than
complex topography shapes. Once youve defined the
slope, you can move selected topography lines to create
plateaus or otherwise customize your topography design.
You can set the start elevation for the slope and the descent
angle before you draw or after the component has been
added to your design by selecting it and clicking the
Properties tab
design:
Slope Lot Properties

To add a slope to the landscape
1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Slope Lot Section Tool from the Topography
toolset.
2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to set the descent angle and length for the
slope.
Slope Lot Properties

Slope lots are defined by their starting and ending elevations. You can also choose to specify a descent angle.
Start Elevation defines the elevation where the top of the slope begins. The
slope descends from this elevation.
Descent Angle defines the angle of the slope.

automatic dimensions are not displayed for the entire drawing, the slope
231
Chapter
Descent Angle
Start Elevation
End Elevation
Excavating Topography
From underground barns to planting cavities, you can
excavate with ease.
By default, excavated areas are created at an elevation of
-3'-0", meaning 3'-0" into the ground. The elevation is
controlled by the component elevation setting in the
Elevation bar.
You can further customize excavations using the following
edit methods:
Elevating Objects
Selecting Points and 2D Shapes
To excavate the topography
1 On the Landscape plan toolbar, click the Excavate Topography Tool from the
Topography toolset.
you want.
3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw an excavated area.
Chapter 16
Detail Plan Tab

Architect 3D provides tools specifically for 2D drawing. Items drawn with these tools will not show up in the 3D View
window, unless converted to 3D entities. These tools make it easy to label your plan, from description blocks that are
used to label what is being printed on each page to notations about square footage on each floor.
The Detail Plan Tab features several tools for drawing basic shapes like rectangles, arcs, and curves. Methods for
drawing these shapes are used throughout Architect 3D.
In addition, using the tools on the Detail Plan Tab, you will be able to easily convert imported DXF/DWG shapes to
various intelligent features like walls, stairways, flooring, property lines, and much more.
Series.
Drawing Rectangles and Squares

With Architect 3D, you can draw items that will appear only in the 2D design window. If you choose, these shapes can
be converted to a variety of features, for instance walls, stairways, pathways, edging, and more. Rectangles can also
be used as label boxes for your printed plans or can be converted to walls or flooring.
Before you draw, you can choose how you want to draw the shape from the Draw Method drop-down menu on the
Properties tab.
Editing
Detail Shapes
Elevating Objects
Dimensioning
Converting Details to Intelligent Elements
Reshaping
To draw rectangles and squares
1 On the Detail plan toolbar, click the Rectangle Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to set the angle and length for the shape.
233
Chapter
16 Detail Plan Tab
This example shows a rectangle drawn using the Rectangle From Corner shape
Drawing Circles and Ovals

You can draw circles and ovals, which can be converted to curved walls, curved stairways, ground fill regions, and
other curved shapes.
Properties tab.
Editing
Detail Shapes
Elevating Objects
Dimensioning
Reshaping
To draw circles and ovals
1 On the Detail plan toolbar, click the Circle/Oval Tool.

This example shows a circle drawn using the Circle From Center shape
Drawing Lines
You can draw lines that can, in turn, be converted to walls, stairs, ducts, stiffener beams, edging, pathways, and more.
Properties tab.
Editing
Detail Shapes
Elevating Objects
Dimensioning
Reshaping
Drawing Polygons

To draw lines
1 On the Detail plan toolbar, click the Line Tool.

This example shows a line drawn using the Line From Corner shape
Drawing Polygons
You can draw open or closed polygons that can be easily converted into elements such walls, roof sections, floors or
floor cutouts, or topography, just to name a few.
Properties tab.
Editing
Detail Shapes
Elevating Objects
Reshaping
Dimensioning
To draw polygons
1 On the Detail plan toolbar, click the Polygon Tool.

2 In the design window, click to set the start point and drag to define the length and angle of
the polylines.
3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the polygon and then right-click to place.
This example shows a polygon drawn using the Closed Polygon shape
Drawing Arcs
With Architect 3D you can draw arcs that can be easily converted into curved walls, edging, stairs, and more.
235
Chapter
16 Detail Plan Tab
Properties tab.
Editing
Detail Shapes
Elevating Objects
Reshaping
Dimensioning
To draw arcs
1 On the Detail plan toolbar, click the Arc Tool.

This example shows an arc drawn using the Arc Circle shape
Drawing Circular Arcs

With Architect 3D, you can draw arcs that can be easily converted into curved walls, edging, stairs, and more.
Editing Detail Shapes

Elevating Objects
Dimensioning
To draw circular arcs
1 On the Detail plan toolbar, click the Circular Arc Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to define the radius and then drag to specify the
angle. Release to place.
Drawing Multigons
Drawing Multigons
You can draw equal-sided decks, floors, even treehouses with the easy-to-use Multigon Tool and the Convert To
feature. For more information, see Converting Details to Intelligent Elements, which begins on page 241.
Before you draw, choose the number of sides you want for the multigon on the Properties tab. Be sure to press ENTER
to accept new values.

Elevating Objects
Dimensioning
To draw multigons
1 On the Detail plan toolbar, click the Multigon Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, type the number of sides for the shape and then press ENTER.
3 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to set the size for the multigon.
Note: To change the multigons size, but constrain its orientation, hold down CTRL while drawing.
Drawing Curves
You can draw intricate curved flowerbeds and walls, among many other things, using the Curve Tool and the Convert
To feature of Architect 3D.
Properties tab.
237
Chapter
16 Detail Plan Tab

Editing
Detail Shapes
Elevating Objects
Reshaping
Dimensioning
To draw curves
1 On the Detail plan toolbar, click the Curve Tool.

the polylines.
3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the curve and then right-click to place.
This example shows a curve drawn using the Open Curved Polygon shape

To further control the look of the shapes drawn with any of the arc or curve tools, you have control over the degree of
curve assigned to them. With the Straighten feature, it is easy to create angular shapes and, with Curve Tension, you
can change the appearance. Curve Tension is measured between 1 and 10. Specifying 1 in the dialog box results in
very little tension being applied, while specifying 10 causes a slightly-exaggerated curve.
Default Curve Tension (8)
Curve Tension at 2
To change curve tension
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select an element. Its properties are displayed on the
Properties tab.
2 In the Curve section, click the Adjust button. The Smooth dialog box is displayed.
Using Different Lines and Fills
3 Type the amount of tension that you want and click OK.
To remove curve tension
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select an element. Its properties are displayed on the
Properties tab.
2 In the Curve section, click the Straighten button. The curve is changed to a polyline.
Using Different Lines and Fills

You can change the thickness (weight) of the lines or fills of the shapes drawn with the tools on the Details Plan tab.
Line weight
You can choose a predefined line weight from the Weight button drop-down menu or specify a
value up to 20pt. To edit the line weight, you must select the shape first.
Line Weight 1pt
Line Weight 6pt
To change the line weight
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to edit.
2 On the Detail tab, click the Weight button and choose one of the sizes from the drop-down menu.
To specify a custom line weight
2 On the Detail tab, click the Weight button and choose Other from the drop-down menu. The Line
Weight dialog box is displayed.
3 Type a value in the Points text box or click the arrows to edit incrementally and then click OK.
Line style
You can choose a predefined line style from the Line Style button drop-down menu. To edit
the line style, you must select the shape first.
Solid Style
Dotted Style
239
16 Detail Plan Tab
Chapter
To change the line style
2 On the Detail tab, click the Line Style button and choose one of the styles from the drop-down
menu.
Fill pattern
You can change a shapes fill pattern to be transparent, a solid
color, or a patterned fill. To edit a shapes fill style, you must select
the shape first. The fills, from left to right, include:
Transparent
Filled
Solid Filled
Patterns
To change the shape fill
2 On the Detail tab, click the fill pattern button you want.
Controlling Layers of Detail Shapes

You can control which layer a shape is on by moving it to the front or moving it back behind other shapes.
To control shape layers
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select an element.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Bring to Front button or the Send to
Back to move the selections position.

With Architect 3D, you can draw items that will appear only
in the 2D design window, or you can convert them to
intelligent elements. For example, you can convert a line to
a fence, a rectangle to four exterior walls, a circle to a deck
or even a circular stairway, and so on. There is virtually no
limit to what you can draw, using this combination.
To convert a shape
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select

an element.
2 On the Properties tab, click the Convert To

button and choose one of the options to convert
the selection.

Object-Level Editing is active by default. Object-Level Editing, along with Point-Level Editing, controls how your edits
impact your object. When Object-Level is enabled, the entire object is selected; this is ideal for resize the entire object.
When Points-Level is enabled, each control point on the object is selected; this is ideal for precision editing such as
reshaping.
To fine-tune your design further, use the Insert Point or Delete Point tools. These tools are available anytime, but are
especially useful when editing shapes.
To choose the edit level
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select an object. Its
2 Under Edit Level, choose Object or Points.

3 Click-and-drag a point to resize or reshape the selection.
Object
Points
To fillet (round) a corner

Use the Fillet Corner Tool to create a round corner on an otherwise angled corner point. This allows you to
manually set the curvature of a selected point.
241
Chapter
16 Detail Plan Tab
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to fillet.
2 On the Properties tab, select the Points radio button in the Edit Level section.
3 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Fillet Corner Tool.
4 Click a corner point of the element; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer
toward the center of the element to define the curve you want.
5 Release the mouse to stop filleting the corner.
To inversely fillet a corner

You can use the Fillet Corner Tool to create an inverted round corner on an otherwise angled corner point. This
allows you to manually set the curvature of a selected point.
3 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Fillet Corner Tool.
4 While pressing SHIFT, click a corner point of the element; hold down the mouse button
and move the pointer toward the center of the element to define the curve you want.
5 Release the mouse to end.
To chamfer a corner
Use the Chamfer Corner Tool to create a straight edge where an angled corner point exists.
3 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Chamfer Corner Tool.
4 Click a corner point of the element; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer
toward the center of the element to define the straight segment.
5 Release the mouse to end.
To add additional points
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Add Point Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing
mode.
2 Click to add a new point to a shape you have created.

To remove a point
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Remove Point Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing
mode.
2 Click to remove a point from a shape you have created.

You can fill a 2D shape with plants, or place a row of plants using a line or curve. In the example below, a curve has
been filled with an Iris using the perimeter option.
To fill a shape with plants
1 Draw the shape you want to fill with plants.

2 Choose the plant you want to add in the shape (for information on accessing plants, see Plants
Libraries, on page 78).
3 Right-click an edge of the shape and choose Plant Fill. The Plant Fill dialog box is displayed.
243
Chapter
16 Detail Plan Tab
4 Choose the settings you want and then click OK.
Chapter 17
Framing Plan Tab

The tools contained on Architect 3Ds Framing Plan tab allow you to view and edit the structural elements of your
design. You can add beams, joists, and other components, plus you have total control over what size lumber is used
for what purpose. The Framing tools let you define exactly where and what is to be used for the framing phase of your
design.
Series.
Adding Structural Components

The Framing tools let you define exactly where and what kind of lumber or other material is to be used for the framing
phase of your design.
Framing Beam
Framing beams are placed at a default elevation, which is
the ceiling height plus the slab or joist thickness. You can
edit the beam properties, including size and material, on
the Properties tab before or after you add it to your
design.
To see framing components in 3D, enable the Framing
rendering style. For more information, see Accessing the
3D Rendering Styles, which begins on page 275.
design:

Elevating Objects
To add a framing beam
1 On the Framing plan toolbar, click the Framing Beam Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to set the angle and length for the beam.
245
Chapter
17 Framing Plan Tab
Framing Beam Properties

Framing beams are defined by their width, depth, and material. You can edit the properties before you draw or after the
Width defines the distance from one side of the beam to the other.
Depth defines the distance from the bottom of the beam to the top.
Type specifies the beam material type you want.

automatic dimensions are not displayed for the entire drawing, the deck
dimensions are not displayed. For details on controlling the automatic
dimensions display Dimensioning, on page 59.
Depth
Length
Width
Floor Joist
Floor joists are drawn using a polygon shape. You can
edit the joist properties, including size and material, on the
Properties tab before or after you add it to your design.
rendering style. For more information, see Accessing the
3D Rendering Styles, which begins on page 275.
design:

Elevating Objects
Joist Properties
To add floor joists
1 On the Framing plan toolbar, click the Flooring Joist Tool.

you want.
3 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw the floor joist section.
This example shows a floor joist drawn using the Closed Polygon shape
Joist Properties
Architect 3D automatically frames each floor, wall, and roof section with specifications that you can easily modify.
Joists are defined by their angle, spacing, board width, and the material. You can edit the properties before you draw
or after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.
Joist Angle defines the degree at which you want the joist boards placed.
Joist Spacing defines the distance between each joist (use feet-and-inches or
just inches).
Joist Size defines the joist board width.
Rim-Joist checkbox specifies whether headers should be included (selected) or

excluded (deselected)
Rim Joist Included
Rim Joist Excluded
Type specifies the joist material type you want.
238.
247
Chapter
17 Framing Plan Tab
for the entire drawing, the joist dimensions are not displayed. For details on controlling the automatic dimensions
Joist Spacing
Joist Size
Joist Angle
Framing Support Column

Support columns are placed at the base elevation of the
current floor. You can edit the column properties, including
size and material, on the Properties tab before or after you add
it to your design.
rendering style. For more information, see Accessing the 3D
Rendering Styles, which begins on page 275.

Elevating Objects
To add a framing beam
1 On the Framing plan toolbar, click the Framing

Support Column Tool.
2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place a column.
Support Column Properties

After adding a support column, you can change its material and size. You can edit the properties before you draw or
after the component has been added to your design by selecting it and clicking the Properties tab.
Height defines the distance from the bottom of the column to the top.
Width/Diameter defines the distance from one side of the column to the other
side.
Type specifies the column material type you want.
Height
Width/Diameter

As you draw walls in Architect 3D you can specify which walls are insulated, which are load bearing, as well as the
framing material used. You can specify these details in the Wall Framing dialog box.
To edit a walls framing properties, right-click the wall and choose Framing Properties. The Wall Framing dialog box is
displayed. After your edit the settings, click OK to close the dialog box.
Framing Material options allow you to choose the material used for
framing
Load Bearing checkbox specifies a wall as load-bearing when selected
Insulated checkbox specifies a wall as insulted when selected

Roof sections are automatically framed with specifications set in Architect 3D.
You can easily modify all of these settings in the Roof Framing dialog box. You
can edit the framing properties for roofs created using the roof shape tools and the freehand roof tools; automatic roofs
are controlled by the Automatic Roof Properties. For more information on automatic roof properties, see Auto-Roof
Framing Type specifies if roof framing uses rafters or

trusses. Each has its own properties.
Frame Rafters
Rafter Spacing defines the distance between each
roof rafter.
Rafter Size defines the width of the roof rafter.
249
Chapter
17 Framing Plan Tab
Rafter
Spacing
Rafter
Size
Frame Trusses
Truss Spacing defines the distance between each roof truss.
Truss
Spacing
Framing Material options allow you to choose the material used for framing.
To edit roof framing properties
1 Enable the Roof plan so the roof panels are visible in the design window.
2 Right-click the roof section and choose Framing Properties. The Roof Framing dialog box is
displayed.
3 Edit the settings as needed and then click OK.

As you draw staircases in Architect 3D you specify the framing material in the Stair Framing dialog box, which is
accessible by right-clicking the staircase center line. The following option is available:
Framing Material options allow you to choose the material used for
framing
To edit staircase framing properties
1 Right-click the staircase center line and choose Framing

Properties. The Stair Framing dialog box is displayed.
2 Edit the settings and click OK.
Customizing Deck Framing Properties

Decks are automatically framed with specifications set in Architect 3D. You can easily modify all of these settings.
Customizing Foundation Framing Material
Decking Board settings specify if decking boards are

included (selected) on the top of the deck framing or excluded
(deselected). When selected, you can define the width and
angle of the boards.
Decking Boards Enabled
Decking Boards Disabled
Joist settings specify if joists and rim-joists are included (selected) in the deck framing or excluded (deselected).
When selected, you can define the size, spacing, and angle of the joists.
Deck Joist Enabled
Deck Joist Disabled
Post Piers settings define the diameter and depth (below ground) of the piers below each deck post.
Framing Material options allow you to choose the material used for framing.
To edit deck framing properties
1 Enable the Deck plan so the deck is visible in the design window.
2 Right-click the deck and choose Framing Properties. The Deck Framing dialog box is displayed.
Customizing Foundation Framing Material

Structures are built with a concrete slab foundation by default. You can customize the foundation framing material to
use concrete, steel, or wood. The foundation framing can be customized while working on any plan except the
Foundation plan.
251
Chapter
17 Framing Plan Tab
Frame Floor Joist specifies if floor joists are included (selected) in

the foundation framing or excluded (deselected). When selected,
you can define the spacing and angle of the joists. (Only available
with Wood and Steel). You can manually draw floor joists using the
Floor Joist Tool (Floor Joist, on page 246).
Frame Rim Joist checkbox specifies if headers should be included

(selected) or excluded (deselected). (Only available with Wood and
Steel).
Automatically update foundation framing checkbox controls if

changes can be made to the foundation framing properties.
Framing Material options allow you to choose the material used for the foundation framing.
To edit foundation framing properties
the Properties tab.
2 Click the Slab Framing button. The Auto-Foundation Framing dialog box is displayed.
Part 3
Drawing and Design

Settings
Chapter 18: Edit Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Chapter 19: Control Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Chapter 20: Control 3D Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Chapter 18
Edit Your Design

In addition to standard Windows commands like cut, copy, paste, and delete, Architect 3D includes more sophisticated
modes of editing your design. You can copy or move entities, walls, and other design elements, to different floors, as
well as between plan layers.
You can flip or mirror your entire design, either vertically or horizontally, to make it easy to visualize various layouts. In
addition, you can move or rotate your entire floor plan at one time.
More advanced concepts are also covered here, such as rotating individual entities to custom fit them into your design
and elevating entities, using the Elevation Bar, to achieve perfect placement. Learn to customize settings like nudge
factor, so Architect 3D works best for you.
Undo
With Architect 3D, you can specify up to 50 levels of Undo, making it easy to recover your work. Bear in mind, the more
levels of undo you specify, the more system resources will be used. To conserve system resources, set the undo level
at the lowest level possible.
To use undo
Click Edit menu > Undo, or press CTRL+Z. The previous action is reversed.
To turn off undo
1 Click Edit menu > Undo Preferences. The Preferences window opens to the Undo Preferences
settings.
2 Select the Deactivate Undo checkbox, then click OK.

To undo levels
1 Click Edit menu > Undo Preferences. The Preferences window opens to the Undo Preferences
settings.
2 Deselect the Deactivate Undo checkbox.

3 Type the number of undo levels you want to use and then click OK.
To use redo
Click Edit menu > Redo, or press CTRL+Y. The previous action is reversed.
Cut, Copy, and Paste

Cut moves the selection to the Clipboard and deletes the original. Copy places a duplicate of the selection on the
Clipboard. Paste places the contents of the Clipboard into your drawing. By default, when you paste a selection
multiple times, each time you paste, the element is offset so each is visible. You can also paste a selection without
offset, so each time you paste the selection it will stack on top of the previous one. You can place the Clipboard
contents as many times as necessary. Clear removes the selection.
255
Chapter
18 Edit Your Design
To cut a selection
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click the selection you want to cut.
2 Click Edit menu > Cut (or press CTRL+X). The selection is removed to the Clipboard.
To copy a selection to the clipboard
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click the selection you want to copy.
2 Click Edit menu > Copy (or press CTRL+C). The selection is copied to the Clipboard.
To paste a selection from the clipboard

2 Click Edit menu > Paste (or press CTRL+V). The selection is copied from the Clipboard to the
design window.
To delete a selection
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click the selection you want to delete.
2 Press DELETE on the keyboard.
Nudging a Selection
You can also precisely move features into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow keys to move selected
features a specified distance, which is based on the Snap Grid settings. To learn more about the Snap Grid and to
adjust nudge settings, see Using the Grid, on page 52.
Note: To nudge using the Snap Grid settings, Snap to Grid must be enabled. On the 2D Menu, confirm there is a
checkmark next to Snap to Grid. This means that the Snap Grid is activated. When the Snap to Grid is turned off,
Nudge moves the entity or feature one pixel at a time, instead of snapping to the grid distance.
To move a selection using the Nudge feature
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool then click to select the entity you want to nudge.
2 Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the entity.
(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Nudge then click the direction (up, down, left, right).
Moving a Selection
Once youve placed features, you can move them by dragging or by specifying exact Cartesian or polar coordinates
that correspond to the reference grid. For more information on the reference grid, see Using the Grid, on page 52.
Note: To select more than one entity, hold down SHIFT while clicking.
To move entities by dragging
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool then click to select the entity.
2 Holding down the mouse button, drag the entity to a new location, then release the mouse button.
To move entities by specifying coordinates
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool then click to select entity.
2 Click Edit > Move. The Move dialog box is displayed.
3 Select either Cartesian or Polar, then type new X and Y-Axis coordinates in the appropriate text
boxes.
4 Click OK. The entity you selected is moved, based on the coordinates you specified.
Using the rotate feature, you can easily spin an entity around any point. This is useful when you want to face an entity
in a different direction from which it was drawn. Using the Rotate Tool, you can freely rotate the selection, or you can
specify the exact amount of rotation, using the Rotate dialog box. Selections are rotated around their center point.
To freely rotate an entity
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Rotate Tool and click to select the point or double-click to
select the element you want to rotate.
2 Click-and-drag the entity in the direction that you want to rotate. The degree of rotation is
displayed in the Status Bar as you drag.
3 Release the mouse button to place.

To rotate by specifying an amount
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click the feature you want to rotate.
2 Click Edit menu > Rotate, or double-click the Rotate Tool. The Rotate dialog box is displayed.
3 Select either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle you want the selected rotated.
4 Click OK. The entity is rotated.
To rotate an element in 1-degree increments
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click the feature you want to rotate.
2 Press and hold SHIFT, then press the left or right arrow key to rotate the selection in that direction.
Flip and Mirror

The Flip function takes the original feature and reverses it, either horizontally or vertically. Mirror works much like the
Flip function. The difference is that Mirror leaves the original and makes a duplicate. Mirror creates two identical
entities, facing one another.
To flip a feature horizontally
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the feature you want to flip.
2 Click Edit menu > Flip Horizontal.
To flip a feature vertically
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the feature you want to flip.
2 Click Edit menu > Flip Vertical.
To mirror a feature horizontally
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the feature you want to mirror.
2 Click Edit menu > Mirror Horizontal.
3 Move the feature into position.
257
Chapter
18 Edit Your Design
To mirror a feature vertically
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the feature you want to mirror.
2 Click Edit menu > Mirror Vertical.
3 Move the feature into position.
Aligning Objects
There are a number of options for aligning entities in your drawing. The Align Objects option allows you to align
multiple selections with an edge or center of one of the objects.
Align to Grid makes it easy to align a feature or group to a point on the Snap Grid. For more information, see Using the
Grid, which begins on page 52.
To align objects to another object
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the object (or objects) you want to be aligned.
2 Press and hold SHIFT and then click the object with which you want the object aligned.
3 Click Edit menu > Align Objects and then click how you want the objects aligned. The objects are
aligned with the last object selected, based on the position you chose.
Elevating Objects
There are a number of ways to elevate objects in your drawing, from adjusting individual objects, to groups of objects,
to an entire floors contents at once. When an entity is elevated to a nearby surface, it must be positioned on the object
to which you want it elevated. For example, if you want to elevate a potted plant to a deck surface, drag the plant so it
is positioned within the boundaries of the deck.
With the Elevation Bar, you can move selected items vertically by simply entering the elevation you want. This on-thefly feature makes it a snap to make sure windows, doors, plants, and other elements, are in exactly the position you
want. Additionally, the Elevation Bar automatically detects the elevation of nearby objects in the drawing. This allows
you to precisely place a planter on top of a deck, for example.
The Set Elevation dialog box is available from the Edit menu when an object is selected. Additionally, the elevations of
nearby objects in the drawing are automatically detected. This allows you to precisely place a planter on top of a deck,
for example.
Elevating Objects
Note: To specify an amount in inches you may use either 18 or 18". To specify an amount in feet and inches they
must be separated by a hyphen, for instance 18'-0", 8'-6", and so on. A single number like 20 will be understood as 20
inches.
To elevate an entity using the Elevation Bar
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click to select the entity you want to
elevate (hold down the SHIFT key as you click to select multiple entities). The Object
Elevation field becomes active in the Elevation Bar.
Note: If an object in the selection set is configured to float above the topography,
deselect the checkbox to elevate the object(s) freely.
2 Type the elevation you want, in feet and inches, or just inches, then press ENTER. The selection is
elevated based on the values you entered.
OR
Click the Object Elevation drop-down menu and select the surface to which you want the entity
elevated. The object is elevated to the selected surface.
To elevate an entity using the Set Elevation dialog box
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click to select the entity you want to elevate (hold
down the SHIFT key as you click to select multiple entities).
2 Click Edit menu > Set Object Elevation. The Set Elevation dialog box is displayed.
3 Type the elevation you want in the corresponding field or select one of the available detected
elevations and click OK.
Note: If an object in the selection set is configured to float above the topography, deselect the
checkbox to elevate the object(s) freely.
To make features follow custom topography
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click to select the feature(s) you want to follow the
custom topography.
2 In the Elevation Bar, select the Float Above Topography checkbox.
Float Above Topography Disabled
Float Above Topography Enabled
259
Chapter
18 Edit Your Design
To adjust entire floor elevation
1 Navigate to the floor you want to edit. For more information, see Work on Floor, which begins on
page 266.
2 Click Edit menu > Adjust Entire Floor Elevation. The Adjust Floor Elevation dialog box is
displayed.
3 Type the change in elevation you want applied to the current floor in the Elevation Change text box
and then click OK (to increase the elevation type a positive number, to decrease the elevation type a
negative number).
For example, if your floor is currently 8'-0" and you want to elevate the entire floor and its contents to
10'-0", type 2-0 to increase the floor two feet.
Copy To Floor
There may be times when you want multiple floors to contain duplicates. Copy to Floor leaves the entity in its original
position and places a duplicate where you define. Move to Floor deletes these entities from their original position.
Note: To select more than one entity, press and hold SHIFT, while clicking.
To copy from one floor to another

Selection Tool and click to
select the entities you want
duplicated.
2 Click Edit menu > Copy to

Floor, then select the floor to
which you want the selection(s)
copied.
To move entities from one floor to another

Selection Tool and click to
select the entities you want to
move.
2 Click Edit menu > Move to

Floor, then select the floor to
which you want the selection(s)
moved.
Move To Plan
Move To Plan
With Architect 3D, you can move selections to different plan layers; Move to Floor deletes these entities from their
original position. This will be useful if you want to move a feature between two stories that you have drawn.
To move features from one plan to another
1 On the Edit Toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click to select the feature you want moved. To
select more than one entity, press SHIFT, while clicking entities.
2 Click Edit menu > Move to Plan,
then specify the plan where you
want the feature to appear.
(alternatively) Right-click the
selection and click Move to Plan
on the context menu that is
displayed, then click which plan.
The selection is moved to
selected plan.
Note: Items on a hidden layer

are not available during a Select
All process and will not be moved
along with the other items and
features in your drawing.
Move Entire Plan

At any point during the design process, you can move the entire plan. With just a couple of mouse clicks, you can see
how your dream home will look on different parts of your lot.
Note: Coordinates are measured in inches, or they can be measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.
To move the entire floor plan
1 Click Edit menu > Move Entire Plan. The Move Entire Plan dialog box is displayed.
2 Select either Cartesian or Polar, then type the amount you want the plan moved in the
3 Click OK. The plan is moved based on the coordinates you specified.
Rotate Entire Plan

At any point during the design process, you can rotate the entire plan. With just a couple of mouse clicks, you can see
how your dream home will look facing a different direction on your lot.
To rotate the entire floor plan
1 Click Edit menu > Rotate Entire Plan. The Rotate Entire Plan dialog box is displayed.
261
Chapter
18 Edit Your Design
2 Select either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle you want to rotate the plan in the Angle text
box.
3 Click OK. The plan is rotated, based on the angle measurement you specified.
Flip Entire Plan

The Flip Plan function takes the existing plan orientation and reverses it, either horizontally or vertically.
To flip your drawing plan
Click Edit menu > Flip Entire Plan and choose Horizontal or Vertical.
Chapter 19
Control Your Design

Architect 3D makes it easy to control your working environment. From setting the plan scale and units of measure to
defining your ceiling heights on any floor of your design, all these tools are available on the Design Menu.
Architect 3D even lets you import a scanned image into the background of your design. Once scanned and loaded into
your design file, you can trace it to create a Architect 3D floor plan. You can even set the scale of the new drawing to
the scale of the image. When you are done tracing, you can save the new file without the background bitmap image.
Find or sketch your favorite floor plan design. Using a scanner, digital camera or with the help of a scanning service,
scan the plan and save it in one of the most popular formats.
The designer or owner of most home plans holds the copyright to them. Make sure you have permission before you
copy a plan.
Series.
Setting the Working Elevation

Before you draw, be sure to set your working elevation. All entities are drawn in relation to this elevation. There are two
methods for setting the working elevation: the Elevation Bar and the Design menu.
While nothing is selected in the design window, type the working

elevation you want, in inches, or feet and inches, in the Elevation Bar
then press ENTER. Subsequently-drawn entities are added to the
design based on the new working elevation.
Click Design menu > Set Working Elevation and type the
necessary elevation in inches, or feet and inches, in the
corresponding field, and then click OK.
Tip: You can also right-click the design window and choose Set
Working Elevation, then type the necessary elevation in inches, or
feet and inches, in the corresponding field and click OK.
Setting the Scale

Scale is the ratio between real-world size of objects and items in your drawing and their size
when printed. The default drawing scale is 1/4" = 1', meaning that 1/4" on your drawing plan
equals one foot in real-world size. You can customize scale settings at any time to suit your
needs, as well as print your drawing to scale.
To set the drawing scale
1 Click Design menu > Plan Scale. The Design Options dialog box opens to the Plan
Scale settings.
2 Select a new scale setting, then click OK. The new scale is applied to your plan drawing.
263
Chapter
19 Control Your Design
Setting the Units of Measurement

You can set units of measurement by selecting either English or Metric measurements. You can also set the default
measurements and options to be applied when any previously-drawn design is opened.
To access unit measurement settings, click Design
menu > Unit of Measure. The Design Options
dialog box opens to the Unit of Measure settings.
There are two types of measurement settings
available. Be sure to edit the settings based on the
plan you want them to apply to:
Current Plan Settings these settings apply to

the plan youre currently working on.
New Plan Defaults these settings are the

defaults that apply when you open a new plan
(there is an option to open existing plans using
these settings as well).
To use English measurements
1 Click Design menu > Unit of Measure.

The Design Options dialog box opens to
the Unit of Measure settings.
2 Click the Measurement Units drop-down

menu and choose English Units. Edit the
Angle Format, Precision, and Readout
Format settings as needed and then click OK.
Angle Format defines the number of decimal points you want to use.
Precision defines the number of decimal points you want to use.
Readout Format defines the format you want.
Defining Lot Properties
To use Metric measurements
1 Click Design menu > Unit of Measure. The Design Options dialog box opens to the Unit of
Measure settings.
2 Click the Measurement Units drop-down menu and choose Metric Units. Edit the Angle Format
and Readout Format settings as needed and then click OK.
Angle Format specifies the number of decimal points you want to use.
Readout Format specifies the format you want.
To set defaults for saved drawings
1 Click Design menu > Unit of Measure. The Design Options dialog box opens to the Unit of
Measure settings.
2 In the New Plan Defaults section, edit the settings you want existing drawings to use.
3 Select the Open existing drawings using new plan defaults checkbox and then click OK. The
New Plan Default settings are applied to any previously-drawn design when it is opened.
Defining Lot Properties

The Lot Properties dialog box allows you to control not only the size of your lot, but how it is rendered in 3D.
To access lot properties, click Design menu > Lot
Properties. The Design Options dialog box opens
to the Lot Properties settings. After editing the
settings, click OK.
Lot Size settings define the Width and Depth,

in feet or meters. Type values in the
corresponding text boxes to define the size of
the lot.
Use the drop-down menu to covert the values
to either feet or meters. You can also choose
the measurement you want before entering the
lot size values.
265
Chapter
If youre editing a design that includes topography lines and you want them to resize based on your lot size, select
the Scale existing topography lines on resize checkbox. If you want the topography lines to remain the same
size, deselect the checkbox.
Topography Generation defines the topography generation settings. Type the size of the Patch Resolution you
want. A lower value results in a more accurate 3D rendering of your topography, but may also impact
performance.
Drag the Generation Quality slider to increase or decrease the topography generation quality. Higher generation
quality reduces rendering speed.
Update Topography Grid

Architect 3D keeps track of the changes you make to the topography in your design. If you want to update the
topography grid, you can do this with one click.
To update topography grid, click Design Menu > Update Topography Grid. Your topography changes are applied.
Work on Floor
Use the Working Floor button to switch back and forth between the floors in your
home plan. To work on a particular floor, click the Working Floor button in the topleft corner of the design window, then choose the floor you want to work on from the
drop-down menu that is displayed. The active working floor has a checkmark next to
it.
Tip: You can also click Design menu > Work on Floor then click the floor you
want to work on.
For information on adding or editing floors, see Working with Floors, on page 38.
Calculate Floor Area

Architect 3Ds automatically calculates the square footage for each room of your design as you add them. The
program also updates the square footage, as you change the walls in your design. You can calculate the square
footage for each floor at any time. This feature makes it easy to figure how much carpet youll need to cover the first
floor, for instance, or simply estimate your overall home size.
To calculate floor square footage, click Design menu > Active Floor Area. The
total square footage for the current floor is calculated and displayed in the Status
Bar.
Note: The square footage calculation is based on walls' interior area (surface
to surface).
Floor Plan Image Trace

After you have scanned the plan you want to trace and saved it, you are ready to import it into Architect 3D. You can
import a floor plan image onto the main floor, and then onto the second or third floor also. To be sure all floors line up
correctly, scan all plans at the same size and match the scale identically.
Note: You can import a plan to trace in any of the following file formats; BMP, JPG, PNG, TIF, or PTX.
Floor Plan Image Trace
Import a Floor Plan Image

Floor plan images are imported through the Floor
Plan Trace Properties option in the Design Options
window. If you know the size of image you want,
you can specify the percentage or dimension
values. Otherwise you may need to adjust the
image based on scale after youve imported.
Once youve imported the plan image, you can
trace the image using the wall tools, add electrical
and plumbing components, landscaping, and much
more.
To trace walls, see Drawing Walls, which

begins on page 115.
To add electrical features, see Electrical Plan

Tab, which begins on page 149.
To place landscape plants, see To add

plants, which begins on page 79
To import a floor plan image
1 Click Design menu > Floor Plan Trace Properties. The Design Options dialog box opens to the
Floor Plan Trace Properties.
2 Click the Set Image button and locate the file you want to import.
3 Select the file and click Open. A preview of the floor plan loads in the Design Options window.
(optional) Edit the Sizing settings using either Percentage or Dimensions.
4 Click OK to load the image in the design window.

Match the Drawing Scale
If the imported floor plan is not the correct size, you can scale it in Architect 3D. This process involves creating a
measurement in Punch! based on a known segment, wall length, or distance in your plan drawing, and then resizing
the plan to match the measurement. To do this, you need to know at least one segment length or distance you can
base your measurement on. Be sure to use the same scale when preparing to trace an upper floor.
Note: If you need the imported image to be larger, the percent you enter will be greater than 100%. Conversely, if you
need the image to be smaller, the percent will be less than 100%.
For information on how to use the Virtual Ruler, see The Virtual Ruler, on page 66.
For more information on how to use the Dimension Tools, see Dimensioning, on page 59.
To match the drawing scale
1 Import a plan image. For more information, see Import a Floor Plan Image, which begins on page
267.
2 Identify a wall section or segment in the plan that has a known length. This is the reference point for
your measurement.
3 Use the Virtual Ruler or one of the Dimension Tools to measure the distance of the wall section or
segment in the plan.
267
Chapter
4 Position the Virtual Ruler or Dimension Tool parallel to the segment and extend it to match the
known length on the image.
Note: It is best to measure along a longer wall to minimize the margin of error when scaling.
5 Click Design menu > Floor Plan Trace Properties and click either the Percentage or Dimensions,
depending on which method you want to use to resize the image.
6 Type values in the Horizontal and Vertical text boxes to equal amounts, to change the scale of the
entire drawing in proportion and click OK.
Continue to adjust the percentage or dimension values until you have matched the scale.
Show/Hide an Imported Floor Plan

There may be times when it is easier to work on your floor plan if the tracing image is not visible. It is easy to toggle the
Floor Plan Trace image on and off.
To control the floor plan trace image visibility
Click Design menu > Show Floor Plan Trace Image. The image is visible when there is a
checkmark next to this menu listing.
OR
Click Design menu > Floor Plan Trace Properties and select or deselect the Image Visible
checkbox, then click OK.
Design Options
The Design Options window provides access to the majority of settings youll need outside of the actual drawing tools.
You can control options like unit of measure, dimension and text fonts, lighting, and many more design options.
Design Options
To access the design options
Click Design menu > Design Options.
269
Chapter
Chapter 20
Control 3D Options
Architect 3D lets you view your design in a fully-rendered 3D view. You can select exterior and interior wall color, add
realistic roof materials and select from a variety of wood textures to make your design completely unique. In the 3D
View window, you can view your design from a variety of angles.
Using Decorator Palettes, you can easily make changes to your decorating theme. This makes it easy to experiment
with a variety of color schemes, both inside and outside your design, before picking up a paintbrush!
With the powerful ClearView feature, you can literally see through the walls and view electrical, plumbing, and so on.
Architect 3D integrates the exclusive, patented RealModel technology, making it easy to construct an actual scale
model of any home you draw. Once you have completed your home design, details are automatically transferred to
RealModel. Instructions on building your home model are printed, with numbered sections and floor plan templates
that make assembling it simple. This hands-on model shows you how to improve your design and save on construction
costs, before you break ground. This is the perfect tool for presenting your ideas to your builder or architect.
Series.
Moving Around in 3D
Architect 3D provides interactive 3D viewing options, including the 3D Walk-Through and Fly-Around views, as well as
an over-head aerial view and a room view, to focus on selected rooms in the design. Using interactive viewing, you can
vary the viewing level by adjusting the altitude and height. Viewing speed and camera angle can also be adjusted to
provide the best viewing capabilities available.
To navigate using walk-through
Using the Walk-Through Tool, you can navigate your design as if you were walking through it. You can navigate
the exterior, walk through rooms, and even adjust the viewing elevation to change floors.
1 Open a 3D View window and click the Walk-Through button.

(alternatively) Click 3D menu > 3D Navigation > Walk-Through to enable walk-through
mode.
2 Position the cursor in the 3D view then click-and-drag in the direction you want to move.
You can adjust the walk-through view in the 2D design window using the Viewpoint icon.
The Viewpoint icon represents the position from which youre viewing the 3D view. Drag the
Viewpoint center point to a new location in the design window to update the 3D view, and
drag the arrow around the center point to rotate the view. You may need to zoom out in the
2D view to find the Viewpoint icon initially.
To adjust your walk-through elevation
The default walk-through elevation is 5-0. You can adjust the walk-through elevation in two ways:
Press the right mouse button down and drag up in the 3D view to raise the viewing elevation; drag
down to lower the elevation.
(alternatively) Click 3D menu > 3D Navigation > Walk-Through Elevation and type a new
elevation measurement, in inches, then click OK.
271
Chapter
20 Control 3D Options
To view your design using Fly-Around

Using the Fly-Around Tool, you can navigate your design as if you were flying around it. You can navigate the
exterior, walk through rooms, and even adjust the viewing elevation to change floors.
1 Open a 3D View window and click the Fly-Around button.

(alternatively) Click 3D menu > 3D Navigation > Fly-Around.
2 Position the cursor in the 3D View window then click-and-drag in the direction you want to
move.
To change Fly-Around altitude with the mouse
Press the right mouse button down to change the viewpoint.
To specify a center of reference in Fly-Around mode
Open a 3D View window and, on the design window, click the center of reference icon
and drag it to a new position.
Note: The placement of the icon will be the point that the helicopter revolves around.
To specify an absolute Fly-Around altitude
1 Click 3D menu > 3D Navigation > Fly-Around Altitude. The Fly-Around Altitude dialog box is
displayed.
2 Type a new elevation measurement, then click OK.

3 Open a 3D View window and navigate, as explained previously.
To see an aerial or birds eye view of your design
1 Open a 3D View window and click the Aerial View button

(alternatively) Click 3D menu > 3D Navigation > Aerial View.
2 Position the cursor in the 3D View window then click-and-drag to pan, or press your arrow
keys to nudge the aerial view.
To rotate your aerial view, press the right mouse button down and drag your mouse.
To change your aerial view elevation
Press and hold your right mouse button to toggle your aerial view elevation.
To see a room view of your design
1 Open a 3D View window so you can see the 2D and 3D views.

2 Click to select the room(s) you want to view. You can use the Selection Tool in the 2D or 3D view.
Moving Around in 3D
Note: You can press SHIFT while clicking to select multiple rooms in 2D.
3 Click the Room View button on the 3D View window. The 2D and 3D views are updated to
focus on the selected room(s).
(alternatively) Click 3D menu > 3D Navigation > Room View. The 2D and 3D views are
updated to focus on the selected room(s).
273
Chapter
4 To navigate, press your left mouse button and drag to pan or press your arrow keys to nudge the
aerial view.
With the right mouse button down, drag your cursor to rotate your aerial view.
To adjust the 3D camera angle
1 Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Rendering Options. The Design Options dialog box opens to the
Navigation & Render Quality settings.
Accessing the 3D Rendering Styles
2 Under the Navigation section, drag the Camera Angle slider to make the view thinner or wider and
then click OK.
To increase or decrease the Fly-Around and Walk-Through speed
1 Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Rendering Options. The Design Options dialog box opens to the
Navigation & Render Quality settings.
2 Under the Navigation section, adjust the Speed slider and then click OK.
Note: The faster the viewing speed, the lower the quality of the rendered 3D image.
Accessing the 3D Rendering Styles

With Architect 3Ds five 3D rendering options you can view your design in a variety of ways.
Framing Rendering style displays your design to show the studs, rafters, and other framing components.
To make framing changes, see Framing Plan Tab, which begins on page 245.
Colored Wireframe displays your design on a white background. Each feature of your floor plan is
rendered in the color of the plan tab where it is drawn. For example, walls are displayed in the color you
have defined for the Floor Plan tab.
Textured Wireframe also displays your design on a white background. Each feature of your floor plan is
rendered in the color of the material you have applied to it.
275
Chapter
ClearView may reveal potential conflicts hidden by walls, for example, between utilities.
To control the opacity of a ClearView rendering, click Design menu > Options and under 3D Preferences, click
General. The settings are displayed in the right pane. Drag the Clearview Opacity slider to adjust its appearance.
Shaded Textured Rendering must be enabled for these styles to be available.
Adjusting Rendering Quality
To view a 3D rendering style
1 Click 3D menu > Rendering Mode > 3D Rendering and then

open a 3D View window.
2 In 3D View window, click the Render Style button, then choose

the rendering style you want.
(alternatively) Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Rendering
Style and choose the style you want.
Adjusting Rendering Quality

Architect 3D technology includes anti-aliased, photo-realism. With this technology, you can view your plan with
incredible detail, whether you are in ClearView, viewing materials, viewing framing, or using another render style.
To render a 3D preview
Open a 3D View window and click the Render Preview button in the 3D View window.
To render a plan in 3D final quality
Open a 3D View window and click 3D Menu > 3D Rendering > Render Final Quality.
To set 3D render quality
Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Final Quality Options and choose one of the options.
Note: You can stop the rendering process at any time by pressing ESC.
277
Chapter
Low results in a fast rendering speed, but lower quality output.

High results in a moderate rendering speed and average quality output.
Ultra High results in a slower rendering speed and a high quality output.
Excellent results in a very slow rendering speed, but a very high quality, sharp output.
Accessing the Photo-Realistic Rendering Styles

There are six Photo-realistic rendering styles available. To access the Photo-Realistic rendering styles, be sure PhotoRealistic Rendering mode is activated.
Series.
Shaded Textured the shaded style renders the drawing according to the materials that are currently
applied.
Hatch the hatch style produces an effect similar to a shaded pencil drawing. The image is made up of a
series of pencil strokes all in a similar orientation. All of the strokes are to provide shading- no lines are
drawn.
Mosaic the mosaic style has the effect of rendering as though the design were constructed as a mosaic of
small colored tiles.
Accessing the Photo-Realistic Rendering Styles
Oil Painting the oil painting style creates an effect reminiscent of some impressionist painters, with
individual blobs of paint of a single color applied across the canvas (which could be brush or palette-knife
strokes). The overall image only resolves itself if you view from far enough away.
Contour creates the effect where strokes and swirls of color reflect and represent the orientation of the
underlying geometry. The effect may also resemble using colored pencils to shade the image (with the
direction of the pencil strokes matching the underlying geometry at all times).
Stipple the stipple style renders as a series of irregular dots, or stipples. The effect is similar to how
photographs are reproduced in newsprint, only more pronounced.
279
Chapter
To view a 3D photo-realistic rendering style
1 Click 3D menu > Rendering Mode > Photo-Realistic Rendering

and then open a 3D View window.
2 In 3D View window, click the Render Style button, then choose

the rendering style you want.
(alternatively) Click 3D menu > Photo-Realistic Rendering >
Rendering Style and choose the style you want.
Adjusting Photo-Realistic Rendering Quality

The photo-realistic styles that are available can be applied using one of the two render options: preview or final.
Rendering in photo-realistic quality also applies any effects you may have selected for your design.
To render a Photo-Realistic preview
Open a 3D View window and click the Render Preview button. This option renders a
lower-quality, faster preview of the design.
(alternatively) Click 3D menu > Photo-Realistic Rendering > Render Preview.
To render in Photo-Realistic final quality
Open a 3D View window and then click 3D menu > Photo-Realistic Rendering > Render Final.
Setting Rendering Options
Setting Rendering Options

With Architect 3D you can customize the render quality of many of the customized features you use. By setting these
features to a lower render quality, you can speed up the rendering time.
To set the render options
1 Open a 3D View window and click the Navigation and Rendering Options button on the
3D View window. The Design Options dialog box opens to the Navigation & Render Quality
settings
(alternatively) Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Render Options.
2 Drag the sliders to set the rendering quality for each feature you want to change and then click OK.
Note: The lower the render quality is set, the faster 3D View will render your design.
281
Chapter
Setting Photo-Realistic Rendering Effects

With Architect 3D you can apply outdoor effects to simulate fog and snow. These options are available from the Design
Option window and are visible after rendering your 3D photo-realistic view.
To add a fog effect to the exterior view
1 Open a 3D View window and click Design menu > Options. The Design Options dialog box is
displayed.
2 Under 3D Preferences, click Photo Rendering Effects. The options are displayed in the right pane.
3 Click the Effect drop-down menu and choose Fog or Ground Fog. The fog effect options are
displayed.
Fog Density slider adjusts how sparse or

dense the fog is displayed.
Fog Color preview opens the Color
window and allows you to select a color
for the fog.
Fog Distance controls how far the fog
extends.
Fog Height control how high from the
ground the fog extends (only applies to
Ground Fog).
Select or deselect Use transparent
shadows to enable or disable this option.
Select to deselect Use enhanced antialiasing to enable or disable this option.
Click OK. To see the effect, render the
drawing.
To add a snow effect to the exterior view
1 Open a 3D View window and click Design menu > Options. The Design Options dialog box is
displayed.
3 Click the Effect drop-down menu and choose Snow. The snow effect options are displayed.
Depth of Field Focus
Flake Density slider to adjust how

sparse or dense the snow flakes are
displayed.
Flake Color preview opens the Color
window and allows you to select a color
for the flakes.
Flake Near Scale determines the size of
the closer flakes in the view.
Flake Far Scale to determines the size
of the further flakes in the view.
Select or deselect Use transparent
shadows to enable or disable this
option.
Select or deselect Use enhanced antialiasing to enable or disable this option.
Click OK. To see the effect, render the drawing.
Depth of Field Focus

When Photo-Realistic rendering is
enabled, you can adjust the depth of
field focus settings to control the focus
distance and how the non-focal space
is displayed in your 3D view. The
depth of field settings include a focus
distance, viewing angle width, and the
amount of blur.
The Focus Distance is the distance
from the viewpoint to the point of
focus in your drawing. You can
measure this distance using the
Virtual Ruler (The Virtual Ruler, on
page 66) or one of the Dimensioning
tools (Dimensioning, on page 59).
The Angle of View setting determines
how narrow or wide the blur factor
appears at the specified focus distance. The wider the setting, the more blur affects the scene.
The Blur Factor setting controls how blurry the areas outside the focus distance appear.
In this example, Depth of Field is disabled. You can clearly see the foreground objects and the house in the background.
283
Chapter
Depth of Field enabled with medium Blur Factor
Depth of Field enabled with high Blur Factor
The focus is on the table in the foreground, which is very clear while the background is blurred.
To enable depth of field
1 Click 3D menu > Rendering Mode > Photo-Realistic Rendering and open a 3D View window.
2 Click Design menu > Options. The Design Options dialog box is displayed.
4 Under the Camera Effects section, select the Enable depth of field focus and blur checkbox. The
depth of field settings become enabled.
Angle of View slider controls how

narrow or wide the amount of space the
blur occupies.
Blur Factor slider controls the amount
of blur outside of the specified focus
distance area.
Focus Distance text box defines the
distance from the current viewpoint to
the desired focus point.
Ignore Background checkbox controls
whether the background image is
rendered with the design. To include
the background when rendering with
depth of field enabled, deselect the
Ignore Background checkbox; to
exclude, select the checkbox.
Click OK.
Rendering 3D Effects
The 3D Effects tab contains reflection and displacement effects, which can be applied to objects and surfaces in 3D.
Rendering 3D Effects
You can see the effects using 3D Rendering when they are applied to surfaces such as floors, decks, and stairs, also
flat surfaces on 3D objects. 3D Effects can also be rendered using the Photo-Realistic Rendering option.
Series.
To render 3D effects
1 Click the Libraries tab and choose 3D Effects from the Libraries drop-down menu. The 3D Effects
2 Click the Categories drop-down menu and choose Displacement or Reflectivity. Its contents are
3 Scroll through the options and drag and drop the effect you want onto the surface, in 3D.
4 Render the image to see the effect.
To remove a 3D effect
1 Click the Libraries tab and choose 3D Effects from the Libraries drop-down menu. The 3D Effects
2 Click the Categories drop-down menu and choose Displacement or Reflectivity. Its contents are
3 Drag and drop the first option onto the surface in 3D.
285
Chapter

With Architect 3D, you can customize the lighting and
shadows. You can virtually see how that big oak tree casts
shadows into your living room window.
To adjust lighting settings
1 Open a 3D View window and click the 3D

Lighting button on the toolbar. The Design Options dialog box opens to the Lighting
settings
(alternatively) Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Lighting > Lighting.
2 Edit the settings as needed and then click OK.
Sunlight On checkbox enables all of the sunlight

settings in the 3D when selected; the sunlight
settings are ignored when deselected.
Direction slider controls the direction from which
the sun shines. Drag the slide to position the sun
around the plan.
Angle slider controls the suns angle in the sky.
Drag the slider to adjust the angle from which the
sun shines.
Brightness slider increases or decreases the suns
brightness. Drag to adjust the brightness as
needed.
Sun Shadow settings are disabled when Optimal
Quality is selected. To edit the settings, deselect
the Optimal Quality checkbox and drag the slider to
change the suns shadow quality. (A lower shadow
quality speeds up rendering times, while a higher
quality slows down rendering times.)
Adjust Background Brightness checkbox
controls if the background image is affected by the
Sunlight or Ambient Light settings. When selected,
lighting settings affect the background as well; when deselected the background is not updated when
lighting settings are changed.
Ambient Light is controlled by the Intensity and Brightness settings. Drag the sliders to increase or
decrease the settings.
To adjust lighting to daytime
1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously.

2 Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Lighting > Adjust Lighting to DayTime. All of the light fixtures
are turned off, and your design is displayed as if it is daytime.
To adjust lighting to nighttime
Photo-Realistic Scene Lighting
2 Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Lighting > Adjust Lighting to NightTime. All of the light fixtures
are turned on, and your design is displayed as if it is nighttime.
To turn all light fixtures on

2 Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Lighting > All Light Fixtures ON. All of the light fixtures in your
design turn on.
To turn all light fixtures off

2 Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Lighting > All Light Fixtures OFF. All of the light fixtures in your
design turn off.
To render shadows to a 3D view

2 Click 3D menu > 3D Rendering > Preview 3D Shadows.
Note: Shadows are also rendered when the Render Final Quality selection is clicked.
Photo-Realistic Scene Lighting

The Photo-Realistic Rendering mode offers various scene lighting options for controlling the amount of light in a
rendered 3D view. When fully enabled, the extra scene lighting offers a bright, well-lit rendering. You can adjust the
extra scene lighting by choosing its sources, or disable it altogether, which limits the light in a space to only the
surface(s) in its direct path.
Additionally, sunlight is rendered using a white color by default. In Photo-Realistic Rendering mode, you can change
the color of sunlight.
To use extra scene lighting
1 Click 3D menu > Rendering Mode > Photo-Realistic Rendering.

2 Open a 3D View and click the Lighting button in the toolbar. The Design Options dialog
box opens to the Lighting settings.
(alternatively) Click 3D menu > Photo-Realistic Rendering > Lighting > Lighting.
3 Under Photo Scene Lighting, select the Use extra scene lighting checkbox.
Source drop-down menu defines the source(s) of

the extra scene lighting.
Ambient provides extra intensity in the scene
produced by light fixtures.
Eye provides extra lighting that is generated from
the viewing position and sent towards the scene.
Both includes Ambient and Eye.
Intensity slider controls how dim or bright the
lighting effect is displayed.
Sunlight Color preview opens the Color window
and allows you to select a color for the sunlight.
Click OK.
To see the photo-realistic settings, render the 3D
view using one of the Photo-Realistic Render options.
For more information, see Accessing the PhotoRealistic Rendering Styles, which begins on page
278.
287
Chapter
Drawing Animation Paths

Animations allow you to define a path in 2D along which you can walk-through your design in 3D. After you place your
animation path, or paths, you will be able to view your design in an automated walk-through fashion, like a movie.
You can customize the animation path by adjusting the 3D view for each segment in the path, and also define different
3D render styles for each segment if youd like to. This way, the animated walk-through shows exactly what you want
to see.
Once placed, you should set the 3D view and render style for each segment so the animation shows exactly what you
want to see.
For more information, see To change a segments viewing position, which begins on page 288.
For more information, see To change a segments 3D render style, which begins on page 289.
To draw animation paths
1 On the Edit toolbar, click the Animation Path Tool.

the path.
3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the path and then right-click to place.
To remove points from an Animation Path
1 From the Edit toolset, click the Delete Point Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing
mode.
2 Move your cursor along the animation to find the point you want to remove and click to
remove the point.
3 Continue deleting points until you are finished, then right-click to end.
To change a segments viewing position
1 Open a 3D view window.

2 Right-click the segment you want to update and choose Update 3D From Animation Segment
from the context menu. The 3D view updates to position itself at that segment.
3 Adjust the 3D view so it is positioned in the direction you want to face while viewing the animation.
You can use the Viewpoint icon in the 2D design window or the Walk-Through Tool in the 3D View
window. The animation path is updated based on the view(s) youve set.
(optional) To preview a segment on the path, select the segment and click 3D menu > Animations
> Preview Selected.
Previewing and Exporting Animations Paths
To change a segments 3D render style

2 Right-click the segment you want to update and choose Update 3D From Animation Segment
from the context menu. The 3D view updates to position itself at that segment.
3 Choose the render style you want for the selected segment. The animation path is updated based
on the render style(s) youve set.
For more information, see Accessing the 3D Rendering Styles, which begins on page 275.
Repeat this process for each segment that you to use a specific render style.
Previewing and Exporting Animations Paths

You can preview your animation path (or paths) to help adjust your 3D views and to see the animation before you
export a video file. There are three ways to preview your animation paths:
Individual segment on an animation path
One full animation path
All animation paths in the drawing

To preview the entire animation

2 Click 3D menu > Animations > Preview All. A preview of all of the animation segments is
displayed in the 3D view window.
Note: To stop the preview, press the ESC key.

To preview animation paths Segments

2 Click to select the segment(s) you want to view.
To view just one individual segment, click to select the end point at the start of the segment.
Note: Hold down SHIFT and click several animation segments to select them.
3 Click 3D menu > Animations > Preview Selected. A preview of the selected animation segment(s)
is displayed in the 3D view window.
Note: To stop the preview, press ESC.

To reverse an animation path
On the design window, right-click the segment a you want to reverse and choose Reverse
Animation Path. The animation path is reversed.
To export animation
1 Click File menu > Export > Animation. The Animation Export Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 Specify the export settings you want.
289
Chapter
Video Size slider defines the size of the

exported video. As you drag the slider, a
preview is displayed.
Video Quality slider allows you to define a
Quick, High Quality, or Ultra-High video.
Render Shadows On Export checkbox
enables shadows in the exported video
when selected; shadows are excluded
when deselected.
Play After Export checkbox opens the
exported video after the file is saved.
Fade Color allows you to define the color
of the fade effect.
Click OK. The Export Animation Video dialog box is displayed.
4 Browse to the folder where you want the video to be exported and type a new file name. Architect 3D
automatically adds the extension.
5 Click Save. The video file is exported to the location youve specified.
To play the animated path, navigate to the file location and open the file. The AVI file opens in your
default media player.
Animation Path Properties

Animation path properties are available to control the display of the path in the design window as well as the playback
behavior. You can edit the animation path properties before or after you draw.
Segment Length defines the playback length for each segment in the path.
Display checkboxes control the options that are displayed in the 2D design
window. Selected options are displayed; deselected options are hidden. By
default, paths display their elevation, segment time, view angle, and path name.
Fade checkboxes allow you to specify a fade effect at the beginning, end, or both
for your path(s). This is especially helpful when youve defined more than one
animation path in your drawing because the transitions between the paths
appear smoother.
Note: You can customize the fade color during export.
Preview Speed slider increases or decreases the preview playback speed.
Naming and Prioritizing Animation Paths

Its easy to set the exact order of multiple Animation Paths. Adding descriptive names
to each path will make it easier to set their order in the final video.
To name an animation path
1 On the design window, right-click the segment you want to rename and choose Animation Path
Name. The Animation Path Name dialog box is displayed.
Using the Decorator Palette
2 Type the name for the path and click OK.

To set the order of animation paths
1 Click 3D menu > Animations > Change Path Order. The Animation Paths dialog box is displayed.
2 Click to select a path name in the Active section.

3 Click the Order arrows to change the order of the animation paths.
(optional) Click the arrows between the Active and Inactive menus to suppress export of specified
animation paths.
4 Click OK. The animation paths are reordered.

Punch! Decorator Palette allows you to construct lists of commonly-used colors and materials so
they can be easily used throughout your design. Each palette is divided into as many as 15 groups,
allowing you to assign each group to a room or other segment of your design.
You simply load the Decorator Palette with the colors and materials you want to apply to your 3D
view, then save the palette for use in later sessions. Decorator Palettes can even be exported and
imported for use in different drawings.
To build a palette
1 Click 3D menu > Decorating Options > Decorator Palette Visible. The default palette is
displayed.
291
Chapter
2 Drag-and-drop a color or material onto a blank palette tile.

Applying colors and materials from palette
Drag-and-drag the color or material you want from the palette tile to an area of your design. Your
selection is displayed in 3D View.
To clear a palette entry
1 Right-click the entry you want to delete and choose Clear Palette Entry.
2 Click Yes at the prompt to remove the entry.
Identifying Colors and Materials from the Decorator Palette

When youre working with a lot of different colors and materials, it can become difficult to remember the library where
each appears. You can find a color or materials original library with just a few simple clicks.
To select a color or paint
Right-click the color or paint in the palette and click Select Color/Paint from the context menu. Its
original library is displayed on the Preview Bar, with the color or paint selected.
To select a material
Right-click the material in the palette and click Select Material from the context menu. Its original
library is displayed on the Preview Bar, with the material selected.
Managing Decorator Palette Groups

You can organize the colors and materials of each room by assigning groups. Decorator Palette provides you with 15
blank group labels.
To create a group
1 Select a material or color you want to add to the palette and then drag-and-drop the color or material
onto a blank palette tile. Repeat with additional materials or colors, as desired.
2 Once you have all the materials and colors you want, click the Group 1 label, then choose Rename
Section on the drop-down menu. The Palette Section Name dialog box is displayed.
Managing Decorator Palettes
3 Type a name for the group in the Palette Section Name text box and click OK. The name you
entered is displayed in the group label.
To collapse a group
Click the group label and choose Collapse Section. The group collapses and displays only its
assigned name.
(optional) Click the minus box on the group label.
To expand a group
Click the group label and choose Expand Section. The group expands and displays your entries.
(optional) Click the plus box on the group label.
To expand all groups
Click the group label and choose Expand All. All of your groups expand and display your entries.
To collapse all groups
Click the group label and choose Collapse All. All of your groups collapse and display only their
assigned names.
Managing Decorator Palettes

Your Decorator Palettes are saved separately from the rest of your design. That means you can use the same palette
in different drawings, different sessions, or even share palettes with colleagues.
To save a custom palette
1 Click the palette drop-down menu and choose Add Copy of Current Palette. The Palette Name
2 Specify your palette by typing a name in the Palette Name text box and click OK. Your palette is
saved and the name of your palette is displayed.
To import a custom palette
1 Click the palette drop-down menu and choose Import Palette. The Open dialog box is displayed.
2 Click the palette you want to import and click Open. The Palette Name dialog box is displayed.
3 Type a new Palette Name if you want to, then click OK. The palette is displayed.
To export a palette
1 Click the palette drop-down menu bar and choose Export Palette. The Save As box is displayed.
2 To select a different drive or folder, click a different drive and folder, or type the complete path in the
File Name text box. Click Save.
Organizing Decorator Palettes

Using the Palettes Organizer you can prioritize and rename your palettes. You can also delete any palettes you do not
want to keep, however at least one palette must remain.
293
Chapter
To access the Palettes Organizer
Click the palette menu and choose Organize Palettes. The Palettes dialog box is displayed with the
names of each of your palettes.
To control palette order
1 Open the Palettes Organizer and click to select the palette you want to reorder.
2 Click the arrow button that corresponds to the direction you want to move the palette. The
palette is reordered.
3 Close the Palettes Organizer.

To rename a palette
1 Open the Palettes Organizer and click to select the palette you want to rename. The Palette Name
2 Type the new name in the Palette Name field and then click OK. The palette is renamed.
To delete a palette
1 Open the Palettes Organizer and click to select the palette you want to delete. A confirmation dialog
box is displayed.
Note: At least one palette must exist.

2 Click Yes to delete the palette. The palette is deleted.
Customizing the 3D View

There may be times when you will need to see your design without specific features or objects. With Architect 3D you
have complete control over what parts of your design are visible.
Saving a 3D View
To hide/view specific features in 3D

2 Click Design menu > Options. The Design Options dialog box is displayed.
3 Under 3D Preferences, click Visible 3D Elements. The options are displayed in the right pane.
4 Click to select the features you want to show or deselect the features that you want to hide and then
click OK.
Saving a 3D View
You can save pre-set 3D views that can be easily accessed at any time. The Saved 3D Views menu option is available
from the 3D menu. Here, you can save a 3D view and access your saved views. When you save a view, the render
style is also saved with the view.
Additionally, you can update a saved view and organize views to rename or delete them.
To save a 3D View
1 Using the 3D navigation tools, set the 3D View window with the direction, angle, and render style
that you want to save.
2 Click 3D menu > Saved 3D Views > Save 3D View. The View Name dialog box is displayed.
295
Chapter
3 Type a name for the view in the View Name field and click OK.
To access a saved view
Click 3D menu > Saved 3D Views and then click the view description on the submenu. The 3D
View window displays the selected view.
To update a saved view
1 Open the 3D view you want to edit.

2 Reposition the 3D view as desired and then click 3D menu > Saved 3D Views > Update.
Organizing Saved 3D Views

Using the 3D Views Organizer you can prioritize, rename, and deleted your saved 3D views.
To access the 3D Views Organizer
Click 3D menu > Saved 3D Views > Organize 3D Views. The 3D Views organizer is displayed.
To control saved 3D view order
1 Open the 3D Views Organizer and click to select the view you want to reorder.
2 Click the arrow button that corresponds to the direction you want to move the view. The view is
reordered.
3 Close the 3D Views Organizer.

To rename a saved 3D view
1 Open the 3D Views Organizer and click to select the view you want to rename.
2 Click the Rename View button. The View Name dialog box is displayed.
3 Type the new name in the View Name field and then click OK. The view is renamed.
Preparing to Construct a RealModel

To delete a saved 3D view
1 Open the 3D Views Organizer and click to select the view you want to delete.
2 Click the Delete View button. A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
3 Click Yes to delete the view. The view is deleted.
Preparing to Construct a RealModel

When constructing a RealModel, youll need to get a few supplies together first. Visit your local craft supply or hobby
store to purchase these materials.
Items youll need to construct a RealModel:
Construction material foam board or poster board
Adhesive spray adhesive, rubber cement, glue stick, or similar product
Tape
Straight pins
Straight-edge ruler
Artists knife or scalpel
297
Chapter
To open the RealModel view
Click the RealModel View button from the 3D View drop-down menu. The design is
displayed in RealModel view.
(alternatively) Click 3D menu > RealModel > Show RealModel.
Defining Scale
The scale you choose will define the actual size of your model. All model templates will print in this scale. For example,
if you choose 1/2"=1' - a ten-foot wall will print as a five-inch template.
To select RealModel scale
1 Show the RealModel view.

2 Click 3D menu > RealModel > Model Scale. The Scale dialog box is displayed.
3 Click to select the scale you want then click OK.
Printing RealModel Templates

The templates are used to guide you, as you build your
RealModel. They will specify which wall section is attached to
other walls and where doors and windows are placed. Floor
templates show where each wall is placed. You have the
choice of printing all of the wall and roof templates, as well as
the template of each floor at one time or printing each
element individually.
To edit print settings, see Printing Floor Plans, on page 56.
To print RealModel templates
1 Open the RealModel view.

2 Click 3D menu > RealModel and then choose the
template you want to print.
Print All Wall Templates- Prints all of the walls in

the design.
Print All Roof Templates- Prints all of the roofs
in the design.
Print Floor Template- Choose the floor you want
to print from the submenu.
Constructing Wall Templates
Print Template- To print an individual template from your design, type the template number you want to
print from the RealModel view, then click Print.
The Print dialog box is displayed.
3 Confirm your default printer selection, then click Print.
Constructing Wall Templates

You will notice that some wall templates will have darker, shaded edges. These shaded areas indicate the thickness of
your construction material. Use these as guidelines on where to attach adjoining walls. The directions for connecting
the walls will be printed on each page. Be sure to transfer this information to the template, before cutting it out.
To construct a wall template
1 Attach each wall template to your construction material, using a permanent adhesive.
2 Cut out each wall section to the exact size of the template. Be sure to include shaded areas.
3 Attach each template to its appropriate counterpart.
Constructing Roof Templates

Although your roof templates may print attached at points, cut out each roof section separately from your construction
material to the exact size of the template.
To construct a roof template
1 Attach each roof template to your construction material, using a permanent adhesive.
2 Cut out each roof section to the exact size of the template.
3 Attach each roof template to its appropriate counterpart.
4 Secure the roof to the walls.
Printing Template Materials and Colors

To add a realistic look to your RealModel, you can print sheets of materials and colors to be applied to your model and
trimmed to size. With this process, you can see what your design will look like. Follow these steps for every wall and
roof on your model.
Note: It is best to print and assemble the material and color on each wall, before moving on to the next wall. If you
choose not to do this, you should label each material template and color, as they are printed, to make identifying them
easier, when attaching them to your model.
To print template materials and colors
1 Open the RealModel view. Decide which material you want to print first.
2 Click 3D menu > RealModel > Print Template Materials and Colors. The Print Template Textures
& Colors dialog box is displayed.
299
Chapter
3 Type the template number of the material and color you want to print, then click Print. The Print
4 Confirm your printer settings, then click Print.
Attaching Template Materials and Colors to Your Model

Once the materials and colors have been printed, you will need to affix them to the appropriate template and trim them
to size. It is best to use spray adhesive, glue stick, or tape for this step, as using white glue may cause the paper to
wrinkle.
To attach the template materials and colors
1 Affix the material to the proper wall template, which has already been attached to the construction
material.
2 Carefully trim around the outside edges of the wall template.

3 Cut out the door and window openings.
4 Attach each template to its appropriate counterpart.
Part 4
Design & Drawing

PowerTools
Chapter 21:
Chapter 22:
Chapter 23:
Chapter 24:
Chapter 25:
Chapter 26:
Chapter 27:
Door Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Window Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ceiling Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fireplace Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mantel Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pool Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fence Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
303
311
317
329
339
347
371
Chapter 21
Door Designer
Whether youre drawing custom grillwork or simply designing a door for a unique space, Punch! Door Designer lets
you create custom doors that render like any other door in Architect 3D. Once placed in your design, you can edit
doors created with Door Designer just like the other doors in your custom library.
Series.
Designing Custom Doors

With Door Designer you can create custom doors by using unlimited combinations of the three door components.
Door Casing is the trim that surrounds the door opening. You can draw a simple rectangular opening or you can
combine shapes to create a more ornate door casing.
Door Panels are added to your design by drawing 2D shapes within the confines of the casing. By varying the
thickness of the panels, you can create raised panels to define the door.
Grills add elegance to your door design after you have added the casing and panels. As you draw, you can set the
width of the grills on the Properties Bar. If you want your door design to include glass, simply leave those areas empty.
303
Chapter
21 Door Designer
Launching Door Designer
1 Click Design menu > Launch PowerTool. The PowerTool Launcher is displayed.
2 Click to select Door Designer and click the Launch button. The Door Designer is launched.
Drawing Door Components

You can modify an existing custom door design or draw your own custom doors from scratch. As you draw each
component, Punch! displays your door design in 3D. Door Designer has three component drawing modes that let you
design doors from the outside to the inside.
Casing Start by drawing the trim to surround your

custom door. The Casing tab includes tools for
drawing the trim casing.
Panels Next, draw the wood panels that comprise the

visible body of your door. The tools on the Panels tab
are designed to provide flexibility as you draw.
Grills Finally, add detailed grillwork to aesthetically

define windows in a door. If you want your door design
to include only glass, simply leave those areas empty.
Each of the three component drawing modes features an

assortment of 2D drawing tools. The geometry of all three modes is drawn the same. For best results, use these tools
in conjunction with Snaps and editing tools to reshape door elementsminimizing repetition and increasing accuracy.
For more information about using editing tools, see Editing Your Door Design, on page 305.
For more information on using drawing tools, see Detail Plan Tab, on page 233.
Tip: When drawing multiple instances of a door component, be sure to turn Auto Reset off. On the 2D menu, click to
uncheck Auto Reset Tools. When Auto Reset Tools is unchecked, you can draw concurrent door components without
selecting the corresponding door tool each time.
Door Component Properties

The casing, panel, and grill door component properties are displayed when the component is selected in the design
window. You can affect the properties of more than one component by holding the SHIFT key as you click to select
multiple components.
Edit Level Select Object to resize the whole object or Points to edit individual points on
the shape. For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which begins on page
241.
Curve options control curvature. For more information, see Changing Curve Tension,
Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the displays of dimensions in 2D. When selected,

dimensions are displayed.
Bring to Front button moves the selection to the top layer while Send to Back button
moves the selection to the bottom layer.
(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Bring To Front or Send to Back.
Type settings specify the component type.
Thickness defines the thickness of the polylines in the shape (applies to panel and grill
components only).
Open & Closed options specify if the shape is open-ended or contained.
Editing Your Door Design
Editing Your Door Design

Rather than draw each geometric feature of your door casing, panel, or grill separately, use Door Designers editing
tools to reshape, reposition, re-orient, or even join existing door elements. You can manipulate shapes to match your
custom design by inserting or removing points, and rounding or chamfering corners. Join tools allow you to join lines,
arcs, and polylines into a single entity for editing purposes.
For more information on flipping and mirroring objects, see Flipping & Mirroring Elements, on page 305.
The following options are available for editing your door design:
Selection Tool (For more information, see Moving a Selection, on page 256 and Reshaping and Resizing
2D Objects, on page 51).
Rotate Tool (For more information, see Rotating a Selection, which begins on page 257.)
Resize Segment Tool (For more information, see Changing Segment Length, which begins on page 120.)
Add Point Tool (For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which begins on page 241.)
Remove Point Tool (For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which begins on page 241.)
Fillet Tool (For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which begins on page 241.)
Inverted Fillet Tool (For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which begins on page 241.)
Chamfer Tool (For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which begins on page 241.)
To select the next door element
On the Standard Toolbar, click the Select Next Object Tool. Door Designer selects the
objects in the order you placed them.
To select the previous door element
On the Standard Toolbar, click the Select Previous Object Tool. Door Designer selects
the objects in reverse order.
To join arcs, lines or polylines
1 Click the Selection Tool, then hold down SHIFT and click to select each element that you
want to be joined.
Note: The end points of each element must be nearby for those elements to be joined.
You can increase or decrease the necessary distance by changing the Join Sensitivity, see
Controlling Drawing Settings.
2 On the Standard toolbar, click the Join Tool. The objects are joined into a polyline.
Note: You can separate the segments of any polyline (whether or not you created it using
the Join Tool) by selecting the polyline and clicking the Unjoin Tool on the Standard toolbar.
Flipping & Mirroring Elements

The Flip function takes the original component and reverses it either horizontally or vertically. Mirror works similarly to
the Flip function. The difference is that mirror leaves the original and makes a duplicate. Mirror creates two identical
components facing one another.
For more information, see Flip and Mirror, which begins on page 257.
305
Chapter
21 Door Designer
Controlling Drawing Settings

There are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you draw, select, or modify door elements. The Properties Bar
lets you modify a variety of settings, including the number of sides on a multigon or the size of your workspace.
Note: Be sure to press ENTER to accept new values in text boxes.
Workspace Boundary defines the size of the drawing space. Type new values in the
Width and Height text boxes.
If you have already drawn objects in the design window, select Scale Objects to resize
them accordingly.
Grid Options control the grid settings. For more information, see Using the Grid, which
begins on page 52.
Nudge Rate defines the distance a selection moves when nudged using the arrow keys.
Type a new value in the text box to change it.
Join Sensitivity defines how close elements must be in proximity to another element
when joining them. A lower value means that you must position elements closer to join
them.
Drawing Precision specifies Inches or Feet-Inches as the unit of measurement.
Tracking Constraints setting control if the angle of a segment being drawn is

constrained to a 5-degree increments or to the roof pitch value. When Constrain to Roof
Pitch is selected, polygons and lines at the top of the door design automatically constrain
to the roof pitch in your home design
Replace Existing checkbox controls if door styles that are added from the Preview bar
replace the existing components in the design window. When selected, components are replaced when door
styles are applied; when deselected multiple styles are applied to the design window.
Scale To Workspace checkbox controls if door styles that are added from the Preview bar match the workspace
size. When selected, styles are automatically scaled to match the workspace size; when deselected the default
door style is retained.
Save Door To Library For more information, see Managing Door Designs, which begins on page 307.
Using Snaps to Draw Components

Architect 3D includes the power of snaps. With snaps, you can define exactly what distance door elements are placed
from other door elements. You can TAB through the Snaps Toolbar. Each time you press TAB, the next Snap Tool is
activated, SHIFT+TAB reverses the process.
Note: Each Snap Tool defaults back to No Snap after it is used; double-clicking the Snap Tool will lock it in active
mode.
Below is a description of the snap tools, from the top of the toolbar to the bottom.
No Snap Deactivates an active snap tool.
Snap to End Point The shape snaps to the nearest end point.
Snap to Segment Center The shape snaps to the nearest segment center point.
Snap to Object Center The shape snaps to the center point of the component.
Snap to Object Corner point The shape snaps to the corner point of the component.
Snap to Intersection The shape snaps to the nearest intersection point.
Viewing your Drawing in 3D
Snap to Perpendicular The shape snaps to the nearest segment to draw perpendicular from the segment.
Snap to Segment-Offset The shape snaps to a point based on an offset distance you specify before drawing
the shape.
Snap to On-Segment The shape snaps to the nearest component segment.
Viewing your Drawing in 3D

Door Designer displays your door design in 3D in the upper right
corner of the Door Designer screen. You control the 3D view in the
same way you control a 3D View rendering using Fly-Around
mode.
To view your door in 3D
Drag in the 3D view to navigate in fly-around mode. The

view is updated dynamically.
To increase or decrease the Fly-Around speed
Click 3D menu > Helicopter Speed and then select a

speed setting from the submenu. The faster the viewing
speed, the lower the quality of the rendered 3D image.
To reset the 3D view
Click 3D menu > Reset 3D View.
To view a window design using ClearView
Click 3D menu > Render ClearView.
To render a window design in 3D final quality
Click 3D menu > Render 3D Final Quality.
To automatically render a window design in 3D final quality
Click 3D menu > Auto Final Render.
Click 3D menu > 3D Final Quality and choose the render quality you want from the submenu.

Managing Door Designs

Door Designer not only allows you to save new doors for use in your Punch! drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools for
organizing and managing door libraries.
307
Chapter
21 Door Designer
To import an existing door design
1 On the Properties Bar, click the Doors drop-down, then select a Door library. The Preview Bar
changes to display doors in this library.
(optional) On the Properties Bar, select the Replace Existing checkbox, to remove existing door
designs from the design window as you import from the library. When this checkbox is unchecked,
imported designs are placed on top of existing designs.
(optional) On the Properties Bar, select the Scale to Workspace checkbox to automatically resize
the door design to the current workspace size as you import from the library.
2 Click a door design on the Preview Bar and drag it into the design window.
To save a new door design
1 Click the Save Door to Library button on the Properties Bar. The Save Door to Category dialog box
is displayed.
(alternatively) Click File menu > Save Door to Library.
2 In the Door Category section, click to choose the door category.
(optional) Click New to create a new door category. Select a folder in which to create the new
category, then type a name for the new category and click OK.
3 Type a name for the new door in the Door Name text box. New door names can contain up to 44
characters.
4 Type a description of the new door in the Door Description text box. New door descriptions can
contain up to 78 characters.
5 Click OK.
Placing Custom Doors In Your Punch! Drawing

Once youve designed a custom door, you can place it in your Punch! design as you would any other door, making
sure to select the custom door library before you place the door. In the 2D design window, custom doors are displayed
the same as standard doors, but they are fully rendered in 3D View.
To add a custom door
1 On the Floor plan toolbar, click the Door Tool. The Door Properties are displayed on the
Properties tab.
2 Click the Door Style button, then click the Custom Door style at the bottom of the
list. The Door Preview Bar is displayed
Placing Custom Doors In Your Punch! Drawing
3 Click the arrow next to Doors at

the top of the Preview Bar to
display the door library list, then
click a library. Its contents are
4 Click a door in the Preview Bar to

select it.
5 On the Design window, click a

wall where you want to place a
door.
6 (optional) Click to set the door swing, if necessary.
7 (optional) Type the Width, Height, Elevation, and Trim Width to customize them.
Note: Any changes made on the Door Properties Bar, become the default and will be used the next time a door is
placed.
309
Chapter
21 Door Designer
Chapter 22
Window Designer
Window Designer lets you create custom windows and detail custom window shapes that render like any other window
in Architect 3D. Once placed in your design, you can edit windows created with Window Designer just like the other
custom windows in your library.
Series.
Designing Custom Windows

With Punch! Window Designer, you can create custom windows by using an unlimited combination of the three window
components.
Window Casing is the trim that surrounds the window opening. You can draw a simple rectangular opening or you can
combine shapes to create a more ornate window casing.
Window Sills are added to your design by drawing 2D shapes within the confines of the casing.
Grills add elegance to your window design, after you have added the casing and sills. As you draw, you can set the
width of the grills on the Properties Bar. Wherever you want your window design to include glass, simply leave those
areas empty.
311
Chapter
22 Window Designer
Launching Window Designer
2 Click to select Window Designer and click the Launch button. The Window Designer is launched.
Drawing Window Components

You can modify an existing window design or draw your own custom windows from scratch. As you draw each
component, Punch! displays your window design in 3D. Window Designer has three component drawing modes that
let you design windows from the outside to the inside.
Casing Start by drawing the trim to surround your

custom window. The Casing tab includes tools for
drawing the trim casing
Sills Next, draw the wood trim that comprises the base
of your window.
Grills Finally, add detailed grillwork to aesthetically

define panes in a window. Wherever you want your
window design to include only glass, simply leave
those areas empty.
Each of the three component drawing modes features an assortment of 2D drawing tools. For best results, use these
tools in conjunction with snaps and editing tools to reshape window elements, minimize repetition, and increase
accuracy.
For more information about using editing tools, see Editing Your Window Design, on page 313.
Tip: When drawing multiple instances of a window component, be sure to turn Auto Reset off. On the 2D menu, click
to uncheck Auto Reset Tools. When Auto Reset Tools is unchecked, you can draw concurrent window components
without selecting the corresponding window tool each time.
Window Component Properties

The casing, sill, and grill component properties are displayed when the component is selected in the design window.
You can affect the properties of more than one component by holding the SHIFT key as you click to select multiple
components.
Edit Level Select Object to resize the whole object or Points to edit individual points on
the shape. For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which begins on page
241.

Bring to Front button moves the selection to the top layer while Send to Back button
moves the selection to the bottom layer.
(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Bring To Front or Send to Back.
Type settings specify the component type.
Thickness defines the thickness of the polylines in the shape (applies to panel and grill
components only).
Open & Closed options specify if the shape is open-ended or contained.
Editing Your Window Design
Editing Your Window Design

Rather than redraw each geometric feature of your window casing, sill, or grill to position them perfectly, use Window
Designers editing tools to reshape, reposition, and reorient existing window elements. You can manipulate shapes to
match your custom design by inserting or removing points, and rounding or chamfering corners. Join tools allow you to
join lines, arcs, and polylines into a single entity for editing purposes.
For more information on flipping and mirroring, see Flipping & Mirroring Elements, on page 313.
The following options are available for editing your window design:
To remove window elements
Click the component to select it, then right-click and click Clear.
To select the next window element
On the Standard Toolbar, click the Select Next Object Tool. Window Designer selects the
objects in the order you placed them.
To select the previous window element
On the Standard Toolbar, click the Select Previous Object Tool. Window Designer selects
the objects in reverse order.
To join arcs, lines or polylines
1 Click the Selection Tool, then hold down SHIFT and click to select each component that
you want to be joined.
Note: The end points of each component must be nearby for those components to be
joined. You can increase or decrease the necessary distance by changing the Join Sensitivity, see
Controlling Drawing Settings.
2 On the Standard toolbar, click the Join Tool. The components are joined into a polyline.

The Flip function takes the original component and reverses it, either horizontally or vertically. Mirror works similarly to
313
Chapter
22 Window Designer

There are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you draw, select, or modify window elements. The Properties
Bar lets you modify a variety of settings, including the number of sides on a multigon or the size of your workspace.
Note: Be sure to press ENTER to accept new values in text boxes.
Workspace Boundary controls the size of the drawing space. Type new values in the
Width and Height text boxes.
If you have already drawn elements in the design window, select Scale Objects to
resize them accordingly.
Grid Options control the grid settings. For more information, see Using the Grid, which
begins on page 52.
Nudge Rate controls the distance a selection moves when nudged using the arrow
keys. Type a new value in the text box to change it.
Join Sensitivity affects how close components must be in proximity to another

component when joining them. A lower value means that you must position components
closer to join them.
Drawing Precision Specifies Inches or Feet-Inches for the unit of measurement.
Tracking Constraints setting control if the angle of a segment being drawn is

constrained to a 5-degree increments or to the roof pitch value. When Constrain to Roof
Pitch is selected, polygons and lines at the top of the window design automatically
constrain to the roof pitch in your home design
Replace Existing checkbox controls if window styles that are added from the Preview
bar replace the existing components in the design window. When selected, components are replaced when
window styles are applied; when deselected multiple styles are applied to the design window.
Scale To Workspace checkbox controls if window styles that are added from the Preview bar match the
workspace size. When selected, styles are automatically scaled to match the workspace size; when deselected
the default window style is retained.
Save Door To Library For more information, see Managing Window Designs, which begins on page 314.
Using Snaps to Draw Window Elements

Architect 3D includes the power of snaps. With snaps, you can define exactly what distance window elements are
placed from other window elements. You can TAB through the Snaps Toolbar. Each time you press TAB, the next
Snap Tool is activated, SHIFT+TAB reverses the process.
mode.
For more information on using the snap tools, see Using Snaps to Draw Components, on page 306.
Managing Window Designs

Window Designer not only allows you to save new windows for use in your Punch! drawings, it also has easy-to-use
tools for organizing and managing window libraries.
To import an existing window design
1 On the Properties Bar, click the Windows drop-down menu, then select a category tab and Window
library. The Preview Bar changes to display windows in this library.
(optional) On the Properties Bar, select the Replace Existing checkbox to remove existing window
designs from the design window, as you import from the library. When this checkbox is unchecked,
imported designs are placed on top of existing designs.
(optional) On the Properties Bar, select the Scale to Workspace checkbox to automatically resize
the window design to the current workspace size, as you import from the library.
2 Drag-and-drop a window design on the Preview Bar and drag it into the Design Window.
To save a new window design
1 Click the Save Window to Library button on the Properties Bar. The Save Window to Category
(alternatively) Click File menu > Save Window to Library.
2 In the Window Category section, click to save the window to a User Library category or click the
New button to create a new User Library category or sub-category.
3 Type a name for the new window in the Window Name text box. New window names can contain up
to 44 characters.
4 Type a description of the new window in the Window Description text box. New window descriptions
can contain up to 78 characters.
5 Click OK.

Once youve designed a custom window, you can place it in your Punch! design as you would any other window,
making sure to select the custom window library before you place the window. In the 2D design window, custom
windows are displayed the same as standard windows, but they are fully rendered in 3D View.
For information on editing windows once placed, see Window Properties, on page 129.
To add a custom window
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Window Tool. The Window properties are displayed in the
Properties tab.
2 Click the Window Style button, then click Custom WIndow from the drop-down
menu that is displayed. The Preview Bar displays the windows available in the
current library.
3 Click the Windows drop-down menu and then click the User Library tab.
4 Choose the category where you saved the window and then select the window in the Preview Bar.
5 Use the Drag Along Wall drawing method to place the window.
315
Chapter
22 Window Designer
Chapter 23
Ceiling Designer
Imagine an exquisite ceiling design with exotic wood beams, opening up an inspirational great room; now create it with
Ceiling Designer! Punch! Ceiling Designer offers tools and designs that allow you to capture the ceiling of your dreams
and make it real.
Series.
Note: It is recommended that you disable the auto ceiling in the main application if it is enabled in your design before
opening the Ceiling Designer. For more information, see Automatic Ceiling, which begins on page 122.
To Launch Ceiling Designer
2 Click to select Ceiling Designer and click the Launch button. The Ceiling Designer is launched.
Placing an Auto Ceiling

You can automatically place a ceiling over an enclosure with just a couple clicks of the mouse. Once placed, you can
edit the ceilings shape, size, and properties. The Auto Ceiling dialog box is available when you click an existing wall in
317
Chapter
23 Ceiling Designer
the design. You can set the elevation and the extension before placing the auto ceiling, and then edit it after the ceiling
has been placed.
To create an Auto Ceiling
1 On the workspace, select an existing wall and click Auto Ceiling. The Auto Ceiling dialog box is
displayed.
2 Type the Elevation and Extension you want in the corresponding text boxes and then click OK.
Drawing a Custom Ceiling

The first step to creating a creative and unique ceiling is to select the shape you want. Punch! offers ceiling tools to
create a ceiling from basic 2D shapes, pre-drawn ceiling templates, and curved shapes. All of these elements are
available on the tool menu.
Rectangle Ceiling Tool

For more information, see Drawing Rectangles and Squares, which begins on page 233.
Oval Ceiling Tool

For more information, see Drawing Circles and Ovals, which begins on page 234.
Polygon Ceiling Tool

For more information, see Drawing Polygons, which begins on page 235.
Multigon Ceiling Tool

For more information, see Drawing Multigons, which begins on page 237.
Custom Drawn Ceiling Properties

You can edit custom drawn ceilings to adjust the shape as well as create a custom ceiling tray or convert the shape to
a ceiling cutout.
Note: Always press ENTER to accept new values in a text box.
Custom Drawn Ceiling Properties
Edit Level Select Object to resize the whole object or Points to edit individual points on the
shape. For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which begins on page 241.

Curve options control curvature. For more information, see Changing Curve Tension, which
begins on page 238.
Tray Height defines the height of the ceiling tray. When set to 0, the ceiling remains flat. When a
feet-and-inches value is entered, the tray is created to the specified height.
Tray Height = 0
Tray Height = 1'-6"
Elevation defines the elevation at which the ceiling is placed. This does not include the tray height.
Auto-Elevate button allows you to automatically detect the wall height and position the ceiling at an elevation
relative to the top of the walls.
Cutout checkbox specifies a shape as a cutout section, so the area is literally cut out from the existing ceiling.
Note: Be sure the cutouts elevation matches that of the existing ceiling.
Slanted checkbox controls if a slanted angle is applied to the ceiling tray. When selected, the Inset text box
becomes active where you can define the distance you want the ceiling to slant towards the top of the tray. A
higher Inset value results in a more sloped, more severe pitch.
319
Chapter
23 Ceiling Designer
Inset = 0
Inset = 3'-0"
Drawing a Predefined Ceiling Shape

The predefined ceiling shapes allow you to create ceilings using unique shapes and then adjusting their properties to
further customize the look.
Gable Ceiling Tool

Creates a pitched ceiling with gable ends. Gable ceilings are created using the same drawing method as
rectangles and squares. For more information, see Drawing Rectangles and Squares, which begins on
page 233. You can edit its properties on the Properties tab before or after youve drawn the shape.
Hip Ceiling Tool

Creates a pitched ceiling with slanted panels. Hip ceilings are created using the same drawing method as
Barrel Ceiling Tool

Creates a curved ceiling with two flat ends. Barrel ceilings are created using the same drawing method as
page 233.
Dome Ceiling Tool

Creates a rounded ceiling. Dome ceilings are created using the same drawing method as ovals and circles.
For more information, see Drawing Circles and Ovals, which begins on page 234.
Ceiling Beam Tool

Creates an individual beam based on the length you specify. Ceiling beams are created using the same
drawing method as line. For more information, see Drawing Lines, which begins on page 234. You can edit
its properties on the Properties tab before or after youve drawn the shape.
Hip and Gable Ceiling Properties

Hip and Gable ceilings are defined by their pitch, elevation, and ridge direction. You can define the pitch before or after
drawing the ceiling. This and other properties can be edited by selecting the ceiling in the design window after it has
been created.
Barrel and Dome Ceiling Properties
Pitch specifies the pitch of the ceiling panels. Choose the radio button corresponding to the pitch
you want or choose Custom and type the pitch you want in the text box.
Pitch Angle defines the ceiling panel pitch angle if you know that. Type the angle you want, in the
Pitch Angle text box. The value in the Custom Pitch text box changes to reflect the Pitch Angle
youve entered.
Elevation defines the elevation at which the base of the ceiling is placed.
Auto-Elevate button allows you to automatically detect the wall height and position the ceiling at
an elevation relative to the top of the walls.
Ridge Direction button controls the direction of the ridge, either horizontally or vertically,
depending on its original position.
Gable Ends checkbox controls if the ends of the gable ceiling are enabled or disabled. When
enabled, ends are visible; when disabled the ends are removed creating an open-ended gable
ceiling.
Gable Ends Enabled
Gable Ends Disabled
Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the displays of dimensions in 2D. When selected, dimensions are displayed.
Barrel and Dome Ceiling Properties

When a barrel or dome ceiling is selected, its properties are displayed on the Properties Bar.
Size defines the Width, Length, and Height of the ceiling (you can also drag an edge to resize
manually).
Elevation defines the elevation at which the base of the ceiling is placed.
Auto-Elevate button allows you to automatically detect the wall height and position the ceiling at
an elevation relative to the top of the walls.
Barrel Direction button controls the direction of the barrel center line, either horizontally or
vertically, depending on its original position.
Ends Caps checkbox controls if the ends of the barrel ceiling are enabled or disabled. When
enabled, ends are visible; when disabled the ends are removed creating an open-ended barrel
ceiling.
Auto-Dimension checkbox controls the displays of dimensions in 2D. When selected, dimensions are displayed.
321
Chapter
23 Ceiling Designer
Ceiling Beam Properties

Ceiling beams are defined by their size, elevation, and pitch. You can define the size before or after drawing the beam.
This and other properties can be edited by selecting the beam in the design window after it has been created.
Size Type the Width and Height for the beam in the corresponding text boxes. You can also drag
selection points to resize manually.
Elevation defines the elevation at which the ceiling beam is placed.
Auto-Elevate button allows you to automatically detect the wall height and position the ceiling
beam at an elevation relative to the top of the walls.
Pitch specifies the pitch of the beam. Choose the radio button corresponding to the pitch you
want or choose Custom and type the pitch you want in the text box.
Pitch Angle defines the ceiling beam pitch angle if you know that. Type the angle you want, in
the Pitch Angle text box. The value in the Custom Pitch text box changes to reflect the Pitch
Angle youve entered.
Pitch Direction button controls the direction of the beam is pitched. Click to reverse the beam
pitch direction.

Editing a Ceiling
Ceiling Designer offers a variety of ways to customize and edit your ceiling. You can control the shape, size, pitch, and
other factors that affect the appearance of both a custom ceiling and an Auto Ceiling. Using these tools, you can
design unique and creative ceilings. You can only reshape ceiling shapes created using the custom ceiling shape
tools; predefined ceiling shapes cannot be reshaped. After youve created your ceiling, click the ceiling to select it; its
properties are displayed on the Properties Bar.
The following options are available for editing your ceiling design:
Inverse Fillet Tool (For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which begins on page 241.)

Define Ceiling Elevations

Not only can you control your Working Elevation and individual component elevations, but Ceiling Designer is also
equipped with an Auto-Elevate feature, which automatically elevates new ceilings and adjusts existing ceilings,
according to elevation changes.
Auto-Elevate new ceilings When selected, new ceilings are

automatically added at a default ceiling elevation.
Adjust ceilings on elevation changes When selected existing

ceilings are automatically updated when changes are made that
affect the ceiling height.
To control auto-elevate settings
1 Click Design menu > Auto-Elevate Settings. The Auto-Elevate Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 Edit the settings and then click OK.
Controlling Your 2D View

While creating your ceiling design, youll use a variety of tools and views, so it will be helpful to be able to adjust your
2D view, quickly, to accommodate your needs. You can pan, or move, across your entire design using the Pan Tool,
zoom in and out to focus on specific areas, as well as quickly fit your entire design within the 2D window.
For more information, see Viewing the 2D Plan, which begins on page 41.
2D Drawing Colors
To help distinguish the ceiling youre working on from the rest of your design, and possibly the grid, you can customize
the color of your 2D ceiling while working in Ceiling Designer.
To change your drawing color
1 Click 2D menu > Drawing Color. The color palette is displayed.

2 Choose the color you want your ceiling components to be, and click OK.
To reset drawing colors
Click 2D menu > Reset Drawing Color.
3D View Window Options

3D View offers three different 3D views for you to see your design as youre creating. The
3D View window can be repositioned and resized at any time during the design process.
The 3D View window sizes are accessible through buttons in Ceiling Designer, and by rightclicking on the 2D workspace.
For more information, see Working with 3D Views, which begins on page 43.
Navigating in 3D
You can navigate through your 3D view using a Walk-Through and Fly-Around feature. As youre
navigating, you can adjust your viewing elevation, and even anchor your position using the
Controlled navigation tools.
323
Chapter
23 Ceiling Designer
As you navigate through your design, you can adjust the speed at which youre moving and adjust the size of the
camera angle.
For more information, see Moving Around in 3D, which begins on page 271.
3D Rendering Options
Rendering options are available to control 3D navigation and viewing settings.
Speed slider controls the navigation speed, from

slow to fast.
Note: The faster the viewing speed, the lower the

quality of the rendered 3D image.
Camera Angle slider control how thin or wide the

3D view is displayed.
ClearView Opacity slider controls how

transparent or opaque components appear when
in ClearView.
Render 3D components that have been added to

your drawing are automatically displayed when
viewing your drawing in Ceiling Designer. You
can select which 3D components are displayed,
or hide all to help speed up rendering. Click to
select, or deselect the options to include, or
exclude.
To access rendering settings
1 Open a 3D View window.

2 Click 3D menu > Rendering Options. The
Rendering Options dialog box is displayed.
3 Adjust the render settings and then click OK.
Selecting Render Style

There are two rendering styles to choose from when viewing your design in 3D. Each offers a different perspective of
your drawing.
To view in 3D textured
1 Open 3D View.
2 On the 3D menu, click to deselect ClearView. The design is displayed in 3D texture in the 3D View
window.
To view in ClearView
1 Open 3D View.
2 On the 3D menu, click ClearView. The design is displayed in ClearView in the 3D View window.
Adjusting 3D Lighting
You can control the intensity and brightness of lighting of your 3D view in Ceiling Designer.
Using Templates
To adjust lighting intensity in a 3D view
1 Click 3D menu > 3D Lighting. The 3D Lighting dialog box is displayed.

2 Adjust the sliders to control Intensity and Brightness and then click OK.
Using Templates
Punch! Ceiling Designer offers pre-made ceiling designs to quickly place in your drawing. You can also create and
manage your own templates, which is extremely useful when working with multiple ceilings throughout multiple
designs. The Template Organizer allows you to manage all of your templates; you can move them between categories,
rename templates and categories, as well as delete templates and categories.
To use templates
1 Click the Templates tab. The ceiling templates are displayed.

2 Click the Templates drop-down menu and choose the ceiling library you
want. The templates are displayed on the Properties Bar.
3 Drag-and-drop a template onto the workspace.

Note: The position of your cursor, when you drag and drop a template,
determines the center of the design.
To organize templates
1 From the Templates drop-down menu, click Template Organizer.

2 On the left side of the Organizer, select a category from the drop-down menu.
3 On the right side of the organizer, select a category from the drop-down menu.
4 Click on the name of the template you want to move.
5 Click the navigation arrows to move templates from one category to another.
To change template info
1 Select the ceiling template you want to change and click the Info button, under Template. The
Template Info dialog box is displayed.
2 Type the name you want, in the Template text box.

3 Type a description in the Template Description text box.
4 Click OK.
325
Chapter
23 Ceiling Designer
To delete a template
1 Click the template you want to delete to select it.

2 Click the Delete button, under Template. A confirmation box is displayed.
3 Click Yes to permanently delete the template from the library.

To create a new ceiling category
1 Click the New button under Category. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed.
2 Select a folder for the location of your new category and click OK. The Category Name dialog box is
displayed.
3 Type the name of your new category in the Category Name text box and click OK. Your new
category is displayed on the right side of the Organizer.
To delete a category
1 Click the Delete button under Category. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed.
Using Templates
2 Select the category you want to delete and click OK. The delete confirmation box is displayed.
3 Click Yes to permanently delete the category and its templates from the Organizer.
To rename a category
1 Click the Rename button under category. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed.
2 Select the category you want to rename and click OK. The Category Name dialog box is displayed.
327
Chapter
23 Ceiling Designer
3 Type the new name in the Category Name text box and click OK. The new category name is
displayed in the Organizer.
To create a ceiling template
1 Create a ceiling design you want to save as a template and then click to select the ceiling element(s)
you want to include in your template.
2 Click the Templates tab. Templates are displayed on the Properties Bar.
3 Click the Templates drop-down menu and choose Create Template. The Save Template To
Category dialog box is displayed.
4 Click the Template Category drop-down menu to select the category where you want to save your
ceiling template.
5 Type the name of your ceiling in the Template Name text box.
6 Type a description of your ceiling in the Template Description text box.
7 Once youve finished entering the information about your new ceiling, click OK. Your design is
displayed on the Templates Properties Bar.
Tip: Use the Templates drop-down menu to navigate through your categories quickly.
Chapter 24
Fireplace Wizard
Adding a fireplace is now #10 on the Things that Add Value to Your Home list! With Punch! Fireplace Wizard, its a
snap to do.
Once you have stepped through the Wizard you are able to customize every feature of your Fireplace. You can add
materials and colors to create a truly individual home feature!
Series.
Designing a Custom Fireplace

Punch! Fireplace Wizard walks you through the initial design process, then allows total customization of each feature.
Launching Fireplace Wizard
2 Click to select Fireplace Wizard and click the Launch button. The Fireplace Wizard is launched.
To design a full fireplace
1 If the Fireplace Wizard is not open, click File > New. The fireplace types are displayed. Here you
can choose the style fireplace you want to start with.
329
Chapter
24 Fireplace Wizard
Remember, this style is just a base, you can customize the properties to make the fireplace your
own.
2 Select the type of fireplace you want to design, then click Next. The fireplace dimensions are
displayed.
3 (optional) Type new dimensions in the appropriate text box(es), then click Next. The chimney
options are displayed.
Note: You can always change these dimensions later.
Defining Dimension Increments
(optional) Check the feature(s) you want and type new dimensions in the appropriate text box(es).
4 Click Finish to display your fireplace.
Defining Dimension Increments

You can gain great control over changes in the dimensions of each area of fireplace design by specifying a dimension
increment. This increment is the measurement amount used when you click the arrows to alter each dimension.
To change the dimension increment
1 Click Design menu > Set Dimensions Increment. The Increment Value dialog box is displayed.
331
24 Fireplace Wizard
Chapter
2 Type the dimension in the text box, then click OK.
Customizing the Fireplace Properties

A fireplace is made up of three components: face, hearth & mantle, and chimney. Each of these components
properties are individually customizable.
As you work, you can quickly move between the fireplace components to display and edit
their properties. Simply choose the fireplace component you want from the drop-down
menu.
Note: The Hearth & Mantel and Chimney can be removed.
Customizing the Face Dimensions

The Face includes the actual height, width, and depth of the actual face as well as the firebox. These two components
make up the face. The Face properties allow you to control the dimensions of these components. As you make
changes, the preview window displays them.
Note: All faces may not be available at all times. Some fireplaces may have three faces, while others may have only
one face.
To change the face dimensions
1 Choose Face from the Components drop-down menu.

2 If your fireplace includes more than one face, click Design menu > Face and click the face you want
to edit from the submenu menu.
3 Under Face Dimensions, type the dimensions you want in the Width,
Height, and Depth text boxes, or click the arrows. Each click increases (or
decreases) the dimension based on the increment youve set.
As you change the dimensions, the fireplace will be updated in the preview
window.
To change the firebox dimensions
1 Click Design menu > Face and click the face you want from the submenu menu.
Customizing Hearth & Mantel Dimensions
2 Under Firebox Dimensions, type the dimensions you want in the Width,
Height, Depth, and Elevation text boxes, or click the arrows. Each click
increases (or decreases) the dimension based on the increment youve set.
window.
Customizing Hearth & Mantel Dimensions

The Hearth & Mantel properties affect the appearance of these components, the dimensions as well as their overall
inclusion on your fireplace. As you make changes, the preview window displays them.
To include a hearth
1 Choose Hearth & Mantel from the Components drop-down menu.

2 Select the Include Hearth checkbox to display the hearth and enable its properties.
(alternatively) Click Design menu > Face Components > Include Hearth. A checkmark is
displayed when the hearth is included.
To change the hearth dimensions
1 From the Component drop-down menu, click Hearth & Mantel. The Hearth Properties and Mantel
Properties are displayed.
2 Under Hearth Properties, type the dimensions you want in the Width, Height,
and Depth text boxes, or click the arrows. Each click increases (or
window.
333
Chapter
24 Fireplace Wizard
To include a mantel
1 Choose Hearth & Mantel from the Components drop-down menu.

2 Select the Include Mantel checkbox to display the mantel and enable its properties.
(alternatively) Click Design menu > Face Components > Include Mantel. A checkmark is
displayed when the mantel is included.
To change the mantel dimensions
1 From the Component drop-down menu, click Hearth & Mantel. The Hearth Properties and Mantel
Properties are displayed.
2 Under Mantel Properties, type the dimensions you want in the Width, Height,
Depth, and Elevation text boxes, or click the arrows. Each click increases (or
window.
Customizing the Chimney Dimensions
Customizing the Chimney Dimensions

The Chimney properties in Punch! Fireplace Wizard allow you to update whether or not you want a chimney and let
you specify its dimensions. As you make changes, the preview window displays them.
To include a chimney
1 Choose Chimney from the Components drop-down menu.

2 Select the Include Chimney checkbox to display the chimney and enable its properties.
(alternatively) Click Design menu > Chimney Components > Include Body. A checkmark is
displayed when the chimney is included.
To change the chimney dimensions
1 From the Component drop-down menu, click Chimney. The Chimney Properties are displayed.
2 Under Chimney Properties, type the dimensions you want in the Width,
window.
To include a chimney pot
1 Choose Chimney from the Components drop-down menu.

2 Select the Include Chimney Pot checkbox to display the chimney pot and enable its properties.
(alternatively) Click Design menu > Chimney Components > Include Pot. A checkmark is
displayed when the chimney pot is included.
To change the chimney pot dimensions
1 From the Component drop-down menu, click Chimney. The Chimney Pot Properties are displayed.
2 Under Chimney Pot Properties, type the dimensions you want in the Width,
window.
335
Chapter
24 Fireplace Wizard
Moving around in Fireplace Wizard

Fireplace Wizard provides the same two interactive 3D viewing options available in the 3D view, the Animated WalkThrough and Fly-Around tools. Using these tools, you can vary the viewing level, by adjusting the angle, to provide the
best viewing capabilities available.
Applying Material or Color to Fireplaces

You can customize your fireplaces appearance by applying different materials or colors. Just as in Architect 3D,
customizing your fireplace is a simple drag-and-drop procedure.
For more information on using the available libraries, see Organizing Library Content, on page 69.
To apply material to a fireplace
1 In the Fireplace Wizard window, click the Materials tab. By default, the Materials library is displayed
in the Preview Bar.
2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to
Materials, to display the Materials libraries menu, then click
to select the material library you want. The librarys content is
displayed.
3 Scroll to view the available materials.

4 Click the material you want to apply; hold down the mouse
button and drag the material onto the fireplace in the
Fireplace Wizard window. The material you selected is
applied.
To apply color from a customizable palette
1 In the Fireplace Wizard window, click the Colors tab. By

default, the Winter Colors library is displayed.
2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the arrow next to Colors, to display the
Colors style menu, then click to check Spring or whichever category you prefer.
The color palette is displayed on the Preview Bar.
3 Scroll to view the available spring colors.

4 Click the color you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the color
onto a side of your fireplace in the Fireplace Wizard window. The color you
selected is applied.
To apply a series of the same color or material
1 Find the color or material you want to apply to multiple surfaces.

2 Right-click the color or material you want to apply.
3 Right-click each component where you want the color or material applied. For example, right-click
the mantel or chimney.
4 Click the left mouse button to end. The color or material you selected is applied.

With Fireplace Wizard you can customize how lighting and shadows are rendered. Lighting settings are controlled in
the 3D Lighting dialog box.
To adjust the lighting intensity

2 Click the direction from which you want the light to originate, in the Direction section of the 3D
Lighting dialog box.
3 Increase or decrease the light intensity by clicking and dragging the Intensity slider.
4 Increase or decrease the overall brightness by clicking and dragging the Brightness slider.
5 Click OK.
Default Views
There are pre-defined views, to which you can default in Fireplace Wizard: Active Face View, Chimney Pot View, and
3D View.
Face View and Chimney Pot View set your view close to either the face or the chimney pot, if available.
Note: You must be in Animated Walk-Around mode to default to these views.

The 3D View, sets your view back away from the chimney with the entire design in full view.
To reset the active face view
Click Design menu > Reset Active Face View.
337
Chapter
24 Fireplace Wizard
To reset the chimney pot view.
Click the Design menu > Reset Chimney Pot View.
Click the 3D menu > Reset 3D View.
Saving a Fireplace
When you open a file, Fireplace Wizard copies the file to your computers memory. As you work, you modify the copy
stored in memory. Any system failure or loss of power destroys that copy. To save your work permanently, you must
save it to a file on a disk. A good rule of thumb is to save every 15 minutes, or after youve completed any work you
wouldnt want to redo.
When you click the Save As command, Fireplace Wizard saves the active drawing, using the name and location you
specify. You can create more than one version of a drawing or save copies on another disk for safekeeping. You can
save each version under a different name or you can save them under the same name, in different folders or on
different disks.
Note: When you save a custom fireplace, the Fireplace Wizard automatically adds the PFW extension.
Exporting to 3D Custom Workshop

By exporting a Fireplace Wizard design to 3D Custom Workshop, the smallest details can be added or altered. For
more information, see 3D Custom Workshop, which begins on page 429.
To export a fireplace to 3D Custom Workshop
1 Click File menu > Export to Custom Workshop. The Save As dialog box is displayed.
2 In the File Name text box, type a name. Fireplace Wizard automatically adds the POB extension.
Click OK.
Note: You may then open the file in 3D Custom Workshop.
Chapter 25
Mantel Designer
The Punch! Mantel Designer gives you the freedom to create extravagant, customized mantel designs. Using shapes
or pre-designed templates, you can add a uniqueness to your fireplace, one that defines your personality and creates
the look and feel only you could create.
Series.
Mantel Designer
Punch! Mantel Designer allows you to create unique mantels to customize the look of your fireplace. You can use 2D
shapes to draw the mantel of your dreams, or use pre-drawn templates to customize your fireplace.
To launch the Punch! Mantel Designer
2 Click to select Mantel Designer and click the Launch button. The Mantel Designer is launched and
the Welcome window is displayed.
339
Chapter
25 Mantel Designer
Drawing Mantel Shapes

Using tools provided in Mantel Designer, you can create a variety of mantel shapes. To begin, launch the Mantel
Designer.
Rectangular Mantel Face Tool

Creates a rectangular or square mantel face. These are created using the same drawing method as
Circle/Oval Mantel Face Tool

Creates a circular or oval-shaped mantel face. These are created using the same drawing method as circles
and ovals. For more information, see Drawing Circles and Ovals, which begins on page 234. You can edit
its properties on the Properties tab before or after youve drawn the shape.
Polygon Mantel Face Tool

Creates a user-defined mantel face made of polylines. These are created using the same drawing method
as polygons. For more information, see Drawing Polygons, which begins on page 235. You can edit its
properties on the Properties tab before or after youve drawn the shape.
Multigon Mantel Face Tool

Creates a multigon-shaped mantel face. These are created using the same drawing method as multigons.
For more information, see Drawing Multigons, which begins on page 237. You can edit its properties on
the Properties tab before or after youve drawn the shape.
Curved Mantel Face Tool

Creates a user-defined mantel face made of curves. These are created using the same drawing method as
curves. For more information, see Drawing Curves, which begins on page 237. You can edit its properties
on the Properties tab before or after youve drawn the shape.
Dental Mantel Face Tool

Creates a line-shaped dental face. These are created using the same drawing method as lines. For more
information, see Drawing Lines, which begins on page 234. You can edit its properties on the Properties
tab before or after youve drawn the shape.
Editing Your Mantel Design

Mantel Designer offers multiple ways to customize your mantel. You can control the shape and size, as well as control
your mantels appearance by shaping element edges and projecting elements to create a look all your own.
After youve created a mantel shape, click the shape to select it. Its properties are displayed on the Properties Bar.
Dental Mantel Face Properties
Projection defines the distance the shape projects from the surface.
begins on page 238.

Note: Dimensions are not available for Oval/Circle or Curved mantel shapes.
Dental Mantel Face Properties

Dental mantel face is defined by its projection as well as the size of the teeth along the shape.
Projection defines the distance the shape projects from the surface.

Teeth Height defines the distance from the bottom of the dental face line to the top.
Teeth Width defines the distance from one side of a block in the line to the other side.
Teeth Spacing defines the distance between each block in the dental face line.
Teeth Spacing
Teeth Height
Teeth Width
Editing Your Mantel Design

Rather than draw each geometric feature of your mantel separately, use Mantel Designers editing tools to reshape,
reposition, re-orient, or even join existing mantel elements. You can manipulate shapes to match your custom design
by inserting or removing points, and rounding or chamfering corners. Join tools allow you to join lines, arcs, and
polylines into a single entity for editing purposes.
For more information on flipping and mirroring, see Flipping & Mirroring Elements, on page 342.
341
Chapter
25 Mantel Designer
Chamfer Tool (For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which begins on page 241.

Using Snaps to Draw Mantel Elements

Architect 3D includes the power of snaps. With snaps, you can define exactly what distance mantel elements are
placed from other mantel elements. You can TAB through the Snaps Toolbar. Each time you press TAB, the next
mode.
Tracing an Image
If you already have an image that shows the mantel design you wantfor instance a scanned mantel drawingMantel
Designer lets you trace mantel designs directly over that image. Simply import the image, position it in the drawing,
then use one of the mantel face tools to trace the image.
For more information, see Import a Floor Plan Image, which begins on page 267.
Controlling Your 2D View

While creating your mantel design, youll use a variety of tools and views, so it will be helpful to be able to adjust your
2D view, quickly, to accommodate your needs. You can pan, or move, across your entire design using the Pan Tool,
zoom in and out to focus on specific areas, as well as quickly fit your entire design within the 2D window.
For more information, see Viewing the 2D Plan, which begins on page 41.
LiveView Window Options

LiveView offers three different 3D views for you to see your design as youre creating.
The LiveView window can be repositioned and resized at any time during the design
process. The LiveView window sizes are accessible through buttons in Mantel
Designer, and by right-clicking on the 2D workspace.
For more information, see Working with 3D Views, which begins on page 43.
Navigating in 3D
You can navigate through your 3D view using a Walk-Through and Fly-Around feature. You can adjust your viewing
elevation, and even anchor your position using the Controlled navigation tools.
As youre navigating, you can adjust the speed at which youre moving and adjust the size of the camera angle.
You can control the lighting settings of your 3D view in Mantel Designer.
To adjust lighting intensity in a 3D view

Using Templates
Punch! Mantel Designer provides pre-made mantel designs for you to quickly place in your drawing. You can also
create and manage your own templates, which is extremely useful when working with multiple mantels throughout
multiple designs. The Template Organizer allows you to manage all of your templates; you can move them between
categories, rename templates and categories, and delete templates and categories.
To use templates
1 Click the Templates tab. The mantel templates are displayed.

2 Drag and drop a template onto the workspace.
Note: The position of your cursor, when you drag and drop a template, determines the center of
the design.
1 From the Templates drop-down menu, click Template Organizer.

2 On the left side of the Organizer, select a category from the drop-down menu.
3 On the right side of the organizer, select a category from the drop-down menu.
4 Click on the name of the template you want to move.
5 Click the navigation arrows to move templates from one category to another.
To change template info
1 Select the mantel template you want to change and click the Info button, under Template. The
Template Info dialog box is displayed.
2 Type the name you want in the Template text box.

3 Type a description in the Template Description text box.
4 Click OK.
343
Chapter
25 Mantel Designer
To delete a template
1 Click the template you want to delete to select it.

2 Click the Delete button, under Template. A confirmation box is displayed.
3 Click Yes to permanently delete the template from the library.

To create a new mantel category
2 Select a folder for the location of your new category and click OK. The Category Name dialog box is
displayed.
category is displayed on the right side of the Organizer.
To delete a category
1 Click the Delete button under Category. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed.
Using Templates
3 Click Yes to permanently delete the category and its templates from the Organizer.
1 Click the Rename button under category. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed.
345
Chapter
25 Mantel Designer
displayed in the Organizer.
To create a mantel template
1 Create a mantel design you want to save as a template and click the Templates tab. Templates are
displayed on the Properties Bar.
2 Click the Template Library drop-down menu and select Create Template. The Save Template To
3 Click the Template Category drop-down menu to select the category where you want to save your
mantel template.
4 Type the name of your mantel in the Template Name text box.
5 Type a description of your mantel in the Template Description text box.
6 Once youve finished entering the information about your new mantel, click OK. Your design is
displayed on the Templates Properties Bar.
Exporting to 3D Custom Workshop

By exporting a mantel created using Mantel Designer to 3D Custom Workshop, the smallest details can be added or
altered. For more information, see 3D Custom Workshop, which begins on page 429.
To export a mantel to 3D Custom Workshop
1 Click File menu > Export to Custom Workshop. The Save As dialog box is displayed.
2 In the File Name text box, type a name. Mantel Designer automatically adds the POB extension.
Click OK.
Note: You may then open the file in 3D Custom Workshop.
Chapter 26
Pool Designer
Imagine the pool of your dreams, picture it in your mind. Now make it a reality with Punch! Pool Designer! Create a
pool as extravagant or intimate as you like. Create the ultimate atmosphere by selecting just the right accessories,
from Pool Designer. Get started now...
Series.
Launching Pool Designer
2 Click to select Pool Designer and click the Launch button. The Pool Designer is launched.
Create a Pool Using Pool Wizard

The Punch! Pool Wizard lets you choose a pool shape from pre-designed Basic Shapes, Advanced Shapes, and
Above Ground shapes. After choose your pool shape, you can customize the pool properties, such as coping (the tiles
that edge your in-ground pool), water, liner, and more, or create your pool using the default settings.
347
26 Pool Designer
Chapter
To create a pool using Pool Wizard
1 From the Shape tab, click the Pool Wizard Tool. Pool Wizard is displayed.
(alternatively) Click File > Pool Wizard.
2 Click a one of the pool shape tabs and choose the pool shape you want. A full-color
preview is displayed when you click a shape thumbnail.
3 After selecting your shape, customize the properties on the Properties Bar.
Coping Properties define the overall width and thickness of the coping
around the pool.
Coping 1'-0" Wide 2" Thick
Coping 2'-0" Wide 6" Thick
Water Properties your pool is displayed filled with water when viewed in 3D
View. If you want your pool to appear empty in 3D View, deselect the Fill
Pool checkbox.
To change the water level, type the distance you want the water to appear,
from the top edge of the pool, in the Water Level text box.
Liner Properties specifies the depth of your pool. By default, some pools
feature both a shallow end and a deep end. Type the depth for the shallow
end of your pool in the Shallow End Depth text box.
By default, the Deep End Depth checkbox is selected. Type the depth for
the Deep End of your pool in the Deep End text box.
Deselect the User Defined Depth Areas checkbox if you want to create custom shallow and deep
ends using the methods described in the section Defining the Depth of your Pool, on page 350.
Sizing you can change the Sizing properties by entering custom dimensions for your pool. In the Pool
Width text box, type the width you want; in the Pool Height text box, type the height you want.
Shaping your Pool
Note: By default, Punch! Pool Wizard automatically calculates the aspect ratio to keep your shape
intact. Deselect the Maintain aspect ratio checkbox to override this feature.
4 Default button returns to the pools original width and height.
5 When you have selected your pools shape and customized its properties, click OK. Your pool is
displayed on the Pool Designer workspace.
Shaping your Pool

The first step to creating the pool of your dreams is to select the shape you want. Punch! offers pool tools to create a
pool from basic shapes and a Pool Wizard to create a more advanced design.
Rectangle Pool Tool

Creates a rectangular or square pool shape. These shapes are created using the same drawing method as
page 233.
Oval/Circle Pool Tool

Creates an oval or circular pool shape. These shapes are created using the same drawing method as
rectangles and squares. For more information, see Drawing Circles and Ovals, which begins on page
234.
Polygon Pool Tool

Allows you to define the pool shape using polylines. These shapes are created using the same drawing
method as polygons. For more information, see Drawing Polygons, which begins on page 235.
Multigon Pool Tool

Creates a multigon pool shape. These shapes are created using the same drawing method as multigons.
Curved Pool Tool

Allows you to define a pool shape using curves. These shapes are created using the same drawing method
as curves. For more information, see Drawing Curves, which begins on page 237.
Pool Shape Properties

Pool Designer offers a variety of ways to customize and edit your pool. You can control the shape, walls and coping
(the tile lip that surrounds the top edge of your pool). Pool Designer also allows you to create and store templates, plus
add colors and materials to your pool.
349
Chapter
26 Pool Designer
Auto-Dim checkbox controls the displays of dimensions in 2D. When selected, dimensions are
displayed.
Note: Dimensions are not available for Oval/Circle or Curved depths.
begins on page 238.
Liner Color color preview shows the current liner color. To change the color, click the preview,
then select the color you want from the Color window and then click OK.
Water When the Fill checkbox is selected, water is displayed in your pool in the 3D view. To
change the water level, type the distance you want the water to appear from the top edge of the
pool, in the Level text box. To remove water from the 3D view, deselect the Fill checkbox.
Water On
Water Off
Side Walls checkbox controls the width of the side walls. If enabled, side walls are visible in the
3D view. To change the wall width, type the width you want in the Width text box. To remove the
side walls, deselect the On checkbox.
Coping settings control the display and size of the coping around the pool. When the On
checkbox is selected, coping is displayed in the 3D view. Type the width and thickness you want
in the corresponding text boxes. When deselected, coping is not visible in the 3D view.
Coping On
Coping Off
Depth defines how deep the shape projects into the ground. This text box is only available when there are no
manually drawn depths created for the pool.
Defining the Depth of your Pool

After you have fine-tuned the shape of your pool, you can set the depth by drawing shapes, with the tools that work just
like those on the Shapes Tab.
Rectangle Depth Tool

Creates a rectangular or square depth shape. These shapes are created using the same drawing method
as circles and ovals. For more information, see Drawing Rectangles and Squares, which begins on page
233.
Pool Depth Properties
Oval/Circle Depth Tool

Creates an oval or circular depth shape. These shapes are created using the same drawing method as
rectangles and squares. For more information, see Drawing Circles and Ovals, which begins on page
234.
Polygon Depth Tool

Allows you to define the depth shape using polylines. These shapes are created using the same drawing
method as polygons. For more information, see Drawing Polygons, which begins on page 235.
Multigon Depth Tool

Creates a multigon depth shape. These shapes are created using the same drawing method as multigons.
Curved Depth Tool

Allows you to define a depth shape using curves. These shapes are created using the same drawing
method as curves. For more information, see Drawing Curves, which begins on page 237.
Pool Depth Properties

In addition to changing the depth of an area in your pool, you can reshape and resize the depth to suit your needs.
After youve created a shape, click the shape to select it. Its properties are displayed on the Properties Bar.
Auto-Dim checkbox controls the displays of dimensions in 2D. When selected, dimensions are
displayed.
Note: Dimensions are not available for Oval/Circle or Curved depths.
begins on page 238.
Area Depth defines how deep the shape projects into the ground. The entire depth shape uses
the specified depth value and the rest of the pool shape slope to that depth. Using various depth
shapes you can create a pool with multiple depths.
Note: To create an island in your pool, type 0 in the Area Depth text and press ENTER.
Parallel Depth button allows you to create a matching depth either inside or outside an existing
depth. By default, the Parallel Depth is offset 6" from the inside edge. To increase or decrease the
Offset Distance, type the amount of space you want between the edge and the Parallel Depth.
When you add a parallel depth, the new area depth is the same as the original depth. So when using
parallel depths to create a sloped depth, be sure to adjust the area depth value for each depth.
351
Chapter
26 Pool Designer
Parallel Depth added inside the original depth at 6" offset
Managing Your Pool Design

You can easily view your pools volume and sizing, as well as customize drawing options.
To calculate your pools volume
Click Design menu > Calculate Pool Volume. A dialog box is displayed with your Pool Volume,
Perimeter Length, and Pool Surface Area.
To customize your pools options
1 Click Design menu > click Pool Options. The Options dialog box is displayed.
Pool Liner Render Quality Move the slider side to side to increase or decrease the Pool Liner
Rendering Quality.
Water Transparency Move the slider side to side to increase or decrease the Water Transparency.
Move Equipment With Pool To enable equipment to move with your pool, select the checkbox. Your
equipment stays in place anytime you move or resize your pool.
Move Steps With Pool To enable steps to move with your pool, select the checkbox. Your steps stay in
place anytime you move or resize your pool.
Configure the options and then click OK.
Adding a Ladder with Steps

The ladder with steps options are available on the Ladders tab. Using one of these tools you can add a ladder with
steps to the edge of your pool. Each tool offers some variety in the rail style.
Adding Ladder Rails without Steps
When one of the tools is active you can choose the style you want from the Options button on the Properties tab. The
styles offer 3-step and 4-step ladder options. Below is an example of the styles available for the Standard Ladder Tool.
To add a ladder with steps
1 Click the Ladders tab and choose the ladder tool you want. The Options button is displayed on the
Properties Bar.
2 Click the Options button and choose the style you want.
3 Position your cursor on an edge of the pool where you want the ladder to be placed and then clickand-drag so the red arrows are pointing in the direction you want the component to face. Release
your mouse to place the ladder.
Adding Ladder Rails without Steps

The ladder rails options are available on the Ladders tab. Using one of these tools you can add ladder-style rails
without steps to the edge of your pool. Each tool offers some variety in the rail style.
To add ladder rails without steps
1 Click the Ladders tab and choose the rail tool you want.
2 Position your cursor where you want the rails to be placed and then click-and-drag so the red arrows
are pointing in the direction you want the component to face. Release your mouse to place the rails.
The component is displayed in your design.
353
Chapter
26 Pool Designer
Adding a Hand Rail

The hand rail options are available on the Rail & Step tab. Using one of these tools you can add a hand rail to the edge
of your pool. Each tool offers some variety in the rail style.
When one of the tools is active you can choose the style you want from the Options button on the Properties tab. The
styles offer various sized hand rail options, with the dimensions noted for each style option. Below is an example of the
styles available for the 2-Bend Hand Rail Tool.
[
Note: Options are available for all of the hand rail tools with the exception of the Spa-Rail Tool.
To add a hand rail
1 Click the Rail & Step tab and choose the hand rail tool you want. The Options button is displayed on
the Properties Bar.
2 Click the Options button and choose the style you want.
3 Position your cursor on an edge of the pool where you want the hand rail to be placed and then clickand-drag so the red arrows are pointing in the direction you want the component to face. Release
your mouse to place the hand rail.
Adding Steps
Adding Steps
You can easily add steps to an edge of your pool using one of the step tools on the Rail & Step tab. To following
options are available from the Register/Return toolset:
Perimeter Steps
Freehand Steps
Pre-Built Steps
Perimeter Steps
Perimeter steps are drawn along the edge of the pool.
Dimensions are display as you drag to extend the length of the
steps.
Before adding perimeter steps to your pool design you can
specify the Auto-Steps settings on the Properties tab. Once the
steps are placed you can only edit the height of each step, the
elevation of each step, and the shape of the steps.
Note: Always press the ENTER key to accept new values in a

text box.
Build Style button provides options for the step shape style. Parallel steps follow the shape of the
pool while Straight steps create a straight line.
Parallel Steps
Straight Steps
Stagger button provides options to control how the ends of the steps are staggered when the
Parallel style is selected (only available for Parallel Steps style).
No Stagger
Standard Stagger
Slanted Stagger
Round Step Corner checkbox allows you to choose if you want the corners of Parallel steps rounded or straight.
When selected, the corners are rounded; when deselect they are straight (only available for Parallel Steps style).
Tread Count defines the number of step treads.
Height defines the distance from one step to the next.
Depth defines the distance from the back of the exposed step to the front.
To place a wall receptacle
1 On the Rail & Step toolbar, click the Perimeter Step Tool.
2 On the Properties tab, set the Auto-Steps properties you want.
3 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to set the length for the steps along an edge of
the pool.
355
Chapter
26 Pool Designer
Freehand Steps
Freehand steps are drawn by clicking points to define the shape of the
step. Using this tool you can create a unique shape to along any edge
of your pool design. Dimensions are display as you drag to extend the
segments of the steps. The step is placed at the current working
elevation, which you can adjust before you draw, or you can edit the
steps elevation after it is placed.
For more information, see Controlling Elevations, which begins on
page 365.
You can edit the step height and curvature on the Properties tab
before or after you draw the step.
Note: Always press the ENTER key to accept new values in a text
box.
Height defines the distance from the bottom of the step to the top.
begins on page 238.
To add a freehand-drawn step
1 On the Rail & Step toolbar, click the Freehand Step Tool.
2 Use the Define 2D Shape drawing method to draw a freehand step.
Adding Pool Equipment
Pre-Built Steps
Pre-built steps are placed in your drawing with a single click. All of the
steps and the hand rails are combined as one component.
When the tool is active you can choose the style you want from the
Options button on the Properties tab. The styles offer in-ground and
above-ground options with various sizes.
[
Controlling Elevations
Editing Your Pool Design
To add pre-built steps
1 On the Rail & Step toolbar, click the Pre-Built Steps Tool.
2 On the Properties tab, click the Options button and choose the style you want.
3 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the pre-built steps in your design.

Pool equipment is available on the Equipment tab. Using these tools you can complete your pool design by adding
details such as the support system parts, skimmers, and more.
357
Chapter
26 Pool Designer
Pool Support Systems

The support system components are available to add to your pool design. When the tool is active you can choose the
type you want from the Options button on the Properties tab. You can add components individually, or choose a prebuilt support system that includes a filter, pump, and heater combined on a concrete pad.
To add a pool support system
1 On the Equipment tab, click the Pool Support Systems Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Options button and choose the support system you want
to add.
3 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the support system in your design.
Automatic Cleaner
You can add an automatic cleaner to your pool design. When the tool is active you can choose the type you want from
the Options button on the Properties tab.
To add an automatic pool cleaner
1 On the Equipment tab, click the Automatic Cleaner Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Options button and choose the pool cleaner you want to
add.
3 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the pool cleaner in your design.
Surface Skimmer
You can add a surface skimmer that is built into the edge of your pool. By default, this is added along an edge where
the coping exists. Once place you can click-and-drag the skimmer to a new location in your pool.
Note: If you do not position the surface skimmer along the pool edge, Punch! automatically places the surface
skimmer on the closest edge.
To add a surface skimmer
1 On the Equipment tab, click the Surface Skimmer Tool.

2 Position your cursor on an edge of the pool where you want the surface skimmer to be
placed and then click-and-drag so the red arrows are pointing in the direction you want
the component to face. Release your mouse to place the surface skimmer.
Drain
You can add a drain to your pool design with just one mouse click. Drains are automatically placed at the elevation of
the lowest detected depth where you click.
To add a drain
1 On the Equipment tab, click the Drain Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the drain in your design.
Leaf Skimmers
The Leaf Skimmer Tool offers a variety of options for adding a skimmer to your pool design. When the tool is active
you can choose the type you want from the Options button on the Properties tab.
359
Chapter
26 Pool Designer
To add a leaf skimmer
1 On the Equipment tab, click the Leaf Skimmer Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Options button and choose the skimmer you want to add.
3 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the leaf skimmer in your design.
Floating Thermometer
The Floating Thermometer Tool places a thermometer in your pool at the surface. Once placed you can move the
thermometer by dragging it to a new position or using your arrow keys to nudge it into place.
To add a floating thermometer
1 On the Equipment tab, click the Floating Thermometer Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the thermometer in your design.
Chlorinator
The Chlorinator Tool places a chlorine float in your pool at the surface. Once placed you can move the chlorinator by
dragging it to a new position or using your arrow keys to nudge it into place.
To add a chlorinator
1 On the Equipment tab, click the Chlorinator Tool.

2 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the chlorinator in your design.
Liner Vacuums
The Liner Vacuum Tool offers a variety of options for adding a liner vacuum to your pool design. When the tool is
active you can choose the type you want from the Options button on the Properties tab.
To add a liner vacuum
1 On the Equipment tab, click the Liner Vacuums Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Options button and choose the vacuum you want to add.
3 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the vacuum in your design.
Liner Brooms
The LIner Broom Tool offers a variety of options for adding a liner broom to your pool design. When the tool is active
you can choose the type you want from the Options button on the Properties tab.
361
Chapter
26 Pool Designer
To add a liner broom
1 On the Equipment tab, click the Liner Brooms Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Options button and choose the broom you want to add.
3 Use the Click Once to Place drawing method to place the broom in your design.
Adding Pool Accessories

Pool accessories is available on the Accessory tab. Using these tools you can add the things that make your day at the
pool jam-packed with activity.
Volleyball Net
You can easily add a volleyball net that stretches from one side of your pool to the other. A rubber band line is
displayed as you draw. The volleyball net is positioned at a default elevation, which you can change after it is placed.
To add a volleyball net
1 On the Accessory tab, click the Volleyball Net Tool.

2 Use the Click-and-Drag drawing method to draw the volleyball net from one side of the
pool to the other side.
Basketball Goal
Using the Basketball Goal Tool you can add a basketball goal along any edge of your pool.
Adding Pool Accessories
To add a basketball goal
1 On the Accessory tab, click the Basketball Goal Tool.

2 Position your cursor on an edge of the pool where you want the basketball goal to be
placed and then click-and-drag so the red arrows are pointing in the direction you want
the component to face. Release your mouse to place the basketball goal.
Diving Boards
The Diving Boards Tool offers a number of options for adding a diving board to your pool design. When the tool is
active you can choose the type you want from the Options button on the Properties tab.
To add a diving board
1 On the Accessory tab, click the Diving Boards Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Options button and choose the diving board you want to
add.
3 Position your cursor on an edge of the pool where you want the diving board to be placed and then
click-and-drag so the red arrows are pointing in the direction you want the component to face.
Release your mouse to place the diving board.
363
Chapter
26 Pool Designer
Slides
The Slides Tool offers a number of options for adding a slide to your pool design. When the tool is active you can
choose the type you want from the Options button on the Properties tab.
To add a slide
1 On the Accessory tab, click the Slides Tool.

2 On the Properties tab, click the Options button and choose the slide you want to add.
3 Position your cursor on an edge of the pool where you want the slide to be placed and
then click-and-drag so the red arrows are pointing in the direction you want the
component to face. Release your mouse to place the slide.
Controlling Your Working Plan Views
Controlling Your Working Plan Views

You can control which plans are visible while editing your design. Each tab has a drop-down
box that allows you to view or hide the work youve done in each other plan. Additionally, you
can control the default plan color, which is used to distinguish components that are added from
each tab.
By default, if you have created a design from a tab, it is visible on the workspace and has a
checkmark next to it in the drop-down menu. To hide a specific plan or plans, click the plan(s)
you want to hide. The checkmark and plan(s) disappear.
Note: You cannot hide the active plan.

To display or hide your pool plans
Click a tab to display the drop-down menu and click to select the plan(s) you want to view. A
checkmark is displayed next to the visible plans and they are displayed on the workspace.
To hide a plan, click to deselect the checkmark and hide the plan and all of its contents.
To customize a plans color on the workspace
1 Click a tab to display the drop-down menu and choose Plan Color. The color palette is displayed.
2 Select the color you want to use to denote the selected plan and then click OK. The contents of that
plan are displayed in the color you chose.
The working elevation is the elevation at which all items are drawn. Once placed, you can adjust an items elevation
manually or use one of the pre-defined elevations to position an item accurately.
To change the working elevation
1 Click Design menu > Set Working Elevation. The Set Working Elevation dialog box is displayed.
(alternatively) While nothing is selected in your design, right-click the Elevation Slider and choose
Set Working Elevation.
2 Type the elevation you want in the text box and click OK.
To elevate a component
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the component you want to elevate (hold down the
SHIFT key as you click to select multiple components).
2 Click Edit menu > Set Object Elevation. The Set Elevation dialog box is displayed.
(alternatively) Right-click the Elevation Slider and choose Set Elevation.
3 Choose one of the pre-defined elevations or choose Custom and type the elevation you want it text
box, then click OK.
To elevate a component using the Elevation Slider
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the component you want to elevate (hold down the
SHIFT key as you click to select multiple components).
365
Chapter
26 Pool Designer
2 Drag the Elevation Slider to the elevation you want.

Rather than draw each geometric feature of your pool separately, use Pool Designers editing tools to reshape,
reposition, or re-orient existing pool elements. You can manipulate shapes to match your custom design by inserting or
removing points, and rounding or chamfering corners.
Chamfer Tool (For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which begins on page 241.
Calculating Pool Volume

You can quickly view the volume of your pool design, the perimeter length, and the surface area.
To calculate pool volume
Click Design > Calculate Pool Volume. The volume, length, and area of the pool are displayed.
Using Snaps to Draw Elements

Architect 3D includes the power of snaps. With snaps, you can define exactly what distance pool elements are placed
from other pool elements. You can TAB through the Snaps Toolbar. Each time you press TAB, the next Snap Tool is
activated, SHIFT+TAB reverses the process.
mode.

As in Architect 3D, you can customize the lighting and shadows in Pool Designer.
Using Templates
To adjust the lighting intensity in a 3D View
3 Click LiveView menu > 3D Lighting. The 3D Lighting dialog box is displayed.
Using Templates
Punch! Pool Designer provides prefabricated templates for you to quickly place an original pool style. You can also
create and manage your own templates independent of specific drawings you have saved. The Template Organizer is
particularly useful when youre working with multiple pool designs because you can organize your Template by
category.
To use templates
1 Click the Templates tab. The Templates drop-down is displayed in the Properties Bar.
2 Click the Templates drop-down box and the Template categories and options are displayed.
1 Click the Templates drop-down menu and select Pool Template Organizer. The Pool Organizer is
displayed.
2 To move templates from one category to another, open both categories using the category dropdown menu in Pool Organizer.
367
Chapter
26 Pool Designer
3 Use the navigation arrows to move templates from one category to the other. The
templates are displayed under the category where you move them.
To review information on a particular template
1 Select the pool from the library and click the Info button. The Pool Info dialog box is displayed.
2 To customize the Pool Name, type the name you want in the Pool Name text box.
3 To customize the Pool Description, type the description you want in the Pool Description text box.
4 Once you have updated all the Pool Info you want to, click OK and the information is updated.
To create a new category
2 Select the folder you want your new category to appear in and click OK. The Category Name dialog
box is displayed.
Using Templates
category is displayed on the right side of the Pool Organizer.
4 To delete a category from Pool Organizer, click the Delete button under Category. The Browse for
Folder dialog box is displayed.
6 Click Yes to permanently delete the category from Pool Designer.

1 Click the Rename button under Category. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed.
displayed in Pool Organizer.
To delete a template from the library
1 Click the Delete button. The delete confirmation box is displayed.
369
Chapter
26 Pool Designer
2 Click Yes to permanently delete the pool template from the library.
3 Once youve finished organizing your pool templates, click the Close button to close Pool Organizer
and return to the Templates tab.
To create a pool template
1 Create a pool design you want to save as a template and click the Templates tab. Templates are
displayed on the Properties Bar.
2 Click the Templates drop-down menu and select Create Pool Template. The Save Pool To
3 Click the Pool Category drop-down menu to select the category you want to save your pool template
to.
4 Type the name of your pool in the Pool Name text box.
5 Type a description of your pool in the Pool Description text box.
6 Once youve finished entering the information on your new pool, click OK. Your design is displayed
in the Templates Properties Bar.
Chapter 27
Fence Designer
Whether its selecting the picket type for an ornamental iron fence, setting the railing heights on a gate, or adding color
or texture to fence sections, the Fence Designer lets you customize images of fences and gates so you can tour a
realistic rendering of your garden plan in Architect 3D.
Series.
Designing Fences
Fence Designer gives you two powerful toolsets to use in your fence designs. Controlled Detailing tools allow you to
control attributes such as rail placement and picket caps. Freehand Detailing tools allow you to modify the appearance
of those elements or even draw new elements.
The first step to creating your fence is choose the style fence you want. The Fence Design dialog box allows you to
select basic style options to get your fence started, then you can customize each components property to make it your
own.
Launching Fence Designer
2 Click to select Fence Designer and click the Launch button. The Fence Designer is launched.
371
Chapter
27 Fence Designer
To select a fence style and size
1 To display the Fence Design dialog box, launch the PowerTool, or click File menu > New. The
Fence Design dialog box is displayed.
2 Select either Fence Section Design or Fence Gate Design.

3 From the Component Style drop-down menu, choose the style fence
you want.
4 Type the width and height you want in the corresponding text boxes.
5 Click OK. The fence is displayed, based on your specifications.
To create a new fence style
Click File menu > New. The Fence Design dialog box is displayed.
Customizing Chain-Link Fence Properties

Chain-link fences are made up of the following components: Chain Link Fabric and Frame
Work. To access properties for each component, click the drop-down menu at the top of the
Properties Bar.
Chain Link Fabric
Mesh Dimensions defines the width and height that makes up the mesh. The
smaller the dimension, the more condensed the mesh is displayed.
Mesh 3"x3"
Mesh 6"x6"
Wire Thickness defines the thickness of the wires that make up the mesh.
Customizing Ornamental Iron Fence Properties
Wire 1pt
Wire 4pt"
Frame Work
Upper Frame Rail defines the height and elevation of the upper frame rail. Type the
Height and Elevation you want for the upper rail. Press ENTER to accept each value.
Lower Beam checkbox controls whether or not a lower rail is included. To include a
lower rail, select the checkbox. Type the Height you want in the corresponding text
box.
Lower Beam Disabled
Lower Beam Enabled
Note: You can resize and reshape the upper and lower rails by dragging selection points using Object or Points Level
editing. For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which begins on page 241.
Customizing Ornamental Iron Fence Properties

Ornamental iron fences are made up of the following components: Iron Pickets,
Railing, and Embellishments. To access properties for each component, click the
drop-down menu at the top of the Properties Bar.
Iron Pickets
Dimensions defines the width, height, and spacing for each of the pickets.
Note: The number of pickets that are displayed will vary depending on the width.
Note: The height is based on the original width specified on the Fence Design dialog
box.
Iron Picket Cap defines the style, height, and width of the picket cap.
373
Chapter
27 Fence Designer
Railing
Select the rails to be included, or deselect to exclude.
To define the height and elevation for a rail, click to select the rail # and then type the
dimensions you want. Press ENTER to accept each new value.
Embellishments
Select the accessory to be included, or deselect to exclude.
To define the properties for each accessory, click to select it and specify the style,
thickness, height, and elevation you want. Press ENTER to accept each new value.
Customizing Picket Fence Properties

Picket fences are made up of the following components: Pickets, Top Edge, and Back
Railing. To access properties for each component, click the drop-down menu at the
top of the Properties Bar.
Pickets
Dimensions define the width height, and spacing for the pickets. Press ENTER
to accept each new value.
Picket Cap specifies the cap style and height.
Note: The Picket Cap height is not available for the Straight style, as all of the caps will
be at the same height. When a different style is chosen, the Height text box becomes
active.
Top Edge
Specifies the style and minimum height you want.
Note: The Min Height is not available for the Leveled style, as the top will be at the same
height. When a different style is chosen, the Min Height text box becomes active.
Back Railing
Select the rail(s) to be included, or deselect to exclude.
To define the properties for each rail, click to select it and specify the height and
elevation you want. Press ENTER to accept each new value.
Customizing Privacy Fence Properties
Customizing Privacy Fence Properties

Privacy fences are made up of the following components: Boards and Back Railing.
To access properties for each component, click the drop-down menu at the top of the
Properties Bar.
Boards
Dimensions define the width and height you want. Press ENTER to accept each new
value.
Include gap between boards checkbox controls the spacing between boards. By
default, the boards are placed with a small gap between them. Deselect this option to
remove the gap.
Board Cap specifies the style and height of the boards.
Note: The Board Cap Height is not available for the Straight style, as all of the boards
will be at the same height. When a different style is chosen, the Height text box becomes
active.
Back Railing
Select the rail(s) to be included, or deselect to exclude.
To define the properties for each rail, click to select it and specify the height and
elevation you want. Press ENTER to accept each new value.
Customizing Rail Fence Properties

Rail fences are made up of the following components: First Rail and Second Rail. To
access properties for each component, click the Rail drop-down menu and choose which
rail you want to work on.
Dimensions defines the height and elevation you want for the selected rail.
Tertiary Rail checkbox controls the display of a third rail. By default, a tertiary rail is
included, positioned between the first and second rail. Deselect the checkbox to
exclude it.
Freehand Detail Drawing

In Freehand Detailing mode, you can move, rotate, or apply colors and textures to individual components of the fence
or gate. You can even add custom shapes to the design.
All shapes drawn in Fence Designer can be edited in a variety of ways. They can be moved specified amounts,
rotated, layered, and even converted to other types of drawing shapes. Object-Level Editing is active by default.
Object-Level Editing, along with Point-Level Editing, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in object
selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the
object is treated separately as you edit.
375
Chapter
27 Fence Designer
To display dimensions as you draw
Click Options menu > Show Tracking Dimensions. Dimensions are displayed as you draw. When
this item is checked Fence Designer automatically displays dimensions, as you draw, making it easy
to precisely place shapes in your drawing.
Editing Fence Shapes

You can edit a shape or part of a fence to reshape, reposition, and reorient existing elements.
The following options are available for editing your fence design:
Rotate
selections (see Rotating a Selection, on page 257)
Moving
selections (see Moving a Selection, on page 256)
To control layering
Right-click the element you want to position and choose Bring to Front or Send to Back from the
context menu.
To remove fence elements
Right-click the element and choose Clear.
To adjust curvature
Right-click a shape and choose Smooth. For more information, see Changing Curve Tension,
To resize or reshape a fence or gate manually
Right-click a shape and choose either Object-Level Editing or Point-Level Editing. For more
information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which begins on page 241.
To resize a fence section or gate using dimensions
1 Click Edit menu > Adjust Design Dimensions. The Design Dimensions dialog box is displayed.
2 Click either Resize Using Dimensions or Resize Using Percentages, then enter new values for
the width and height in the corresponding text boxes.
3 (optional) Select Rescale Freehand Geometry if you want to scale any shapes you have already
drawn in the design.
4 Click OK.
Customizing Fence Materials and Color
Customizing Fence Materials and Color

The following editing modes are available in Fence Designer:
Custom Color Tools in this mode will completely replace the original color, in your selected area, with a
custom color of your choice.
Custom Material Library Tools in this mode completely replace the original material, in your selected
area, with a custom material of your choice.
To apply color or texture to a fence component or shape
1 Select a fence component (such as a rail or a picket or a shape).

2 Click the editing mode that you want to apply, then select a color or material from the Preview Bar.
The color or texture is applied to that shape.
File Management
You can return to a Fence Designer project simply by opening an existing fence design file. Fence designs are saved
with the file extension *.FDD. When youre ready to use your fence design in a home design project, simply export it to
one of the custom material libraries.
To open an existing fence definition
1 Click File menu > Open. The Open Design dialog box is displayed.
2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open, or search for the file by switching
folders or drives.

To save a fence image to a material library
1 Click File menu > Export to Material Library. The Punch! Fence Designer dialog box is displayed.
2 Choose the User Library category where you want the fence stored.
Tip: Add the fence to an existing Fence library so all of the fence options are available from the same place.
3 Type a name for the new fence or gate in the Material File Name text box.
4 Type a description of the new fence or gate in the Material Description text box.
5 Click OK.
Using Fence Designer Materials in Your Project

Once youve created your own custom fence or gate materials in Fence Designer you can easily apply them back in
your Architect 3D project. After youve drawn a fence on the Landscaping tab, simply navigate to the library where you
stored the new image, and drag the image to the fence in your 3D view.
To apply Fence Designer materials
1 Click the Libraries tab and choose Materials from the Libraries drop-down menu. The Materials
2 Click the Categories drop-down menu and choose the User Library tab and category you want to
view. Its contents are displayed in the Preview Bar.
3 Drag-and-drop the custom fence material you want to apply onto the fence or gate in the 3D view
window. The custom material you selected is applied.
377
Chapter
27 Fence Designer
Part 5
Enhancement &
Customization
PowerTools
Chapter 28:
Chapter 29:
Chapter 30:
Chapter 31:
Chapter 32:
PhotoView and PhotoView Editor . . . . .

Estimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section Detailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symbol Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
381
389
395
401
417
Chapter 28
PhotoView and PhotoView Editor

Architect 3D lets you import a digital photograph or a scanned image of your home and landscape around it. From cars
to pets, windows to chimneys, doors to neighbors, you can customize your design to match your dreams. You can
even place an imported image of your own backyard, so when you look out a window, youre home.
With PhotoView Editor, you can apply different building materials onto your homes picture. No redrawing walls, no
adding windows and doors - just click and drag a new material onto your home!
Series.
Tips for Using PhotoView

Architect 3Ds PhotoView lets you take digital pictures and add them to your landscape design. Although this is a
straightforward process, there are a few hints that will make the ultimate result much more satisfying.
Verify that the image is level and straight, when taking a digital picture or scanning a photograph. If the initial
photograph is not straight, use your graphics software to rotate it in half-degree increments, until it is.
Photograph the feature when the sun is shining. This ensures more color saturation and detail of the image.
Double-check the dimensions when importing PhotoView images.
Take your time masking the image; the better the mask, the better the end result.
Images are placed in the center of the lot. When importing multiple images, move each image, as it is placed, to
avoid stacking them on top of each other.
Images should touch the bottom of the image area. If it is centered in the area, it will float above ground level.
Importing PhotoView Images

Whether you want to import an image of your homes facade to landscape around or you want to add a custom door or
window, Punch! PhotoView makes it easy. You can import any image you want, even your pet or your neighbor.
To import PhotoView images
2 Click to select PhotoView and click Launch. The Open dialog box is displayed.
381
Chapter
28 PhotoView and PhotoView Editor
3 In the Look In box, type the name of the directory where your file is located, or search for the file by
browsing folders or drives.
Note: As you scroll through the available images, when one is highlighted, it will be displayed in
the preview box.
4 When you find the file you want, click to select it.
5 Click Open. The Properties dialog box is displayed.
6 Type width and height, in inches, or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen, then click OK.
Note: PhotoView Images appear as lines in the 2D window.
PhotoView Properties
PhotoView Properties
Once you have imported your PhotoView image, you have the option of further customizing its appearance. This can
be done at any time during the design process. You can resize, change elevation, rotate, flip it, and perform other
editing tasks. To edit a PhotoVIew image, click to select it in the design window and the PhotoView Properties are
displayed.
Size defines the Width and Height, in inches or feet and inches, for the image.
You can also resize an image manually by dragging an end point until the image
is the size you want.
Note: Dragging an end point only changes the width of the image; to keep
proportions accurate, update the Height value manually.
Cast Shadows checkbox controls if the imported image generates a shadow or

not. When selected, the image casts a shadow; when deselected no shadow us
cast.
Transparent Black checkbox controls if black masking that has been added to
an image is ignored to create a transparent area or if the black is displayed as
part of the image.
Transparent Black Enabled
Transparent Black Disabled
Flip button flips the image horizontally.
Set Image button allows you to set a different image in your drawing. You can search for a new image and add it
to the design, replacing the existing image (the dimensions remain the same).
Image Info button open the PhotoView Info dialog box, which shows the path where the file is located on your
hard drive.
Tip: You may find it useful to store PhotoView images in the Content folder (C:\Users\<USER>\My
Documents\Punch! Software\User Library\Content). The content folder is designed to be the first place searched for
missing files, for instance, PhotoView files, custom materials, or custom trims.
Landscaping Using PhotoView Images

One way to get started landscaping your yard is to import a PhotoView image of your home. You can then embellish
your design with landscaping and other elements.
Note: Its very important to input the correct dimensions of your home. For more information, see To import
PhotoView images, which begins on page 381.
383
Chapter
To landscape using PhotoView images
1 Import the image of your home, as explained previously, and open a 3D view window.
Note: Its very important to input the correct dimensions of your home. For more information, see
To import PhotoView images, which begins on page 381.
2 Add landscaping (see Landscape Plan Tab, which begins on page 209) and plants (see Plants
Libraries, which begins on page 78).
Note: PhotoView images appear in the 2D design window as lines, similar to interior walls.
Right in Your Own Backyard

In Architect 3D you can even look out the window of your new home design and see your own backyard. By taking a
digital picture of your backyard, you can position it so when you view your design in 3D View, youre home.
Note: In the example above, the PhotoView image is the line at the top of the design window.
To view your own backyard
1 Create your home design, using tools and techniques outlined in previous chapters and open a 3D
view window.
2 Import the image of your own backyard using PhotoView and adjust the position and size of the
image as needed.
PhotoView Editor
PhotoView Editor
You can now take a digital picture of your house and apply materials and colors directly to it with PhotoView Editor,
then import it into Architect 3D.
Launching PhotoView Editor
2 Click to select PhotoView Editor and click the Launch button. The Open dialog box is displayed.
3 In the Look In box, type the name of the directory where your file is located. Or search for the file by
browsing folders or drives.
4 When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it and then click OK.
To open a PhotoView image in PhotoView Editor
1 Click to select the PhotoView image on the design window that you want to open in the PhotoView
Editor
3 Click to select PhotoView Editor and click the Launch button. The image opens in the PhotoView
Editor.
Editing Your PhotoView Image

With Punch! PhotoView Editor, you can draw shapes to color, fill, replicate, or add materials to your photograph.
The four drawing styles available in PhotoView Editor are:
Color Tools on this tab will create shapes that add a tint to your photograph.
Fill Tools on this tab will completely replace the original color with a color of your choice.
Replicate Tools on this tab copy what is on the original photograph, so it can be placed elsewhere.
Material Tools on this tab completely replace the original material with a material of your choice.
Editing Shapes
All shapes drawn in PhotoView Editor can be edited in a variety of ways. They can be moved specified amounts,
rotated, layered, edited, and even converted to other types of drawing shapes. Object-Level Editing is active by
default. Object-Level Editing, along with Point-Level Editing, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in
object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge of
the object is treated separately, as you edit.
To control layering
1 Click the Selection Tool and then right-click a shape to select it.
2 Click Bring to Front on the pop-up menu that is displayed to place the shape on the top of the other
shapes.
Click Send to Back on the pop-up menu that is displayed to place the shape behind the other
shapes.
To convert to another drawing style
1 Click the Selection Tool and then right-click a shape to select it.
385
Chapter
2 Click Convert To on the pop-up menu that is displayed and then click to select the type of feature
you want.
Editing Material Perspective

In addition to rotating, moving, and point-level editing, material shapes can be edited to conform to the perspective in
the photograph. Click a shape to select it. This will activate Perspective Editing Mode. In this mode, there will be
different colored controls that manipulate different things.
To adjust material perspective
Click to select the material you want to edit. The perspective handles are displayed.
Resize handles Red points control size and

shape of the material. Drag a corner to adjust
the material shape.
Material Perspective Green points control
perspective vanishing point. Drag a point to
narrow or widen the perspective.
Perspective Angle Blue arrow rotates to
adjust angle. Drag the arrow to rotate the
angle.
To specify a precise angle, right-click the
material and choose Change Material Angle,
then type the angle you want in the text box
and click OK.
Center line Yellow points adjust the material
section in view. Drag the points to position
the material view you want.
To flip material orientation
Right-click the material, then click Flip Material Orientation on the context menu that is displayed.
The material orientation is flipped in a clockwise direction.
To restore the material, right-click the material then click Restore Material Orientation to reset the
orientation back to the original direction.
To set the scale
Right-click the material, then click Change Material Scale on the context menu that is displayed.
Type the new percentage(s) in the text box, then click OK.
To reset perspective changes
Right-click the material, then click Reset Material Attributes on the context menu that is displayed.
File Management
With PhotoView Editor you can save your personalized image as a new file or you can overwrite the existing file.
Saving an image
1 Click File menu > Save Image as BMP. The Save Image dialog box is displayed.
2 Type a file name in the File Name text box and click OK. This saves an image of your edited file.
Overlays youve add are saved as part of the image.
Opening an overlay mask
1 Click File menu > Open Overlay Mask. The Open Overlay Mask dialog box is displayed.
2 In the File Name text box, type the name of the file you want to open, or search other folders or
drives.
File Management
3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.
4 Click OK. This opens an overlay design you previously saved.
Saving an overlay mask
1 Click File menu > Save Overlay Mask. The Save Overlay Mask dialog box is displayed.
2 Type a file name in the File Name text box and click OK. This saves the overlay design youve
added to the image. You can later open this overlay and edit it further, if needed.
Opening a custom color list
1 Click File menu > Open Custom Color List. The Open Color List dialog box is displayed.
2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open or search other folders or drives.
3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.
4 Click OK. This opens a colors palette you previously saved.
Saving a custom color list
Note: For information on creating custom colors, see To define a custom color, which begins on
page 88.
1 Click File menu > Save Custom Color List. The Save Color List dialog box is displayed.
2 Type a file name in the File Name text box and click OK. Changes to the Colors palette are saved.
387
Chapter
Chapter 29
Estimator
Architect 3D keeps track of building materials, as you design your home. Estimator continually and automatically tallies
your expenses and building materials. This information is presented in an editable, printable, exportable spreadsheet
format. Estimator also utilizes the Plan Tabs from Architect 3D, so you can easily find the materials for a specific part
of your design.
As you input the material costs for your area, Estimator calculates the subtotals of each size door and window, each
plant type, including sod, roofing materials, and roof trusses, and computes the grand total for the entire project.
You can even create custom pricelists, so you use appropriate vendors or wholesalers for specific parts of the job. This
may be especially useful if you plan to renovate just one or two rooms. Punch! Estimator calculates each room
separately, too.
Series.
Launching Estimator
Architect 3D includes an extremely versatile PowerTool called Estimator. Estimator inventories almost every feature of
your design. Prices may be higher during the peak building season and will depend on the part of the world where you
are building your new home. You can obtain specific costs from your local supplier or contractor.
389
29 Estimator
Chapter
Launching Estimator
1 Click Design menu > Launch PowerTool, then choose Estimator and click Launch. The Setup
Options window is displayed.
2 Edit the options for your estimate as needed and click OK to open the plan estimates.
Dry Wall Estimation By default, Estimator will estimate dry wall usage, without regard to where doors or
windows are placed. Choose Exclude Window and Door Area if you want to subtract those areas from
the calculation.
Wall Material Estimation By default, Estimator will make estimations, without regard to where doors or
windows are placed or whether or not the walls have base trim. Choose Exclude Window and Door Area
and/or Exclude Base Trim Area if you want to subtract those areas from the calculation.
Insulation By default, Estimator estimates insulation needed, without regard to where doors or windows
are placed. Choose Exclude Window and Door Area if you want to subtract those areas from the
calculation.
Calculate Roofing Squares By default, Estimator will estimate the number of roofing squares needed for
your design. Choose Off if you do not need this calculation.
Floor & Deck Estimation By default, Estimator makes floor and deck estimates without regard to where
cutout areas are placed. Choose Exclude Floor Cutout Area or Exclude Deck Cutout Area if you want to
subtract those areas from the calculation.
Customizing the Spreadsheet

You may find it easier to use or read the data, if you change the colors of specific areas of your spreadsheet. Architect
3D makes this easy. You can assign any color you want to certain parts of the spreadsheet.
Selecting a Plan Tab
Cells Background
Text
Schedule Headers
Category Headers
Unit Cost Cell
Total Row
To customize colors
1 Click Options menu > Set Colors. The Colors dialog box is displayed
showing the customizable sections of the estimate.
2 Click the color block next to the feature you want to customize. The
Color dialog box is displayed.
3 Click one of the Basic or Custom colors or click on the color spectrum
block to select a color.
4 (optional) Adjust the current Red, Green, and Blue values to create a
custom color.
5 (optional) Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a color,

then adjust the RGB values, if necessary.
6 Click OK. The color you defined is displayed on the color block on the
Colors dialog box.
7 Click OK. The color is applied to the spreadsheet.

To reset a color back to the default
1 Click Options menu > Set Colors. The Colors dialog box is displayed.
2 Click the Reset button next to the feature you want to reset to the default color. Then click OK.
(optional) Click the Reset All button to reset all colors then click OK.
Selecting a Plan Tab

Estimator will automatically display features and materials used on all plan tabs of your design. You can choose to
estimate specific areas of your design, for instance just the HVAC materials or just the materials for your deck.
To select a plan tab
Click the plan tab you want to use. The plan tab is selected and the materials list for that tab
appears.
(alternatively) Click View menu > Estimates then click the individual plan you want.
391
Chapter
29 Estimator
Calculating Construction Costs

Estimator automatically calculates the total square footage for each floor of your design. The Construction Cost Per
Square Foot is dependent upon variables specific to your area. You can obtain specific costs from your local supplier
or contractor.
To calculate construction costs
1 Click the Unit Cost cell (green cell) next to Construction Square Foot Cost.
2 Type the estimated cost.
3 Press ENTER. Architect 3D automatically calculates the total and places it in the grey-shaded cell
across from Total Cost.
Completing the Various Schedules

Estimator catalogs the features of your design that appear on each Plan Tab. From cubic yards of concrete, for a slab
foundation, to light switches, everything is displayed on individual lines and calculations are based upon prices that
you obtain from a building supply company near you.
To complete Estimator schedules
1 Click the green-shaded cell for the Unit Cost of each material or feature of your design.
2 Type the estimated cost.
3 Press ENTER. Architect 3D automatically calculates the total and displays it in the Total Cost
column, then keeps a running Grand Total of each schedule.
Note: Use the arrow keys, on your keyboard, to move around your spreadsheet.
Creating a Master Pricelist

Estimator saves the prices you enter in a master pricelist file to make it easy to create a new estimate, after making
alterations to your design. In addition, you can create individual pricelists for each building supply company, vendor, or
wholesaler that you make purchases from.
To store a master pricelist
1 Click View menu > Plan Cost List. The Filtered Cost List menu is displayed.
2 Type the costs from the source where you plan to purchase materials.
Exporting a Pricelist
3 Click Save as a Master when you have finished updating your prices. The Save As dialog box is
displayed.
4 Type a file name in the File Name text box and click Save. The file extension is added automatically.
(optional) If you want to save the drawing to a different drive or folder, click a different drive and
folder or type the complete path in the File Name text box. Click Save.
To open a master pricelist
1 Click View menu > Plan Cost List. The Filtered Cost List menu is displayed.
2 Click Open Master List. The Open dialog box is displayed.
3 Type a file name in the File Name text box or click to select the Master List you want to use. Click
Open.
Exporting a Pricelist
You can export the information contained in an Estimator spreadsheet so you can use the information in other
programs, such as Microsoft Excel or Quickbooks. You can even display your pricelist on the web!
To export a pricelist
1 Click File menu > Export then click either Excel File,
Comma Delimited, Tab Delimited, QuickBooks Item
List, or HTML. The Save As dialog box is displayed.
2 Type a file name in the File Name text box; the

extension is automatically added. Click Save.
Note: All necessary graphics are copied to the directory

where you save the HTML file. You will need to upload all files
to your web server to make them available to be viewed by others.
Printing a Pricelist
You can print pricelists any way you need them. There are many ways to customize your estimations.
To print a pricelist
1 Click File menu > Print. The Print Preview Setup dialog box is displayed.
393
Chapter
29 Estimator
2 Click to check the options you want to have printed and uncheck any options you dont want to print.
(optional) Click Printer Setup to specify which printer you want to use. For more information on
printer setup, see Printing Floor Plans, which begins on page 35.
(optional) Click Preview to see what the page will look like, before you actually print it.
3 Click Print when you have finished setting the options.
Chapter 30
Trim Designer
In much the same way that ornate trim pieces are milled from basic lumber, Punch! Trim Designer lets you fashion
trims by editing a basic shape. Modify one of the trims in Architect 3Ds libraries, or create one of your own, using Trim
Designers powerful image editing and management tools.
Series.
Launching Trim Designer
2 Click to select Trim Designer and click the Launch button. The Trim Designer is launched.
Managing Trim Designs

Trim Designer not only allows you to save new trims for use in your Punch! drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools for
organizing and managing trim libraries.
To open a new trim design
1 Click File menu > New Trim. The Trim Design Selection dialog bog is displayed.
395
30 Trim Designer
Chapter
2 Click to select one of the basic trim templates.

(optional) Type new values in the Width and Height text boxes.
3 Click OK.
To import an existing trim design
1 On the Properties Bar, click the down arrow next to Trims then select a Trim category from one of
the libraries. The Preview Bar changes to display trims in this library.
2 Double-click a trim design on the Preview Bar, to place it in the design window.
To save a new trim design
1 While nothing is selected in your design, click the Save Trim To Library button on the Properties
Bar. The Save Trim to Category dialog box is displayed.
(alternatively) Click File menu > Save Trim to Library.
Trim Category specifies the category where the trim is saved.

Click New to create a new trim category. Select a folder in which to create the new category, then type a
name for the new category and click OK. Fore more information on using content libraries, see Organizing
Trim Name is the unique name for the trim. New trim names can contain up to 44 characters.
Trim Description is the description of the trim. New trim descriptions can contain up to 78 characters.
Click OK to save the trim.
To export trim to 3D Custom Workshop
1 Click File menu > Export to Custom Workshop. The Custom Workshop Export dialog box is
displayed.
2 Type a name in the File name text box.

3 Specify the folder where you want the trim saved and then click Save.
Trim Properties
Trim Properties
When a segment is selected the trim properties are displayed on the Properties Bar. You can control curvature,
alignment, and switch between base and crown trim designs.
Align To Grid button aligns the selected point to the grid.
Design Mode options allow you to specify the trim as either Base Trim or Crown Trim.
Designing Custom Trims

Rather than drawing your custom base and crown trims, Trim Designer lets you create custom trims for your home
plan by reshaping a rectangular base shapein much the same way that trims are milled from boards. You can also
modify existing trims, from the Trim Library. Using standard editing tools to change the location, shape, or angle of
individual segments of the trim face, you can add graceful curves or carve precision angles into the face of your
custom trims.
To nudge a trim segment
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element.
2 Use the arrow keys on your keyboard, to nudge the selection.
(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Nudge and then click the direction (up, down, left,
right).
Note: For more information on adjusting the Nudge Rate, see Controlling Drawing Settings, on
page 398.
To resize trim segments
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select a trim segment.
2 Click a trim segment to select it.
3 Press the mouse button, drag the segment to a new location, then release the mouse
button.
To resize the entire trim object
1 While nothing is selected in your design, click the Resize Trim button on the Properties Bar. The
Trim Size dialog box is displayed.
2 Type new values in the Width and Height text boxes and click OK.
To reshape corners
Use the fillet and chamfer tools to reshape corner points.
397
Chapter
30 Trim Designer
Fillet
Corner Tool (For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which begins on page 241.)
Inverted
Fillet Corner Tool (For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which begins on
page 241.)
Chamfer
Corner Tool (For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which begins on page
241.)
To add or remove points
Use the Add and Remove points tools to reshape segments.

Add
Point Tool (For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which begins on page 241.)
Remove
Point Tool (For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which begins on page 241.)
Flipping Objects
The Flip function takes the original trim object and reverses it vertically.
To flip an object vertically
Click Edit menu > Flip Vertically.

There are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you draw, select, or modify trim segments in Trim Designer.
To adjust the nudge rate
On the Properties Bar, type a new value in the Nudge Rate text box, then press ENTER.
To control automatic dimensioning
Click Options menu > Automatic Dimensioning to insert a dimension for any trim segment you
draw. Automatic Dimensioning is enabled when a checkmark is displayed next to the menu option.
To reset the view
Click the Reset View button (or press CTRL+E). Your plan is reset to the original, default
view.
Viewing your Trim Design in 3D
Viewing your Trim Design in 3D

Trim Designer displays your trim design in 3D in the upper right corner of the
Trim Designer window. You control the 3D view in the same way you control a
3D View rendering, using Fly-Around mode.
To view your trim in 3D
Drag the Fly-Around pointer around inside the 3D Trim Designer

window and watch the view move dynamically.
To zoom in and out in 3D, press and hold the right mouse button to
change the viewpoint.
To increase or decrease the helicopter speed
Click View menu > Helicopter Speed, then select a speed setting from the submenu that is
displayed.
Note: The faster the viewing speed, the lower the quality of the rendered 3D image.
Click the Reset 3D View Tool.

(alternatively) Click View menu > Reset 3D View.
To view a trim design using ClearView
Click the Toggle ClearView Tool in the 3D view window.

(alternatively) Click View menu > Render ClearView. When a checkmark is visible,
ClearView is enabled.
To render a trim design in 3D final quality
Click the Render Final Quality Tool in the 3D view window.
Click View menu > 3D Final Quality and choose one of the options.

Placing Custom Trims In Your Punch! Drawing

Once youve created your own custom trims in the Trim Designer, you can easily apply them back to your Architect 3D
project. Simply navigate to the library where you stored the new trim and drag the image to a surface in your 3D View
window.
To apply custom trims
1 Click the Libraries tab and choose Trim from the Libraries drop-down menu. The Trim Type libraries
become available.
399
Chapter
30 Trim Designer
2 Click the Trim Type library drop-down menu,

then choose the trim library you want. The trim
style categories are displayed.
3 Click the Categories drop-down menu and

choose the Trim category you want. Its contents
appear in the Preview Bar.
4 On the Preview Bar, click the custom trim you

want to apply; hold down the mouse button and
drag it onto a surface of your home in the 3D
View window. The custom trim you selected is
applied.
Chapter 31
Section Detailer
You can store even more details of your home design, without cluttering your project, using Section Detailer. Create a
separate detailed drawing of built-in book shelving or an electrical sub-panel, then simply place a reference marker to
the detail in your main project.
Series.
Launching Section Detailer
2 Click to select Section Detailer and click the Launch button. The Section Detailer is launched and
the Choose Detail window is displayed.
3 Choose the Style you want, type a name in the Detail Name text box, and choose the link size, then
click OK.
Use the drawing tools, text, and symbols to create your detail.
Managing Section Details

Section Detailer not only allows you to save Details for use in your 2D drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools for
managing how those details are displayed in the 2D drawing.
401
Chapter
31 Section Detailer
To change a details link properties
1 Click the Detail Properties button. The Detail Link Style dialog box appears.
(alternatively) Click Project menu > Detail Link Properties.
2 Click one of the Styles to choose the detail link that will appear in your drawing.
3 Type a name in the Detail Name text box. This is limited to five characters.
4 Click a Detail Link Size to choose the size of the detail link that will appear in your drawing.
(optional) Select the Thick Line checkbox to set the line weight in your detail drawing to thick.
5 Click OK.
To open a new detail
1 Click the Switch Working Detail button. The Choose Detail dialog box is displayed.
(alternatively) Click Project menu > Switch Details.
2 Select the Create New Detail Link checkbox.

3 Click one of the Styles to choose the detail link that will appear in your drawing.
4 Type a name in the Detail Name text box. This is limited to five characters.
5 Click a Detail Link Size to choose the size of the detail link that will appear in your drawing.
Using 2D Drawing Tools to Draw Details
(optional) Select the Thick Line checkbox to set the line weight in your detail drawing to thick.
6 Click OK.
To open an existing detail
1 Click the Switch Working Detail button. The Choose Detail dialog box is displayed.
(alternatively) Click Project menu > Switch Details.
2 Under Detail Link Name, choose the name of the detail you want to open and then click OK.
Using 2D Drawing Tools to Draw Details

Section Detailer features a full array 2D CAD drawing and editing tools. You can create details from scratch with text or
the drawing tools. Or you can create new details by adding CAD geometry to existing symbols.
Tip: When drawing multiple instances of a CAD component, be sure to turn off Auto Reset. When Auto Reset Tools
is unchecked, you can draw concurrent CAD components without selecting the corresponding CAD tool each time. For
more information, see Controlling Drawing Settings, which begins on page 408.
Adding 2D Symbols to a Detail

You can use the contents of the Symbols libraries to create details. For information on navigating the Symbols libraries
and adding them to your design, see in the section 2D Symbols Library, on page 76.
Using Rules and Fills

You can control the color and thickness (weight) of the lines or fills of the CAD shapes in your detail drawing.
For more information, see Using Different Lines and Fills, which begins on page 239.
To set the fill to gradient
1 Click Options menu > Fill > Gradients. The Gradient Fills dialog box is displayed.
2 Click one of the gradient patterns to select it.

3 Click the dark color icon on the left side of the gradient display. The Color dialog box is displayed.
403
Chapter
31 Section Detailer
4 Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a color, then adjust the values, if necessary.
(optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values to create a custom color.
5 Click OK to set the first color in the gradient.

6 Repeat steps 3 through 3 to set the second gradient color.
7 Click OK.
Adding Text to Details

Use text to add information to your detail. For example, you might specify a model number or a specific
feature in your detail. Section Detailer gives you the flexibility to place text anywhere in your drawing using
different formatting techniques for each text instance.
For more information, see Text Font, which begins on page 56.
Using Dimensioning Tools

A number of dimensioning tools are available to help with precise drawing as you create detail sections.
For more information, see Dimensioning, which begins on page 59.
Editing Section Detail Components

You can move, rotate, and modify components using the array of editing tools in Section Detailer. The following
options are available for editing your design:
Editing Section Detail Components
To scale objects
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the object.
2 Click the Resize Selected Tool. The Scale Selection dialog box appears.
(alternatively) Click Options menu > Scale Selection.
3 Choose either Object Size or Percentage, then enter values to scale the object.
4 In the Scale From section, choose a location to use as the base point during the scaling operation.
For instance, clicking Bottom Right means that location will remain constant.
5 Click OK.
To skew objects
2 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Skew Tool.
3 Click a corner point of the element; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer in the
direction that you want the element to be slanted. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as
you draw.
4 Release the mouse to stop skewing the element.
To trim objects
2 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Trim Tool.
405
Chapter
31 Section Detailer
3 Click the point on the segment where you want to trim (or break) the element into two separate
segments.
To join arcs, lines, or polylines
1 Click the Selection Tool, then hold down SHIFT and click to select each component that you want
to be joined.
Note: The end points of each component must be nearby for those components to be joined. You
can increase or decrease the necessary distance by changing the Join Sensitivity, see Controlling
Drawing Settings.
2 On the Standard toolbar, click the Join Tool. The components are joined into a polyline.
To place an element on top of another element
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to place on top.
2 Click the Bring To Front button.
(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Bring To Front.
To place an element behind another element
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to place on the bottom.
2 Click the Send To Back button.
(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Send To Back.
To clear elements
Right-click the element and choose Clear from the context menu.
Flipping Elements
The Flip function takes the original element and reverses it either horizontally or vertically.
To flip horizontally
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to flip.
2 Click the Flip Horizontal button.
(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Flip > Horizontal.
To flip vertically
2 Click the Flip Vertical button.
(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Flip > Vertical.
Mirroring Elements
Mirror works similarly to the Flip function. The difference is that mirror leaves the original and makes a duplicate. Mirror
creates two identical elements facing one another.
To mirror horizontally
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to mirror.
2 Click the Mirror Horizontal button.
(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Mirror > Horizontal.
Duplicating Elements
To mirror vertically
2 Click the Mirror Vertical button.
(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Mirror > Vertical.
Duplicating Elements
Similar to cutting and pasting, the duplicate feature creates an exact copy of the element you select. In the Duplicate
Offsets dialog box, you can specify the number and specific offset of a series of duplicates.
To create a duplicate
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to duplicate.
2 Click Edit menu > Duplicate Object (or press CTRL+D).
To create a series of duplicates
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to duplicate.
2 Click Edit menu > Duplicate Offsets. The Duplicate Offsets dialog box is displayed.
3 Type the horizontal and vertical offsets and the number of duplicates.
Note: These variables control the distance apart that the duplicates are placed.
4 Click OK. The element is duplicated at the offset you defined.
407
Chapter
31 Section Detailer
Grouping Elements
By defining a Group, you create a set of selected elements that are then treated as one item. You can have unlimited
groups in a drawing.
To control groups
1 Press and hold SHIFT and then click each element that you want to be included in the group.
2 On the Control toolbar, click the Group Tool. The selections are grouped as one element.
Click the Ungroup Tool to ungroup a set of elements.
(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Group or Ungroup.
Locking Elements
You can protect CAD components or symbols from accidental modifications by locking them. You can have unlimited
locked elements in a drawing.
To control locks
1 Click to select the element you want to edit.

(optional) Hold down SHIFT and click to select multiple elements.
2 On the Control toolbar, click the Lock Tool to lock the selection(s) in place.
Click the Unlock Tool to unlock the selection(s).
(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Lock or Unlock.

There are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you draw, select, or modify CAD components and symbols.
The Preferences dialog box lets you modify a variety of settings, including the number of sides on a multigon or the
sensitivity of snap or join tools.
Tools along the bottom of the drawing window allow you to draw parallel segments, switch between object and point
selection modes or center and corner drawing modes.
Drawing Preferences
Drawing preferences are default settings that affect all tools and objects as your draw. These settings are controlled in
the Preferences dialog box.
Multigon Sides controls the number of sides on a selected

multigon and changes the number of sides with which
multigons are drawn.
Curve Smoothness defines the default curvature. Lower

values result in less curvature.
Zoom Percentage defines the amount of magnification that is

applied each time you click the Zoom Tool.
Scrolling Speed allows you to increase or decrease the rate

at which the drawing window moves when you click the scroll
arrows.
Snap Tool & Selection Sensitivity allows you to increase or decrease the snap radius. A lower value means that
you must click closer to an element to snap to or select it.
Join Sensitivity allows you to Increase or decrease the join radius. A lower value means that you must position
elements closer to join them.
Auto Reset Tools checkbox controls tool behavior. When deselected, you can draw concurrent CAD components
without selecting the corresponding CAD tool each time; when selected the tool resets to inactive after you use it.
To change drawing preferences
1 Click Options menu > Preferences. The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
2 Edit the preferences you want and then click OK.
Drawing Scale
The drawing scale defines how the details on the screen relate to the actual size. When adjusting the drawing scale,
you can choose to update existing elements in your design by rescaling them to reflect the new scale.
Screen Units defines the size of the objects on the screen that correlates to a
real-world size. Higher values in the screen units section make it easier to draw
small details.
World Units defines the actual size of objects in the real world that correlates
to the screen size. Higher values in the world units section make it easier to
draw large details.
Rescale Objects checkbox updates existing objects to the new scale when
selected; when deselected existing objects are unaffected by changes to the
scale.
To change the drawing scale
1 Click Project menu > Drawing Scale. The Drawing Scale dialog box is displayed.
2 Edit the scale units and settings as needed and then click OK.
Paper Size
The drawing area is determined by the paper size setting. Depending on your needs, you can adjust the paper size so
your design is created on a realistic page. You can choose one of the four output styles, then select a standard size
from the corresponding drop down menu, or choose to define a custom size.
409
Chapter
31 Section Detailer
To change the paper size
1 Click Project menu > Paper Size. The Paper Size dialog box is displayed.
2 Choose an output style and size or choose Custom and define the width, height, and unit of
measurement.
3 Click OK.
To display the drawing pages
Click Project menu > Draw Page Breaks. When a checkmark is visible page breaks are enabled
Drawing Origin Position

By default the drawing origin is positioned at 0,0. You can change the position of the origin by selecting a point or by
manually defining its position along the horizontal and vertical axis.
To display the drawing axis
Click Project menu > Draw Axis. The axis lines are dotted lines drawn through the origin. When a
checkmark is visible the axis is visible.
To set the drawing origin by clicking a point
Right-click in the drawing area where you want the origin and choose Set Origin from the context
menu. The origin is repositioned to that point.
To move the drawing origin by defining X and Y
1 Click Project menu > Move Origin. The Move Origin dialog box is displayed.
2 Type a new value in the Horizontal and Vertical text boxes and then click Move. The drawing origin
is moved by the horizontal and vertical increment you specified.
(optional) Click Reset to reset the origin to 0,0.
To change the axis color
1 Click Project menu > Axis Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.
Drawing Parallel Segments
(optional) Adjust the current Red, Green, and Blue values to create a custom color.
3 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the axis.

To change the drawing color
1 Click Project menu > Drawing Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.
3 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the drawing.

To change the background color
1 Click Project menu > Background Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.
3 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the drawing background.

You can draw one or more parallel segments for any CAD component. Use the Parallel dialog box to specify the
number of parallel segments, as well as their distance and direction from the original.
Inside, Outside, and Center specify the direction for the parallel segment.
Parallel Width defines the distance between the original and parallel segments.
Group checkbox allows you to automatically group the original and parallel segments.
When selected, the segments are grouped; when deselected they are not.
To control the settings for parallel segments
1 Click Options menu > Parallel. The Parallel dialog box is displayed.
2 Choose a direction to draw the offset parallel and then type a new value in the
Parallel Width text box. This controls the distance between the original and parallel
segments.
(optional) Select the Group checkbox to automatically group the original and
parallel segments.
3 Click OK.
To enable/disable parallel segments
Click Turn On Draw Parallel in the lower left corner of the window. When a single line is
visible parallel segments are disabled.
Click Turn Off Draw Parallel in the lower left corner of the window. When a double line is
visible parallel segments are enabled.
411
Chapter
31 Section Detailer
Using Object or Point Selection Modes

Object Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection, along with point selection, controls how
your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole.
If you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately, as you edit.
In point selection mode, you are able to resize or reshape an object by moving one of its individual points. While it is
easy to move an entire object in object selection mode, it is much more convenient to handle detailed edits, using point
selection mode.
For more information, see Controlling Selection Mode, which begins on page 463.
Drawing from Corner or Center

You can draw a CAD component from corner to corner or from center to corner. Draw from Corner
makes drawing cabinets, tables, and most other angular components much easier. Draw from Corner
works with the rectangle, oval, and line/plane tools only.
For more information, see Drawing from Corner or Center, which begins on page 441.

curve assigned to them. With the Unsmooth feature it is easy to create angular shapes and with Curve Tension you
very little tension being applied, while specifying 20 is the maximum amount allowed and causes a greatlyexaggerated curve.
For more information, see Changing Curve Tension, which begins on page 238.
1 Click to select an element.

2 Click the Smooth/Unsmooth Selected button then click Smooth. The Tension dialog box is
displayed.
(alternatively) Click Options menu > Tension.
3 Type the amount of tension that you want and then click OK. The Curve Tension you specified is
applied.
Changing Grid Settings

By default, the grid is visible and set at twelve inches. This way you can visualize that each large square in the
Design window is one (1) square foot. By customizing the grid, you can design to fit your specific needs. In
addition, by turning the Snap Grid on and off, you will be able to make detailed placement of the detail
components simple.
For more information, see Using the Grid, which begins on page 52.
Using Snaps to Draw CAD Components
To control grid visibility
Click the Grid On/Off Toggle at the lower left of the window. If Grid Visible is checked,
it is displayed. If unchecked, the grid is hidden from view.
(alternatively) Click Project menu > Grid > Grid Visible.
To turn off the snap grid
Click the Snap Grid On/Off Toggle, at the lower left of the window or on the Project
menu, click Grid, Snap to Grid. If Snap to Grid is checked Snap to Grid is on. If
unchecked, Snap to Grid is off.
To change the grid color
1 Click Project menu > Grid Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.
3 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the drawing grid.

Architect 3D includes the power of snaps. With snaps, you can define exactly what distance CAD components are
placed from other CAD components. You can TAB through the Snaps Toolbar. Each time you press TAB, the next
mode.
For more information, see Using Snaps to Draw Components, which begins on page 306.
To snap a CAD component to the drawing origin
1 Click one of the CAD tools.

2 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Drawing Origin Tool, or press TAB to move
through the tools on the Snaps toolbar.
3 Click in the Section Detailer window. The CAD component will snap to the drawing origin.
Note: For information on moving the drawing origin, see Controlling Drawing Settings, which
begins on page 408.
Viewing your Drawing

The Section Detailer supports the same zoom and pan capabilities you can use when viewing your design in 2D.
For more information, see Zooming In and Out in 2D, on page 42 and Panning Across the 2D Drawing, on page 42.
413
Chapter
31 Section Detailer
Exporting and Importing a DXF/DWG File

You may find it useful to share files with your architect, builder and others involved in your design process. Importing
and exporting your detail drawings to DXF or DWG format will make sharing your files simple.
To export a DXF/DWG drawing
1 Click File menu > Export DXF/DWG. The Export Options dialog box is displayed.
2 Choose a format and a version for your file.

3 Click OK. The Export DXF/DWG dialog box is displayed.
4 Type a file name in the File Name text box. Architect 3D automatically adds the DXF or DWG
extension.
5 Click Save.
To import a DXF/DWG drawing
1 Click File menu > Import DXF/DWG. The Import DXF dialog box is displayed.
(optional) Select the Group Objects on Import checkbox to group all elements in the DXF/DWG
together.
3 Click Open.
Exporting and Importing a DXF/DWG File
To import a Symbol
1 Click File menu > Import Symbol. The Import Symbol dialog box is displayed.
(optional) Select the Rescale to Current checkbox to use the scale currently set.
3 Click Open.
415
Chapter
31 Section Detailer
Chapter 32
Symbol Editor
Architect 3D Symbol Editor lets you create custom symbols, or modify existing symbols, for use in your 2D drawing
plans. Using standard 2D design tools, you can draw the symbol, save it to a library, and even record a brief
description of the symbol. You can manage your custom symbols, and the entire library of Architect 3D symbols, using
the Symbol Organizer.
Series.
Launching Symbol Editor
2 Click to select Symbol Editor and click the Launch button. The Symbol Editor is launched.
Managing Symbols
Symbol Editor not only allows you to save new symbols for use in your 2D drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools for
organizing symbols and managing symbol categories.
417
32 Symbol Editor
Chapter
To save a new symbol
1 Click the Add Symbol to Library button. The Save Symbol to Library dialog box is
displayed.
Symbol Category specifies the category where the symbol is saved.

Click New to create a new category. Select a folder in which to create the new category, then type a name
for the new category and click OK.
Symbol Name is the unique name for the symbol. Names can contain up to 44 characters.
Symbol Description is the description of the symbol. Descriptions can contain up to 78 characters.
Click OK to save the symbol.
Using 2D Drawing Tools to Draw Symbols

Symbol Editor features a full array 2D drawing and editing tools. You can create symbols from scratch with text or the
drawing tools. Or you can create new symbols by adding geometry to existing symbols.
Tip: When drawing multiple instances of a CAD component, be sure turn off Auto Reset. When Auto Reset Tools is
unchecked, you can draw concurrent CAD components without selecting the corresponding CAD tool each time. For
more information see in the section Controlling Drawing Settings, on page 422.
Adding Text to Symbols

Use text to add information to your symbol. For example, you might specify a model number or a specific feature in
your symbol. Symbol Editor gives you the flexibility to place text anywhere in your drawing, using different formatting
techniques for each text instance.
For more information, see Adding Text to Details, which begins on page 404.
Using Rules and Fills

You can change the thickness (weight) of the lines or fills of the CAD shapes.
For more information, see Using Different Lines and Fills, which begins on page 239.
Using Dimensioning Tools

The Leader Dimension Tool is available to help with precise drawing as you create symbols. For more
information, see Leader Dimension, which begins on page 61.
Editing Symbol Editor Elements
Editing Symbol Editor Elements

You can move, rotate, and modify elements using the array of editing tools in Symbol Editor. The following options are
available for editing your design:
To scale objects
2 Click the Resize Selected Tool. The Scale Selection dialog box appears.
(alternatively) Click Options menu > Scale Selection.
3 Choose either Object Size or Percentage, then enter values to scale the element.
4 In the Scale From section, choose a location to use as the basepoint, during the scaling operation.
For instance, clicking Bottom Right means that location will remain constant.
5 Click OK.
To skew objects
2 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Skew Tool.
3 Click a corner point of the element; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer in the
direction that you want the element to be slanted. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as
you draw.
4 Release the mouse to stop skewing the element.
419
Chapter
32 Symbol Editor
To trim objects
2 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Trim Tool.
3 Click the point on the segment where you want to trim (or break) the element into two
separate segments.
To join arcs, lines, or polylines
1 Click the Selection Tool, then hold down SHIFT and click to select each element that you want to
be joined.
Note: The end points of each element must be nearby for those elements to be joined. You can
increase or decrease the necessary distance by changing the Join Sensitivity, see Controlling
Drawing Settings.
2 On the Standard toolbar, click the Join Tool. The elements are joined into a polyline.
To place an element on top of another element
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to place on top.
2 Click the Bring To Front button.
(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Bring To Front.
To place an element behind another element
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the element you want to place on the bottom.
2 Click the Send To Back button.
(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Send To Back.
To clear elements
Right-click the element and choose Clear from the context menu.
Flipping Elements
The Flip function takes the original element and reverses it either horizontally or vertically.
To flip horizontally
2 Click the Flip Horizontal button.
(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Flip > Horizontal.
To flip vertically
Mirroring Elements
2 Click the Flip Vertical button.

(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Flip > Vertical.
Mirroring Elements
Mirror works similarly to the Flip function. The difference is that mirror leaves the original and makes a duplicate. Mirror
creates two identical elements facing one another.
To mirror horizontally
2 Click the Mirror Horizontal button.
(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Mirror > Horizontal.
To mirror vertically
2 Click the Mirror Vertical button.
(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Mirror > Vertical.
Duplicating Objects
Similar to cutting and pasting, the duplicate feature creates an exact copy of the object you select. In the Duplicate
Offsets dialog box, you can specify the number and specific offset of a series of duplicates.
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the object you want to duplicate.
2 Click Edit menu > Duplicate Object (or press CTRL+D).
To create a series of duplicate objects
1 Click the Selection Tool and then click to select the object you want to duplicate.
2 Click Edit menu > Duplicate Offsets. The Duplicate Offsets dialog box is displayed.
421
Chapter
32 Symbol Editor
3 Type the horizontal and vertical offsets and the number of duplicates.
Note: These variables control the distance apart that the duplicates are placed.
4 Click OK. The object is duplicated at the offset you defined.
Grouping Elements
By defining a Group, you create a set of selected elements that are then treated as one item. You can have unlimited
groups in a drawing.
To control groups
1 Press and hold SHIFT and then click each element that you want to be included in the group.
2 On the Control toolbar, click the Group Tool. The selections are grouped as one element.
Click the Ungroup Tool to ungroup a set of elements.
(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Group or Ungroup.
Locking Elements
You can protect CAD components or symbols from accidental modifications by locking them. You can have unlimited
locked elements in a drawing.
To control locks
1 Click to select the element you want to edit.

(optional) Hold down SHIFT and click to select multiple elements.
(alternatively) Click Arrange menu > Lock or Unlock.

There are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you draw, select, or modify CAD components and symbols.
The Preferences dialog box lets you modify a variety of settings, including the number of sides on a multigon or the
sensitivity of snap or join tools.
Tools along the bottom of the drawing window allow you to draw parallel segments, switch between object and point
selection modes or center and corner drawing modes.
Drawing Preferences
Drawing preferences are default settings that affect all tools and elements as your draw. These settings are controlled
in the Preferences dialog box.
Multigon Sides controls the number of sides on a selected

multigon and changes the number of sides with which
multigons are drawn.
Curve Smoothness defines the default curvature. Lower

values result in less curvature.
Zoom Percentage defines the amount of magnification that is

applied each time you click the Zoom Tool.
Scrolling Speed allows you to increase or decrease the rate

at which the drawing window moves when you click the scroll
arrows.
Snap Tool & Selection Sensitivity allows you to increase or decrease the snap radius. A lower value means that
you must click closer to an element to snap to or select it.
Join Sensitivity allows you to Increase or decrease the join radius. A lower value means that you must position
elements closer to join them.
Auto Reset Tools checkbox controls tool behavior. When deselected, you can draw concurrent CAD components
without selecting the corresponding CAD tool each time; when selected the tool resets to inactive after you use it.
To change drawing preferences
1 Click Options menu > Preferences. The Preferences dialog box is displayed.
2 Edit the preferences you want and then click OK.
Drawing Scale
The drawing scale defines how the details on the screen relate to the actual size. When adjusting the drawing scale,
you can choose to update existing elements in your design by rescaling them to reflect the new scale.
Screen Units defines the size of the objects on the screen that correlates to a
real-world size. Higher values in the screen units section make it easier to draw
small details.
World Units defines the actual size of objects in the real world that correlates
to the screen size. Higher values in the world units section make it easier to
draw large details.
Rescale Objects checkbox updates existing objects to the new scale when
selected; when deselected existing objects are unaffected by changes to the
scale.
To change the drawing scale
1 Click Project menu > Drawing Scale. The Drawing Scale dialog box is displayed.
2 Edit the scale units and settings as needed and then click OK.
Paper Size
The drawing area is determined by the paper size setting. Depending on your needs, you can adjust the paper size so
your design is created on a realistic page. You can choose one of the four output styles, then select a standard size
from the corresponding drop down menu, or choose to define a custom size.
423
Chapter
32 Symbol Editor
To change the paper size
1 Click Project menu > Paper Size. The Paper Size dialog box is displayed.
2 Choose an output style and size or choose Custom and define the width, height, and unit of
measurement.
3 Click OK.
To display the drawing pages
Click Project menu > Draw Page Breaks. When a checkmark is visible page breaks are enabled
Drawing Origin Position

By default the drawing origin is positioned at 0,0. You can change the position of the origin by selecting a point or by
manually defining its position along the horizontal and vertical axis.
To display the drawing axis
Click Project menu > Draw Axis. The axis lines are dotted lines drawn through the origin. When a
checkmark is visible the axis is visible.
To set the drawing origin by clicking a point
Right-click in the drawing area where you want the origin and choose Set Origin from the context
menu. The origin is repositioned to that point.
To move the drawing origin by defining X and Y
1 Click Project menu > Move Origin. The Move Origin dialog box is displayed.
2 Type a new value in the Horizontal and Vertical text boxes and then click Move. The drawing origin
is moved by the horizontal and vertical increment you specified.
(optional) Click Reset to reset the origin to 0,0.
To change the axis color
1 Click Project menu > Axis Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.
3 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the axis.

To change the drawing color
1 Click Project menu > Drawing Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.
3 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the drawing.

To change the background color
1 Click Project menu > Background Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.
3 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the drawing background.

You can draw one or more parallel segments for any CAD component. Use the Parallel dialog box to specify the
number of parallel segments, as well as their distance and direction from the original.
Inside, Outside, and Center specify the direction for the parallel segment.
Parallel Width defines the distance between the original and parallel segments.
Group checkbox allows you to automatically group the original and parallel segments.
When selected, the segments are grouped; when deselected they are not.
To control the settings for parallel segments
1 Click Options menu > Parallel. The Parallel dialog box is displayed.
2 Choose a direction to draw the offset parallel and then type a new value in the
Parallel Width text box. This controls the distance between the original and parallel
segments.
(optional) Select the Group checkbox to automatically group the original and
parallel segments.
3 Click OK.
To enable/disable parallel segments
Click Turn On Draw Parallel in the lower left corner of the window. When a single line is
visible parallel segments are disabled.
Click Turn Off Draw Parallel in the lower left corner of the window. When a double line is
visible parallel segments are enabled.
425
Chapter
32 Symbol Editor
Using Object or Point Selection Modes

Object Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection, along with point selection, controls how
your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole.
If you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately, as you edit.
In point selection mode, you are able to resize or reshape an object by moving one of its individual points. While it is
easy to move an entire object in object selection mode, it is much more convenient to handle detailed edits using point
selection mode.
For more information, see Controlling Selection Mode, which begins on page 463.

You can draw a CAD component from corner to corner or from center to corner. Draw from Corner
makes drawing cabinets, tables, and most other angular elements much easier. Draw from Corner
works with the rectangle, oval, and line/plane tools only.
For more information, see Drawing from Corner or Center, which begins on page 441.

curve assigned to them. With the Unsmooth feature it is easy to create angular shapes and with Curve Tension you
very little tension being applied, while specifying 20 is the maximum amount allowed and causes a greatlyexaggerated curve.
1 Click an element to select it.

2 Click the Smooth/Unsmooth Selected button then click Smooth. The Tension dialog box is
displayed.
(alternatively) Click Options menu > Tension.
3 Type the amount of tension that you want and then click OK. The Curve Tension you specified is
applied.

By default, the grid is visible and set at twelve inches. This way you can visualize that each large square in the
Design window is one (1) square foot. By customizing the grid, you can design to fit your specific needs. In
addition, by turning the Snap Grid on and off, you will be able to make detailed placement of the symbol
components simple.
For more information, see Using the Grid, which begins on page 52.
To control grid visibility
Click the Grid On/Off Toggle at the lower left of the window or on the Project menu,
click Grid, Grid Visible. If Grid Visible is checked it is displayed. If unchecked, the grid
is hidden from view.
To turn off the snap grid
Click the Snap Grid On/Off Toggle at the lower left of the window or on the Project
menu, click Grid, Snap to Grid. If Snap to Grid is checked, Snap to Grid is on. If
unchecked, Snap to Grid is off.
To change the grid color
1 Click Project menu > Grid Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.
3 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the drawing grid.

Architect 3D includes the power of snaps. With snaps, you can define exactly what distance CAD components are
placed from other CAD components. You can TAB through the Snaps Toolbar. Each time you press TAB, the next
mode.
For more information, see Using Snaps to Draw Components, which begins on page 306.
To snap a CAD Component to the drawing origin
1 Click one of the CAD tools.

2 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Drawing Origin Tool, or press TAB to move through the
tools on the Snaps toolbar.
3 Click in the design window. The CAD component will snap to the drawing origin.
Note: For information on moving the drawing origin, see Controlling Drawing Settings, which
begins on page 422.
Viewing your Drawing

The Symbol Editor supports the same zoom and pan capabilities you can use when viewing your design in 2D.
For more information, see Zooming In and Out in 2D, on page 42 and Panning Across the 2D Drawing, on page 42.
Exporting and Importing

There may be times that you want your symbol exported to DXF/DWG format.
To export a DXF/DWG symbol
1 Click File menu > Export DXF/DWG. The Export Options dialog box is displayed.
427
Chapter
32 Symbol Editor
2 Choose a format and a version for your file.

3 Click OK. The Export DXF/DWG dialog box is displayed.
4 Type a file name in the File Name text box. Symbol Editor automatically adds the extension.
5 Click Save.
To import a DXF/DWG symbol
1 Click File menu > Import DXF/DWG. The Import DXF dialog box is displayed.
(optional) Select the Group Objects on Import checkbox to group all elements in the DXF/DWG
together.
3 Click Open. The Scale menu is displayed.
4 Choose the scale you want to use and then click OK.
Part 6
3D Custom Workshop
Chapter 33:
Chapter 34:
Chapter 35:
Chapter 36:
Before You Draw in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Drawing 2D & 3D Entities . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing 2D & 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
431
441
463
477
Chapter 33
Before You Draw in 3D

When you start 3D Custom Workshop, a new blank drawing grid is displayed with the floor grid active. The foreground
and background colors are defined within 3D Custom Workshop. The unit of measurement (inches or metric) is defined
in the home design program. If you start 3D Custom Workshop by double clicking an object in your home design
program, that element is displayed on the design window.
If you are returning to work on an existing drawing, you must open to display it on the screen. Opening a file involves
clicking Open on the File menu and specifying the name of the file you want to open. When you open a file, 3D Custom
Workshop displays it in a new window.
The changes you make to an object occur only in your computers memory, until you save them. To preserve a
drawing for later use, you must save it to a file. If you want to save a drawing, using its current name or if you want to
save a new, untitled drawing, use Save. If you want to save a drawing with a new name, use Save As.
Opening Files and Objects

Opening a new file creates a new blank drawing grid with the floor grid active. You can open a saved Custom
Workshop file at anytime to further edit the design. Additionally, you can open 3D object from the Furnishings library to
edit, save, or export.
To open a new file
Click File menu > New (or press CTRL+N). An empty drawing grid is displayed.
431
Chapter
33 Before You Draw in 3D
Note: If you were working on an object, you will be prompted to save your work.
To open an existing file
1 Click File menu > Open (or press CTRL+O). The Open dialog box is displayed.
2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open or search for the file by browsing
folders or drives.

To open 3D objects using drag-and-drop
1 Click the Furnishings tab. The Preview Bar displays furnishing

objects.
2 Click the Categories drop-down menu and choose the Library tab
and category you want to view. Its contents are displayed in the
Preview Bar.
Some of the categories are organized into sub-categories. Click to
expand a category to see its contents. For more information on
working with the content libraries, see Organizing Library Content,
on page 69.
3 Scroll through the available objects in the Preview Bar and dragand-drop the one you want to place onto the design window or 3D
view window.
Saving a File
When you open a file, 3D Custom Workshop copies the file to your computers memory. As you work, you modify the
copy stored in memory. Any system failure or loss of power destroys that copy. To save your work permanently, you
must save it to a file on a disk. A good rule of thumb is to save every 15 minutes or after youve completed any work
you wouldnt want to redo.
When you click the Save command, 3D Custom Workshop saves the active drawing, using the name and location you
last gave it. You can create more than one version of a drawing or save copies on another disk for safekeeping. You
can save each version under a different name or you can save them under the same name in different folders or on
different disks.
To save an existing file
Click File menu > Save (or press CTRL+S).
To save a new, unnamed file
2 In the File Name text box, type a name and then click Save. 3D Custom Workshop automatically
adds the POB extension.
Saving to a Content Library

In addition to saving your drawing file, you can save the object youve created or edited to one of the User Object
Libraries or User component Libraries.
The object libraries are available from the Furnishings tab in the main application. In order to save the object to an
object User Library, the User Library must already exist. For more information on working with libraries, see
The component libraries are available when select drawing tools are active; for example, when the Door Tool is active,
a component library of door styles is available on the Properties tab.
Exporting Files
To save an object to an object library
1 Click File menu > Save to Object Library or Save to Component Library. The Save to Library
2 Choose the Object Library options and then click Save.
Library Location specifies the

library where you want the object
or component saved. The library
you select is the library from
which you can add the object or
component to your design. Click
the New button to create a new
User Library folder. For more
information on working with the
content libraries, see Organizing
Object Name is the name that
appears in the Status Bar when
you hover over the object in the Preview Bar.
Object Description is the text describing the object. This appears in the Object Description dialog box.
Keywords are the search terms that make the object easy to find when searching for objects.
To view recently saved information, click the arrow button to the right of the text box.
Ceiling mounted checkbox specifies that the object should be positioned on the ceiling surface. By
default, objects are positioned on the floor surface (this applies to objects only).
Automatically Generate 2D Profile checkbox controls if a 2D profile is automatically generated for the
object. When selected, a simplified 2D profile is generated to make it easier when editing the 2D shape.
Automatically Set Up Preview Shot checkbox, when enabled, automatically creates the preview that is
displayed in the Preview Bar, regardless of the view orientation in 3D Custom Workshop. To create a
custom preview based on the view in 3D Custom Workshop, deselect this option.
Preview Camera Angle options specify the direction from which the object is displayed in the Preview Bar.
Note: The object always appears on a light blue background.
Exporting Files
With 3D Custom Workshop, you can export your design drawing for editing or sharing, or you can export an image of
your 3D design. When exporting a 3D image, the image is saved using the current rendering style (Textured,
Wireframe, or ClearView modes).
To export a 3D rendering
1 Click the Rendering Style button to toggle between Shaded and Wireframe.
(alternatively) Click View menu > 3D Rendering Style then click the rendering style
you want.
2 Click File menu > Export 3D,

then choose the file format you
want. The Export Image dialog
box is displayed.
3 Choose the folder where you

want the file saved.
4 In the File Name text box, type

a name then click Save. 3D
Custom Workshop
automatically adds the file
extension.
433
Chapter
Note: The background of the file will be white, regardless of what color is specified in 3D Custom
Workshop.
To export a 3D Custom Workshop drawing
1 Click File menu > Export, then

choose the file format you want.
The Export Image dialog box is
displayed.
2 Choose the folder where you

want the file saved.
3 In the File Name text box, type a

name then click Save. 3D
Custom Workshop automatically
adds the file extension.
Printing Objects
3D Custom Workshop prints using the current Windows printer. You can, however, print using any installed printer.
Using the Print dialog box you can specify a printer or plotter from those currently installed. Your object can be printed
in Textured, Wireframe, or ClearView modes. In rendered mode, you have the choice of four qualities.
To print in Wireframe mode
1 Click the Rendering Style button to specify Wire Frame.

(alternatively) Click View menu > 3D Rendering Style > Wire Frame.
2 Click File menu > Print > Print

Wire Frame.
3 In the Print dialog box, select the

printer you want to use and click
Print.
(optional) Change your printer
and page preferences.
To print in rendered mode
1 Click the Rendering Style button to specify Shaded.

(alternatively) Click View menu > 3D Rendering Style > Shaded View.
(optional) To print in Clear View mode, click View menu > 3D Rendering Style > Clear View.
2 Click File menu > Print, then

click the Quality you want to
use.
3 In the Print dialog box, select the

printer you want to use and click
OK.
(optional) Change your printer
and page preferences.
Drawing Grids
Drawing Grids
By using the Drawing Grids in 3D Custom Workshop you can work on any object from three distinct 3D angles. Each
grid controls two axes. You can also draw or edit in 2D from any of six directions, which will make editing and detailed
alignment simple.
The 3D drawing grids are the Front, Floor, and Side grids. The X (Width) and Y (Height) dimensions are the dominant
axes when drawing on the Front Grid. While the Floor Grid controls the X (Width) and Z (Depth) dimensions, the Side
Grid controls the Z (Depth) and Y (Height) dimensions. Using these grids in concert will give you the ability to design
anything you want.
Drawing on the Front Grid

Using the Front Grid, you can concentrate on the X (Width) and Y (Height) dimensions. You can extrude
objects along the Z (Depth) axis. You will be able to tell by the tighter grid pattern which drawing grid is
active.
To draw on the front grid
Click the Front Grid Tool on the toolbar.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Draw on Floor Grid (X-Z Axis).
Drawing on the Floor Grid

From the Floor Grid you concentrate on the X (Width) and Z (Depth) dimensions. You will be able to extrude
objects along the Y (Height) axis.
435
Chapter
To draw on the floor grid
Click the Floor Grid Tool on the toolbar.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Draw on Floor Grid (X-Z Axis).
Drawing on the Side Grid

The Side Grid activates the Z (Depth) and Y (Height) dimensions. You will be able to extrude objects along
the X (Width) axis.
To draw on the side grid
Click the Side Grid Tool from the toolbar.

(alternatively) Click Design menu > Draw on Side Grid (Z-Y Axis).

By default, the Grid is visible and set at twelve inches. This way you can visualize that each large square on the floor
plan is one (1) square foot. By defining a customized Grid, you can design to fit your specific needs. In addition, by
turning the Snap Grid on and off, you will be able to make detailed placement of the components simple. To keep
things from slipping behind the active grid, use the Grid Constrain feature.
Grid settings are controlled in the Grid Spacing dialog box.
Grid Visible checkbox turns the grid on and off. When selection
the grid is visible. To hide the grid, deselect the checkbox.
(alternatively) Click Design menu > Grid Visible (when a
checkmark is visible the grid is enabled).
Width, Height, and Depth Gridlines text boxes control the size
of the grid along those corresponding axis. Type the size you
want for each grid pane in these text boxes.
Constrain objects to the drawing grid boundaries checkbox

keeps objects within view on the grid when enabled. When
disabled, objects can be moved beyond the grid.
Gridlines text boxes control the Horizontal and Vertical

distance between the individual grid lines.
Snap Grid text boxes control the Horizontal and Vertical

distance your cursor snaps to along the respective gridline.
Nudge Distance is the distance a selection moves when using

nudge. For more information, see Setting a Nudge Distance,
Setting a Nudge Distance
To change grid settings
1 On the Grid Toolbar, click the Grid Properties button. The Grid Spacing dialog box is
displayed.
(alternatively) Click Design menu > Grid Properties.
2 Configure the Grid Spacing properties as needed and then click OK.
To control snap to grid
On the Grid Toolbar, click the Toggle Snap to Grid button. When the minor grid
lines are visible, Snap To Grid is enabled.
(alternatively) Click Design menu > Snap to Grid. When a checkmark is visible,
Snap to Grid is enabled.
Note: To adjust the snap to grid settings, see Changing Grid Settings, on page 436.
Setting a Nudge Distance

With Nudge, you can move objects in a specific direction and in definable increments. The up, down, left, and right
selections are also available by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. Through the Grid Spacing dialog box,
distances as small as one inch may be defined. You can set up to three pre-defined nudge distances to choose from.
To change the nudge distance
1 On the Grid Toolbar, click the Grid Spacing Tool. The Grid Spacing dialog box is displayed.
(alternatively) Click Design menu > Grid Spacing.
2 Select the radio button corresponding to the nudge distance you want to edit.
3 Type a custom distance in text box and then click OK.
To move an object by nudging
1 Choose the drawing grid you want to move along and then click to select the object you want to
nudge.
2 Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the selection in that direction along the active grid.
(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Nudge, then click the direction (up, down, left, or right),
Elevation Slider
With the Elevation Slider, objects can easily be moved vertically, regardless of which grid is active at the time. The
Elevation Slider will display in the unit of measure specified in the home design program; for example, measurements
will be displayed in metric automatically, if you are designing in your home design program, using metric
measurements.
To use the elevation slider
1 Click the Show/Hide Elevation Slider Tool. The Elevation Slider is displayed.
(optional) Right-click the Elevation Slider and choose the measurement
increments. The increments depend on the unit of measure youve specified in the
main application.
2 Click to select the object you want to elevate.

(optional) To elevate multiple objects to the same elevation, hold down SHIFT and
click each object you want to elevate.
3 Drag the elevation control up or down until the object is at the correct elevation.
To specify an exact elevation
1 Click to select the object you want to elevate.
437
Chapter
(optional) To elevate multiple objects to the same elevation, hold down SHIFT and click each object
you want to elevate.
2 Right-click the Elevation Slider and click Set Elevation on the context menu that is displayed.
3 Type the elevation in inches, or feet and inches, separated with a hyphen and then click OK.
To set the working elevation
1 While nothing is selected on the workspace, right-click the Elevation Slider and click Set Working
Elevation from the context menu that is displayed.
2 Type the necessary elevation in inches, or feet and inches, separated with a hyphen. Click OK.
3 To enable the working elevation for drawing, right-click the Elevation Slider and click Enable
Working Elevation.
Tracing an Imported Image

If you have an image you want to re-create and use in your drawing, for instance a scanned piece of furniture or door
design you like, 3D Custom Workshop lets you trace objects directly over that image. You can import you image to one
of the available grids using the Image Trace Properties dialog box. Once imported, use the drawing tools to trace the
image.
Note: To view an image on Floor Grid, you must be in 2D Profile View and Wire Frame rendering style.
Note: To view an image on the Front Grid, you must be in 2D Front View and Wire Frame rendering style.
Note: To view an image on the Side Grid, you must be in 2D Left View and Wire Frame rendering style.
Tracing an Imported Image
To import a trace image
1 Click Design menu > Image Trace Properties. The Image Trace Properties dialog box is
displayed. You can import an image to one of the three grids.
2 Click the Set Image button that is associated with the grid where you want the image to be placed.
3 In the Open dialog box, select the file you want to trace and then click Open. The image is displayed
in the Preview Box.
(optional) Select the Image Visible checkbox to turn on the images visibility.
(optional) Type a Width and a Height value in the corresponding text boxes.
4 Click OK.
439
Chapter
Chapter 34
Drawing 2D & 3D Entities

3D Custom Workshop is an extremely useful CAD (computer-aided design) PowerTool. Whether you want to draw
angular objects like cabinets and desks, or curved objects like lamps and round mirrors, there is a tool to match each
task.
You may find it easier to begin your design in 2D and add the third dimension later. You will find the 2D design tools
are extremely useful for this technique. Once youve drawn a 2D shape, you can convert it to 3D, creating as much
depth as you want in any direction necessary.
In this chapter, each drawing tools function will be explained. You will also learn the Draw from Center, Draw from
Corner, Object Editing, and Point Editing techniques, which will make drawing any object you want easier.

The options to Draw from Corner and Draw from Center controls the beginning points of objects drawn with the
drawing tools.
Draw from Corner

This makes drawing cabinets, tables and most other angular objects much easier. This method works with the
rectangle, oval, and line/plane tools only.
To draw from corner
Click the button at the bottom of the design window so Draw from Corner icon is displayed.
(alternatively) Click Options menu > Draw from Corner.
Draw from Center

Makes drawing concentric objects a breeze. This method is applicable with the rectangle, oval, and line/plane
tools only.
Punch! Home Design Software Users Guide
441
Chapter
34 Drawing 2D & 3D Entities
To draw from center
Click the button at the bottom of the design window so Draw from Center icon is displayed.
(alternatively) Click Options menu > Draw from Center.
Switching Between 2D and 3D Tools

The toolbar displays the 3D drawing tools by default. You can switch to the 2D tools or back to the 3D tools at any time
using the Toggle 2D/3D Design Tools button on the left side of the toolbar.
2D Tools
3D Tools
To toggle the 2D and 3D tools
On the Design toolbar, click the Toggle 2D/3D Design Tools button to access the toolbar
you want.
(alternatively) On the View menu, click 2D Design Tools or 3D Design Tools.
Drawing Shapes
You can draw 2D and 3D shapes to edit an object or create your own. Before you draw, choose the Draw Grid (see
Drawing Grids, which begins on page 435) and the Draw Method (see Drawing from Corner or Center, which begins
on page 441).
As your draw your shape, dimensions are displayed in the Readout Bar at the bottom of the design window.
Controlling Selection Mode

2D/3D Shape Properties
Editing 2D & 3D Objects
2D/3D Rectangle
In 3D rectangle drawing mode, you can draw squares and rectangles as well as cubes and boxes. You will find this tool
useful when drawing tables, cabinets, counters, and more.
To draw a 2D rectangle
1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Rectangle Tool.

2 Position your cursor at the start point for the rectangle and then click-and-drag to extend
the shape to the size you want and release the mouse button.
442 Punch! Home Design Software Users Guide
Drawing Shapes
3 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the rectangle and click again to place the
shape.
To draw a 2D rectangle
On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Rectangle Tool and then use the Click-and-Drag
drawing method to drag the shape to the size you want.
2D/3D Oval
In ellipse drawing mode, you can draw circles and ovals. You will find this tool useful when drawing lamps, couches,
planters, rugs, and more.
To draw a 3D oval
1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Oval Tool.

2 Position your cursor at the start point for the oval and then click-and-drag to extend the
shape to the size you want and release the mouse button.
(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to draw a perfect circle from its center point.
443
Chapter
3 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the oval and click again to place the shape.
To draw a 2D oval
On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Oval Tool and then use the Click-and-Drag drawing
method to drag the shape to the size you want.
(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to draw a perfect circle.
3D Multigon
In multigon drawing mode you are able to draw objects with a specified number of equal-length sides. You will find this
tool useful when drawing mirrors, tabletops, hot tubs, and othershapes with more than four edges. By default,
multigons are drawn with 6 sides. You can edit the number of sides before you draw in the Custom Options window.
Drawing Shapes
To set number of multigon sides
Click the Custom Options button (or click Options menu > Custom Options) and
change the Multigon Tool - # of Sides text box, then click OK to close the window.
To draw a 3D multigon
1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Multigon Tool.

2 Position your cursor at the start point (center) for the multigon and then click-and-drag to
extend the shape to the size you want and release the mouse button. The radius
measurement will appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.
Note: Although you can define any number of sides, the more sides you specify, the more the
multigon will begin to look like a circle.
3 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the multigon and click again to place the shape.
445
Chapter
To draw a 2D multigon
On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Multigon Tool and then use the Click-and-Drag
drawing method to drag the shape from its center point to the size you want.
2D/3D Polygon
In polygon drawing mode, you can draw an object with any number of sides at any angle or length. You will find this
tool useful when drawing corner cabinets, futons, and more.
To draw a 3D polygon
1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Polygon Tool.

polygon.
3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the polygon and then right-click to place the
2D shape.
4 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the object and click again to place the shape.
Drawing Shapes
To draw a 2D polygon
1 On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Polygon Tool

polygon.
3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the polygon and then right-click to place the
2D shape.
2D/3D Closed Arc

In closed arc drawing mode, you will be able to draw an elliptical arc, which will automatically close along the bottom.
You will find this tool useful when drawing couches, chairs, and drop-leaf tables, for example.
To draw a 3D closed arc
1 On the Design toolbar, click the Closed Arc Tool.

2 Position your cursor at the start point for the closed arc and then click-and-drag to extend
the shape to the size you want and release the mouse button.
(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to constrain the arc to 90-degrees
3 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the oval and click again to place the shape.
447
Chapter
To draw a 2D closed arc
On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Closed Arc Tool and then use the Click-and-Drag
drawing method to drag the shape to the size you want.
(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to constrain the arc to 90-degrees.
2D/3D Circular Closed Arc

In circular closed arc drawing mode, you will be able to draw circular objects that are closed within the shape
boundaries. You will find this tool useful when drawing moldings for cabinets and other unique details.
To draw a 3D circular closed arc
1 On the Design toolbar, click the Circular Closed Arc Tool.

2 Position your cursor at the center point of the arc and then click-and-drag to extend the
radius to the size you want. Dimensions are displayed in the readout bar as you draw.
3 Release the mouse button and move the cursor clockwise or counter-clockwise to set the angle you
want and then click.
(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to invert the arc angle.
Drawing Shapes
To draw a 2D circular closed arc
1 On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Closed Circular Arc Tool and position your cursor at
the center point of the arc and then click-and-drag to extend the radius to the size you
want. Dimensions are displayed in the readout bar as you draw.
2 Release the mouse button and move the cursor clockwise or counter-clockwise to create
the shape you want, and then click to end drawing mode.
2D/3D Closed Curve

In closed curve drawing mode, you can draw enclosed curved objects and areas. You will find this useful for creating
curved cabinets or furniture pieces.
To draw a 3D closed curve
1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Closed Curve Tool.

2 In the design window, click to set the start point and drag to define the shape of the 3D
closed curve.
449
Chapter
3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the curve and then right-click to place the 2D
shape.
(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to constrain the lines to 90-degrees.
Note: Although the lines will initially appear to be angular, they will become curved when you end
drawing mode.
To draw a 2D closed curve
1 On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Closed Curve Tool.

2 In the design window, click to set the start point and drag to define the shape of the curve.
3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the curve and then right-click to
place.
drawing mode.
2D/3D Open Polygon

In open polygon drawing mode, you will be able to draw polygons with an open side. You will find this tool useful for
creating fences, bay windows, and other unique open-ended shapes and objects.
To draw an 3D open polygon
1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Open Polygon Tool.

polygon.
Drawing Shapes
(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to constrain a line to 90-degrees.
To draw an 2D open polygon
1 On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Open Polygon Tool.

polygon.
(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to constrain a line to 90-degrees.
2D/3D Open Arc

In open arc drawing mode, you will be able to draw an elliptical arc which will remain open along the bottom. You will
find this tool useful when drawing outdoor bridges, slides, and more.
To draw an 3D open arc
1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Open Arc Tool.

2 Position your cursor at the start point for the arc and then click-and-drag to extend the
(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to constrain the arc to 90-degrees
451
Chapter
To draw an 2D open arc
On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Open Arc Tool and use the Click-and-Drag drawing
2D/3D Circular Arc

In circular arc drawing mode, you can draw an arc of any radius. You will find this tool useful when drawing decorative
edges, barrel planters, and more.
To draw a 3D circular arc
1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Open Circular Arc Tool.

2 Position your cursor at the center point of the arc and then click-and-drag to extend the
radius to the size you want. Dimensions are displayed in the readout bar as you draw.
Drawing Shapes
3 Release the mouse button and move the cursor clockwise or counter-clockwise to set the angle you
want and then click.
To draw a 2D circular arc
1 On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Open Circular Arc Tool and position your cursor at
the center point of the arc and then click-and-drag to extend the radius to the size you
want. Dimensions are displayed in the readout bar as you draw.
2 Release the mouse button and move the cursor clockwise or counter-clockwise to create the shape
you want, and then click to end drawing mode.
453
Chapter
2D/3D Plane
In plane drawing mode, you will be able to draw flat planes to the size you want. You will find this tool useful when
adding angular details to cabinets, for example.
To draw a 3D plane
1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Line Tool.

2 Position your cursor at the start point for the line and then click-and-drag to extend the
(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to constrain the line horizontally or vertically.
3 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the line and click again to place the shape.
To draw a 2D line
On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Line Tool and use the Click-and-Drag drawing
(optional) Press and hold SHIFT while drawing to constrain the line horizontally or
vertically.
Drawing Shapes
2D/3D Open Curve

In curve drawing mode, you will be able to draw an open curved shape which changes direction. You will find this tool
useful when drawing curved ceilings, outdoor grills, and more.
To draw a 3D open curve
1 On the Design toolbar, click the 3D Open Curve Tool.

3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the curve and then right-click to
place.
drawing mode.
To draw a 2D open curve
1 On the Design toolbar, click the 2D Open Curve Tool.

455
Chapter
3 Continue to click points and drag to define the shape of the curve and then right-click to place.
drawing mode.
2D/3D Shape Properties

When a shape is selected properties become available on the Properties Bar. You can select more than one shape at
a time to edit properties on multiple objects at once. To do this, press the SHIFT key as you click points or objects.
For information on using object and point selection mode, see Controlling Selection Mode, on page 463.
Layer displays the selections current layer. Using the Move to Layer button you
can quickly move the selection to a different layer. For more information on layers,
see Working in Layers, on page 471.
Open and Closed radio buttons allow you to quickly change an open-ended
object to a closed object with just a couple clicks of the mouse. Just as easily, you
can change a closed object to be open-ended.
Select Open to remove a segment from a closed object. Select Closed to add a
segment to enclose an open object.
Capped and UnCapped radio buttons control whether a 3D shape appears hollow
or filled. By default, objects are drawn with their center filled, or capped. You can
uncap objects to create a hollow shape. Select Capped to fill the object. Select
UnCapped to hollow out an object.
Texture Mapping settings control how a material or texture of applied to the surfaces of an object. Planar
Mapping applies a texture across each individual surface of a group of objects while Surface Mapping applies a
texture across a group for a seamless look. Surface Mapping is best suited for objects with complex surfaces that
require a lot of individual planes.
Applying Materials
Shading controls shading across multiple segments. When a revolving object is created, the shading starts over
with each segment; this can increase render times. Once youve created a revolving object, you can smooth out
the shading to create a more fluid appearance and, in turn, speed up rendering.
Choose Smooth to apply smoothness to all the segments. Select Normal to restart shading with each segment.
Smooth Enabled
Normal Enabled
Adjust Curve button open the Curve Tension dialog box, where you can adjust the tension or straighten a
selection. For more information, see Changing Curve Tension, which begins on page 465.
Resize Object(s) button opens the Object Size dialog box where you can control the size using precise
specifications. For more information, see Specifying Object Size, which begins on page 470.
Move text boxes allow you to move the selection a specified distance along the corresponding axis. You can also
move by dragging to a new location. For more information, see Moving an Object, which begins on page 472.
Cabinet Cutout checkbox allows you to convert a 2D shape into a cutout area in cabinets created using one of
the cabinet tools. This is useful when adding a sink from one of the content libraries to an existing cabinet. The
cutout must be created on the Floor Grid at zero elevation (and do not extrude the 2D shape).
Translucency button opens the Object Translucency dialog box where you can adjust the translucency
percentage. The higher the Translucency, the more transparent an object appears.
Applying Materials
Just like applying color, its easy to apply the appropriate material. 3D Custom Workshop includes both the Punch!
Library and the Custom Material Library. You can drag-and-drop materials onto surfaces on the design window.
For detailed steps on applying materials, see Applying Building Materials, on page 91.
Note: To apply materials, Shaded view should be turned on. For more information on views, see Using Different
Views, on page 478.

With 3D Custom Workshop, you can try out various color schemes with ease. Now you can choose between paint
libraries and color families with just a few mouse clicks.
For detailed steps on applying paint and colors, see Applying Paint and Color, on page 87.
Note: To apply paint and colors, Shaded view should be turned on. For more information on views, see Using
Different Views, on page 478.
457
Chapter
Controlling Application of Color or Material

With 3D Custom Workshop you can control how colors
and materials are applied to your design.
Note: To apply materials, paint, and colors, Shaded

view should be turned on. For more information on views,
see Using Different Views, on page 478.
Single Pane
By default the Single Plane function is selected, where
the color or material is applied only to the individual surface of an object.
To Use Single Plane Apply
1 Click the Paint Colors or Materials tab and from the Apply drop-down menu, choose Single Plane.
2 Drag the color or material you want onto the surface where you want it applied. The color or material
is applied only to that surface.
3 Continue to drag and drop onto each surface where you want the color or material.
Wrap Single Segment
The Wrap Single Segment option allows you to apply a color or material to a single segment along part of an object, as
objects are made up of multiple segments, in most cases. In the example below, a white paint color is applied to a
segment of the bed post.
To Use Segment Apply
1 Click the Paint Colors or Materials tab and from the Apply drop-down menu, choose Wrap Single
Segment.
Controlling Application of Color or Material
2 Drag the color or material onto the object. The color or material you selected is applied only to the
single segment.
Wrap All Segments

You can also choose to Wrap All Segments with a selected color to material. This option covers all of the segments
that make up a specific piece of an object. In the example below, a white paint color is applied to all of the segments of
the bed post.
To Use All Segment Apply
1 Click the Paint Colors or Materials tab and from the Apply drop-down menu, choose Wrap All
Segments.
2 Drag the color or material onto the object. The color or material you selected is applied to all of the
segments.
Grouped Apply
The Grouped Apply method applies the color or material to all of the objects segments at once. In the example below,
a wood material is applied to all of the surfaces of the dresser.
To Use Grouped Apply
1 Click the Paint Colors or Materials tab and from the Apply drop-down menu, choose Entire
Group.
2 Drag the color or material onto the object. The color or material you selected is applied to the entire
object.
459
Chapter
Note: To control how shadows are rendered across an object with many facets, use Planar
Mapping (Options menu > Planar Mapping); Surface Mapping will apply the shadow to each facet
individually.
Matching Apply
Matching Apply replaces all like colors or materials with the new one. In the example below, a wood material is applied
to one of the drawers, and all of the surfaces with the same material are updated.
To Use Matching Apply
1 Click the Paint Colors or Materials tab and from the Apply drop-down menu, choose Matching.
2 Drag the color or material onto the object. The color or material you selected is applied to all places
matching the material you are replacing.
Using AutoClick Placement

AutoClick Placement allows you to tag the surfaces where you want a color or material applied and then apply it to all
of the tagged surfaces at once. This offers flexibility in choosing only certain surfaces on one object or different
surfaces on multiple objects in your design.
Note: To apply materials, paint, and colors, Shaded view should be turned on. For more information on views, see
Using Different Views, on page 478.
To apply a series of the same color or material
1 Click the Paint Colors or Materials tab and choose the category you want. Options appear in the
Preview Bar.
2 From the Apply drop-down menu, choose AutoClick Placement.

3 Click the color or material you want to apply and then click each surface where you want the color or
material applied.
4 Click the right mouse button to end. The color or material you selected is applied to each surface.

Punch! Decorator Palette allows you to construct lists of commonly-used colors and materials so
they can be easily used throughout your design. Each palette is divided into as many as 15
groups, allowing you to assign each group to a room or other aspect of your design.
After youve created your palette in the main program, you can access it while working in 3D
Custom Workshop.
For more information, see Using the Decorator Palette, which begins on page 291.
Searching for Colors or Materials

If you see a color or material you want to match, or have forgotten which library the color or material you want is stored
in, you can use the Select Material/Color Tool to automatically find the library in which the color or material appears.
To find a material or color
1 Click the Select Material/Color Tool. Your cursor changes to an eye-dropper as you
move it over the design window.
2 Click the material or color you want to search for. The material, or color, is displayed on
the Preview Bar.
461
Chapter
Chapter 35
Editing 2D & 3D Objects

3D Custom Workshop makes it extremely easy to change objects once they are drawn. In this section, you will find
instructions on techniques that make rotating, resizing, and other edits very simple.
You will also learn how to use layers, lock and unlock; in addition, youll learn to create groups that will make complex
objects much more manageable. The flip and mirror techniques are also described and are useful when you need
perfectly symmetrical objects.
Controlling Selection Mode

Object Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection, along with point selection, controls how your edits impact
your object.
Object Selection Mode

In object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. This is ideal for moving a selection, or group of
selections.
To use object selection mode
Click the button at the bottom of the design window so Object Selection icon is displayed.
(alternatively) Click Options menu > Object Selection.
Note: To restore colors and materials, click the Rendering Style toggle at the lower
left of your window, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, then click
Textured.
Point Selection Mode

In point selection mode, each vertex of the object is treated separately, so you are able to move each vertex or
point individually in your drawing. This is ideal for detailed edits.
You can change the color of the point handles to make them most distinguishable or blend in, depending on your
needs. For more information, see Controlling Default Colors, which begins on page 484.
To use point selection mode
Click the button at the bottom of the design window so Point Selection icon is displayed.
(alternatively) Click Options menu > Point Selection.
Note: To restore colors and materials, click the Rendering Style toggle at the lower
left of your window, or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, then click
Textured.
463
Chapter
35 Editing 2D & 3D Objects
To select all points
Right-click an object and choose Select All Points from the context menu.
To select all points on a segment
Right-click a line segment where you want to select all points and chose Select Segment from the
context menu. All the points along that segment are selected.
OR
Right-click a point where you want to select all points of the segment and choose Select Segment
Points from the context menu. All the points along that segment are selected.
To select all points along an extrusion path
Right-click a point and choose Select Extrude Points from the context menu. All of the points along
the extrusion path are selected.
Selecting Points within an Object

The Select In Polygon Tool is a versatile tool that allows you to select objects or points that lie within another object.
This tool allows you to click points to define a selection area, much like drawing a polygon shape.
To select points within an object
1 Enable Points Selection mode. For more information, see Point Selection Mode, which begins on
page 463.
2 Click the Select In Polygon Tool.

polygon.
4 Continue to click points and drag to define the selection shape around the points or objects you want
selected, and then right-click to select points.
Adding and Removing Points

You can adjust a shape and gain more control over its appearance by adding or removing points to 2D shapes.
To add and remove points, you must be in Point Selection mode. For more information on selections modes, see
Controlling Selection Mode, on page 463.
To add a point to an object
Right-click the segment where you want to add a point and choose Add Point on the context menu.
A point is added to the object where your cursor was positioned.
To remove a point from an object
Right-click the segment where you want to remove a point and choose Remove Point on the
context menu. The point is removed from the object.

curve assigned to them. Curve Tension is measured between 1 and 50. Specifying 1 in the dialog box results in very
little tension being applied, while specifying 50 is the maximum amount allowed and causes a greatly-exaggerated
curve.
465
Chapter
Curve Tension=5
Curve Tension=10
Curve Tension=20
1 Click to select an object and then click the Adjust Curve button on the Properties Bar. The Curve
Tension dialog box is displayed.
(alternatively) Click Options menu > Curve Smoothing > Curve Tension.
2 Type the amount of tension that you want, or click the arrows to increase or decrease the value
incrementally, and then click OK. The Curve Tension you specified is applied.
To control default curve-drawing smoothness
1 Click the Custom Options button. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed.
(alternatively) Click Options menu > Custom Options.
2 Drag the 2D Curve-Drawing Smoothness slider to decrease or increase the drawing

smoothness and then click OK.
Note: When changed, the drawing smoothness affects all curves in the drawing.
Extruding a 2D Object
Once you draw an object in 2D you can add a third dimension at any time. The Extrude Tool makes this a straightforward process, by simply clicking and dragging to the desired dimension. To extrude an object with more precision,
you can use the Extrude dialog box to define the segment spacing, and how many segments to which you want to
extrude.
Revolving a 2D Shape
To manually extrude a 2D object
1 Click to select the object to be extruded and, on the Standard Toolbar, click the Extrude
Tool.
2 Click-and-drag in the direction that you want the object to extrude. Dimensions appear in
the Readout Bar as you extrude.
3 Release the mouse button to end extrusion mode.

Note: Using the Extrude Tool always extrudes the selection perpendicular to the active grid.
To extrude an object by a specified amount
1 Click to select the object to be extruded and then click Edit menu > Extrude. The Extrude dialog
box is displayed.
# of Segments defines number of segments want in the extruded shape.

Segment Spacing defines the length of each segment in the extruded
shape.
Note: Specifying an extrusion value using the Extrude dialog box always
extrudes the selection perpendicular to the grid on which it was drawn.
2 Specify the extrude settings you want and click OK.
Revolving a 2D Shape
Another way to add a third dimension is by using the Revolve command. This command is useful when creating table
legs, lamps, vases, and so on. Radians and degrees are two ways of measuring circular distances. One radian equals
180-degrees.
Note: Objects revolve in the direction of the active drawing grid.
90-degrees
180-degrees
360-degrees
To revolve a 2D object
1 Click to select the object to be revolved and then click Edit menu > Revolve. The Revolve dialog
box is displayed.
467
Chapter
Choose Degrees or Radians and type the measurement you want in the corresponding text box.
Measurements are from -360 to 360-degrees or -6.28 to 6.28 radians.
Radius defines the size of the circle the shape revolves around. This is measured in the scale you have
defined.
Specify the revolve settings you want and click OK.
Applying Skew
To skew an object means to slant it along a selected axis. This is a useful tool for adding beveled edges to counters,
diagonal legs to tables, and so on. You can use the Skew Tool to manually drag points to define the skew, or specify
values for a more precise slant.
Note: Objects are skewed in the direction of the active drawing grid.
To skew an object freely
1 Click to select the object you want to skew and then click the Skew Tool.
2 Click a corner point of the object and drag in the direction you want the object to be slanted.
Dimensions appear in the position readout bar as you draw.
3 Release the mouse to stop skewing the object.

To skew an object a specified amount
1 Click the object to skew and then double-click the Skew Tool. The Skew dialog box is displayed.
Rotating an Object
Horizontal defines the difference in distance between horizontal points

Vertical defines the difference in distance between the vertical points.
Note: The higher the value the more intense the skew.
2 Type the Horizontal and Vertical values to which you want the object skewed and then click OK.
Rotating an Object
With the Rotate Tool you can easily spin an object around any point on any drawing grid. This is useful when you want
to face an object in a different direction from which it was drawn. You can use the Rotate Tool to manually drag points
to define the angle, or specify a precise rotation angle.
Note: Objects are rotated based on the active drawing grid.
To rotate an object freely
1 Click to select the object to rotate and then click the Rotate Tool.
2 Click a corner point of the object and drag in the direction that you want to rotate.
3 Release the mouse to stop rotating the object.
To rotate an object a specified amount
1 Click to select the object to rotate and then or double-click the Rotate Tool. The Rotate dialog box is
displayed.
(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Rotate.
2 You can rotate a selection using Degrees or Radians. Click the radio button corresponding to the
system you want to use.
3 Type the angle you want to rotate the selection in the Angle text box and click OK.
To rotate an object in 1-degree increments
1 Click to select the object to rotate. Selection handles appear around the object.
2 Press SHIFT, then press the left or right arrow key to rotate the selection in that direction.
Elevation Slider
With the Elevation Slider, objects can easily be moved vertically, regardless of which grid is active at the time. The
Elevation Slider will display in the unit of measure specified in the home design program; for example, measurements
will be displayed in metric automatically, if you are designing in your home design program, using metric
measurements.
For more information, see Elevation Slider, which begins on page 437.
469
Chapter
Specifying Object Size

With the object size option you can specify exact measurements for each object, either as a percentage of the original
size or by specifying dimensions in inches. This is very useful, especially when you know how large or small an object
must be to fit a specific space in your home.
To change an objects size
1 Double-click the object you want to resize. The Object Size dialog box is
displayed.
(alternatively) Click to select the object and click the Resize Object(s)
button on the Properties Bar (or click Options menu > Object Size).
Object Size lets you resize using measurements.

Percentage lets you resize using a percentage of the original size.
Size From options let you choose the direction the selection is resized
from.
Choose the resize method and type the values you want in the
3 Choose the Size From direction you want and then click OK. The object is
resized to the exact measurements or percentage you specified.
Grouping Objects
By defining a Group, you create a set of selected objects that are then treated as
one item. You can have unlimited groups in a drawing.
To control object groups
1 Press and hold SHIFT and then click each object that you want to be included in the group.
2 On the Control toolbar, click the Group Tool. The selections are grouped as one object.
Click the Ungroup Tool to ungroup a set of objects.
(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Group or Ungroup.
Locking Objects in Place

Many times you will want to lock an object in place after it is positioned. This avoids accidentally moving the object.
To control object locks
1 Click to select the object you want to edit.

(optional) Hold down SHIFT and click to select multiple objects.
(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Lock or Unlock.
Hiding Detection
When you are working in layers, it will be helpful to make some objects unable to be selected, which makes it easier to
select objects underneath. The Hide Detection feature makes this a simple process.
To the hide detection of an object
1 Click to select the object you want to hide from detection.

(optional) Hold down SHIFT and click to select multiple objects.
Working in Layers
2 On the Control toolbar, click the Hide Detection Tool.

(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Hide Detection.
To detect objects
On the Control toolbar click the Detect Tool and then click to select the object.
(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Detect All.
Working in Layers
Using the Layer option, you can store different information on different layers of your drawing. The Active Layers
name is always displayed on the Design toolbar.
From the Layers tab, you can choose to show or hide certain layers, which
makes viewing and working on individual layers easy and uncluttered. Many of
the functions are available through the Layer Properties dialog box. When
making changes in the Layer Properties dialog box, you must click OK before
your changes take effect.
To make complex objects more manageable, break them into logical layers. If
you are drawing a chair, for example, you may want a separate layer for the
back, the legs, the cushion, and so on.
Most of the layer management tasks can be performed on the Layers tab or
using another method, so alternate methods are included where possible.
These types of tasks include creating and deleting layers, controlling layer
visibility, and more.
Active Layer drop-down menu allows you to choose which layer is your
current working layer. Select the Show Active Layer Only checkbox to hide all
layers except the Active Layer.
(alternatively) Click Design menu > Active Layer then choose your active layer
from the submenu.
Show All Layers button displays all of the objects on all of the layers in the
workspace.
(alternatively) Click Design menu > Visible Layers > Show All Layers.
Hide All Layers button hides all of the objects on all of the layers from the
workspace.
(alternatively) Click Design menu > Visible Layers > Hide All Layers.
New button opens the New Layer dialog box where you can define a new layer.
Type a name for the layer and click OK.
(alternatively) Click Design menu > Layer Properties and then click the New
button.
Show button allows you to show a hidden layer. Select the layer you want to see
and click the Show button to display it in the workspace.
(alternatively) Click Design menu > Layer Properties then select the layer and
click the Show button.
Hide button allows you to hide a visible layer. Select the layer you want to hide
and click the Hide button to remove it from the workspace.
(alternatively) Click Design menu > Layer Properties then select the layer and click the Hide button.
Rename button opens the Rename Layer dialog box where you can change the name of an existing layer without
affecting the objects on the layer. Type a new name for the layer and click OK.
(alternatively) Click Design menu > Layer Properties then select the layer and click the Rename button.
471
Chapter
Remove button deletes a layer and its contents from your design.
(alternatively) Click Design menu > Layer Properties then select the layer and click the Rremove button.
To move a part of the drawing to a new layer
Select the object you want to move to another layer then click the Move To Layer button on the
Properties Bar and choose the layer. The selection is moved to the new layer.
(alternatively) Right-click the part of the drawing you want to move to another layer, then click Move
to Layer on the context menu that is displayed, then choose the layer.
Moving an Object
You can move an object easily, using the click and drag method or by specifying coordinates.
Note: Objects are moved based on the active drawing grid.

To move by dragging
Click to select the object you want to move and then click-and-drag the object to where you want it
displayed.
To move by specifying the distance
1 Click to select the object you want to move.

2 On the Properties tab, type the distance you want the object moved in the
corresponding text boxes. Press ENTER to accept each new value.
To align object faces
1 Hold down the SHIFT key and click to select the objects you want to align.
2 Click Edit menu > Align Objects and choose the face by which you want the selections aligned.
The objects are aligned based on the component you selected.
Using Flip
Align Object Top
Align Object Bottom
Align Object Vertical Center
Using Flip
The Flip function takes the original object and reverses it either horizontally or vertically. Depending on which grid is
active, flipping an object varies.
Flip Horizontal
When you flip an object horizontally, the points along the horizontal edge are flipped, based on the active drawing grid.
Original
Flipped
To flip an object horizontally
Click to select the object you want to flip and then, on the Control toolbar, click the Flip
Horizontal Tool.
(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Flip > Horizontal.
Flip Vertical
When you flip an object vertically, the points along the vertical edge are flipped, based on the active drawing grid.
Original
Flipped
To flip an object vertically
Click to select the object you want to flip and, on the Control toolbar, click the Flip Vertical
Tool.
(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Flip > Vertical.
473
Chapter
Using Mirror
Mirror works much like the Flip function. The difference is that mirror leaves the original and makes a duplicate. Mirror
creates two identical objects that face one another. Depending on which grid is active, mirroring an object varies.
Mirror Horizontal
When you mirror an object horizontally, a mirror copy is created along the horizontal edge, based on the active drawing
grid.
Original
Mirrored
To mirror an object horizontally
1 Click to select the object you want to mirror and, on the Control toolbar, click the Mirror
Horizontal Tool. A mirror copy of the object is created.
(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Mirror > Horizontal.
2 Drag the mirrored copy into position as needed.
Mirror Vertically
When you mirror an object vertically, a mirror copy is created along the vertical edge, based on the active drawing grid.
Top: Original
Bottom: Mirrored
Duplicating Objects
To mirror an object vertically
1 Click to select the object you want to mirror and, on the Control toolbar, click the Mirror
Vertical Tool. A mirror copy of the object is created.
(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Mirror > Vertical.
2 Drag the mirrored copy into position as needed.
Duplicating Objects
Similar to standard copy/paste functionality, the duplicate feature creates an exact copy of the object you select. In the
duplicate properties dialog box, you can specify the number and specific offset of a series of duplicates. You can
create duplicates using the default properties, or adjust the properties before creating duplicates.
Note: Objects are duplicated based on the active drawing grid.
Duplicate (on right)
Series of vertical duplicates
1 Click the object you want to duplicate and, on the Control toolbar, click the Duplicate Tool.
The Duplicate Properties dialog box is displayed.
(alternatively) Click Edit menu > Duplicate > Duplicate Properties.
(optional) Click Edit menu > Duplicate > Duplicate Object to automatically create a duplicate
based on the default duplicate properties.
475
Chapter
The Offset values specify the distance between duplicates. Type the distance each duplicate object should
be offset, horizontally and vertically, from the original object and from each other (these can be negative
values).
Repetitions defines the number of duplicates. Each duplicate is positioned based on the Offset values.
Specify the duplicate properties and then click OK. The object is duplicated at the offset(s) you
defined.
Above, the Horizontal Offset is 0, the Vertical Offset is -1'-0", and the Repetitions value is 3.
Chapter 36
Controlling Views
You can control the way you see your design in 3D Custom Workshop. These views can make editing much easier or
can simply make it clearer to view specific areas of your drawing.
In this chapter you will learn to use ClearView, perspective, orthographic, textured, and Wireframe views. You will also
learn how to zoom in on a specific area and how to set the camera angle.
Using Zoom and Pan

At some point while illustrating your object, you may want a close-up view of a specific area. By using the zoom and
pan tools in concert with the set zoom feature, you will be able to view any area of your drawing with pinpoint accuracy.
With the Pan Tool, you can move the window to view a different area of the drawing without changing the
magnification.
To zoom in or out of your drawing
1 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Zoom Tool.

2 Click on the design window and drag up to zoom in; drag down to zoom out.
(alternatively) Zoom in and out easily with the wheel on your mouse.
Note: The location of the cursor will be centered on the design window.
To set a specific zoom percentage
1 Double-click the Zoom Tool. The Set Zoom dialog box is displayed.
(alternatively) Click View menu > Set Zoom.
2 Type a zoom percentage into the Zoom text box and click OK.
To pan across the drawing
1 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Pan Tool.

Using Perspective or Orthographic 3D Views

Perspective view is the default view in 3D Custom Workshop. Perspective views give more information about depth
and are often easier to view because they are similar to a real world view. In Perspective View, the parts of the
drawing that are nearest to you will appear larger than those further away.
Orthographic viewpoints make it much easier to compare, for example, two parts of the object, as there is no question
of how the viewpoint may affect the perception of distance.
477
Chapter
36 Controlling Views
Perspective View
Orthographic View
To set a 3D view
Click the Viewing Options button and choose Perspective or Orthographic from the popup menu.
(alternatively) Click View menu > View in Perspective or View in Orthographic.
Using Different Views

Using the rendering styles, you can literally see your design inside and out. 3D Custom Workshops technology
includes anti-aliased, photo-realism. You can even create glass-topped tables by setting the Translucency of an
object.
By default, objects are displayed in Shaded View. To speed up rendering times, you can set the default view so objects
are displayed, first, in Wireframe.
Wire Frame
In Wireframe view each individual line or arc is visible and able to be changed; detailed editing of the object may be
easier in Wireframe view. While viewing in Wireframe, you can control the appearance of the point handles, making
them large, small, or turning them off completely.
To view Wireframe mode
Click the Rendering Style button so the Wire Frame style is displayed.
(alternatively) Click View menu > 3D Rendering Style > Wireframe.
To set Wireframe as your default view
(alternatively) Click Options menu > Custom Options
Using Different Views
2 Select the Start in WireFrame Mode checkbox and then click OK.
Shaded View
Textured, shaded view gives a more realistic appearance and is the default view in 3D Custom Workshop.
To view shaded mode
Click the Rendering Style button so the Shaded View style is displayed.
(alternatively) Click View menu > 3D Rendering Style > Shaded View.
ClearView
While in ClearView, you can view your design in an opaque state.
To view using ClearView
Click View menu > 3D Rendering Style > ClearView.
Rendering a 3D View
To view 3D objects in final quality, render the design. You change the default rendering quality, which affects rendering
speeds.
To render using 3D final quality
Click View menu > Render 3D Final Quality.
Click View menu > 3D Final Quality choose one of the options.

Ultra-High results in a slower rendering speed and a high quality output.
479
Chapter
Using 2D Views
2D Views work in harmony with the 3D Views. The 2D Top and Bottom Views are used in tandem with the 3D Floor
Grid; the Front and Back Views are used with the 3D Front Grid; the Left and Right Views work with the Side Grid.
The 2D Views make complex alignment straightforward and simple. There are a number of ways to quickly access a
2D view, and it is easy to toggle back and forth between views. All 2D views work in the same manner.
Views Toolbar
Viewing Options pop-up menu
2D Top View
3D Perspective View
2D Top View
2D Bottom View
3D Perspective View
2D Bottom View
Using 2D Views
2D Front View
3D Perspective View
2D Front View
2D Back View
3D Perspective View
2D Back View
2D Left View
3D Perspective View
2D Left View
2D Right View
3D Perspective View
2D Right View
481
Chapter
Setting the 3D Camera Angle

With the 3D Camera Angle options you can view your design from six preset vantage points. They are particularly
useful when you need to quickly view a specific area of your design or when you want to line up multiple objects.
To change the 3D camera angle
Click View menu > 3D Camera Angle and choose a view from the submenu.
To return to the default view
Click View menu > Reset View.
To adjust the lighting intensity
1 Click View Menu > 3D Lighting. The 3D Lighting dialog box is displayed.
2 Drag the slider to increase or decrease the overall lighting and then click OK.
3D Top View
3D Perspective View
3D Top View
Setting the 3D Camera Angle
3D Bottom View
3D Perspective View
3D Bottom View
3D Front View
3D Perspective View
3D Front View
3D Back View
3D Perspective View
3D Back View
3D Left View
3D Perspective View
3D Left View
483
Chapter
3D Right View
3D Perspective View
3D Right View
Using Fly-Around
In addition to the preset 3D viewing angles, you can view your design from any other angle using the Fly-Around Tool.
The Fly-Around Tool lets you rotate around a point of origin that can be defined with a couple clicks. You can easily
rotate around the center of any object, again with just a click or two!
To use the Fly-Around Tool
1 On the Viewpoint Toolbar click the Fly-Around button.

Note: To fly around one object, right-click the object and choose Center On Object from the
context menu and then navigate using the Fly-Around Tool.
To set the rotation elevation
1 Click View menu > Set Rotation Elevation. The Set Rotation Elevation dialog box is displayed.
2 Type the Rotation Elevation you want in the text box and then click OK.
To show or hide the point of rotation origin
Click Options menu > Rotation Origin Visible. The Rotation Origin is visible when a checkmark
exists.
(alternatively) Right-click the design window and choose Rotation Origin Visible.
Controlling Default Colors

Using the Custom Options dialog box, you can control default colors of specific aspects of 3D Custom Workshop, such
as Wireframe, point handles, grid color, new objects, and more.
To change a default color
2 Click the preview for the color you want to change. The Colors dialog box is displayed.
3 Choose a color from Basic colors, Custom colors, or the color matrix and then click OK. The color
you chose is displayed as the new preview color.
4 Click OK to close the Custom Options dialog box.

To reset default colors
2 Click the Reset To Default button and then click OK.

curve assigned to them. Curve Tension is measured between 1 and 50. Specifying 1 in the dialog box results in very
485
Chapter
little tension being applied, while specifying 50 is the maximum amount allowed and causes a greatly-exaggerated
curve.
Using Nudge and the Grid

Once youve placed an object, you can precisely move it into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow keys to
move selected objects, or features, a specified distance. For more information on using Nudge, see Nudging a
Selection, which begins on page 256.
Nudge works in tandem with the Snap Grid. To learn more about the Snap Grid, see Using the Grid, which begins on
page 52.
Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning objects and snapping objects to the grid. When using the
Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and dropped on the design window are automatically snapped, or placed,
to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is turned on. For more information, see Using the Grid, which
begins on page 52.
Glossary
Numerics
3D cutaway slider
baluster
A feature of Punch! 3D View that allows you to peel

away layers of your design. Using the icon above the
slider, you can control the direction from which the
cutaway originates. Also called Dollhouse View.
One of a series of vertical supports between posts for

a handrail.
beam
A structural element that helps support a building or
heavy load and take the weight off the walls or roof
above. Punch! allows you to create beams made of
steel, wood, or a custom material.
3D fly around view

A feature of Punch! 3D View that allows you to
move around and view your entire design from
above. You can establish views from any
angle and save views for future use. See also
3D walk through.
building pad
An area of firm, level ground upon which a buildings
foundation is made.
3D View
3D View is a tool that allows you to move around and
view your design in photo-realistic 3D. There are three
window size options for viewing in 3D View: 3D Quarter
View, Split Plan, and 3D Full View. Using 3D View you
can add colors and materials to the objects and entities
in your design, including walls, furniture, roofs,
walkways, and much, much more. See also 3D fly
around, 3D walk through, accessory, material.
3D walk through
A feature of Punch! 3D View that allows you to
move around and view your design as if you
were walking through it. You can establish
views from any angle and save views for future
use. See also 3D fly around view.
A
accessory
Decorative items such as drapes, shutters, or wall art
that you can place in Punch! 3D View. Accessories are
designed to track the walls, meaning they can only be
placed on wall segments and will move with those
walls.
annotation
A drawing component that gives information about the
drawing. Examples of annotations include dimensions,
text, and leaders.
arc
An entity consisting of two points connected by
a gradually curved segment. Arcs can be used
to create interior and exterior walls, staircases,
railings, property and boundary lines, pathways, and
driveways as well as retaining walls. See also circular
arc, detail tab, circle, oval, polygon, polylines,
rectangle, square, multigon, curve.
AutoClick Placement
C
cased opening
A door-shaped opening in a wall, which is framed like a
doorway.
center point
A center point is a point within a circle, from which the
radius and equidistance can be determined. See also
circle, curve.
circle
A geometric entity defined by a center point and
a radius. Punch! allows you to convert circles to
walls, floors, decks, and topographical objects
such as retaining walls and ground fill areas. A circle
differs from an oval in that a circles points are
equidistant from the center point. See also curve, arc,
circular arc, oval, polygon, polylines, rectangle, square,
multigon.
circular arc
An entity consisting of a segment between two
points on a circle. Circular arcs can be converted
into interior and exterior walls, staircases,
railings, property and boundary lines, pathways, and
driveways, as well as retaining walls and many more
components. See also arc, detail tab, circle, oval,
polygon, polylines, rectangle, square, multigon, curve.
ClearView
A feature of Punch! 3D View that allows you to display
your project in a semi-transparent mode. ClearView
allows you to see nearby surfaces, even while items or
surfaces behind them are also visible.
clipboard
A temporary storage area for data you have cut or
copied. A clipboard can only hold one item at a time.
See also paste, edit menu.
A feature of Punch! 3D View that allows you to quickly

add selected objects, plants, trim, colors, and materials
to your design with one click.
487
Glossary
codec
An acronym for Compression/Decompression, is a
program that analyzes large files and programs for
repetition and redundancies. When found, they are
replaced with a formula to reduce or compress the
number of bytes the file or program consumes when
stored. When the file or program is open or recalled,
the formula activates or decompresses the information
so it appears as it was originally. See also, animator.
color ramp
A color selection method in
which you choose a color
from a spectrum organized
by shade and hue, then
use the color library to find
the correct shade. Colors
are displayed from light to
dark.
dollhouse view
See 3D cutaway slider.
door header
See header.
dormer
A small window set vertically into smaller roof sections
that protrude from the main roofline. See also gable
roof, gambrel roof, hip roof, roof pitch.
drag-and-drop
Drag-and-drop is a manual action performed using
your mouse, to move an object or entity from one
location to another. You select the object or entity,
press and hold your left mouse button, then drag your
mouse to the desired location and release the mouse
button to drop the object.
drawing scale
The ratio between the size of your drawing screen and
the real-world object you are drawing. Higher values on
the screen units side make it easier to draw small
details. Higher values on the world units side make it
easier to draw large details. Also called plan scale.
compass
A feature that allows you to orient your design to north.
You can establish the true north setting for your design,
which will affect the position of the sun and the
shadows, as well as determine the best location for a
deck, pool, or large windows. See also true north.
component
A representation of a real-world item such as a door,
or window. Components are available on the various
plan toolbars. Typically different styles are available
and properties can be edited on the Properties tab.
content
Realistic 3D features such as drapes, wainscoting,
furniture, paint, and other real-world items that can be
viewed in your 3D View window.
DWG
The binary file format used by AutoCAD.
DXF
An ASCII- or binary-based file format developed by
Autodesk, Inc. and widely supported by CAD
programs.
curve
A geometric entity consisting of a smoothly
sloping segment. Punch! allows you to create
curves and convert them to walls, floors, decks,
and topographical objects such as retaining walls and
ground fill areas. See also circle, arc, circular arc, oval,
polygon, polylines, rectangle, square, multigon.
curve tension
The amount of slope in a curved segment. Curve
Tension is measured between 1 and 50, with 1
equaling only a slightly curved segment, and 50
equaling a greatly-exaggerated curve.
E
elevation
A measurement that describes an object or entitys
distance above or below the working level.
Topographic elevation refers to an object or entitys
distance above or below sea level. Punch! allows you
to control the elevation of everything, from your
foundation to a window or light switch.
ellipse
See oval.
entity
Decorator Palette
A 3D View feature that allows you to organize and store
colors and materials for your 3D design.
diameter
A geometric measurement that describes the distance,
through the center, between points on a circle. See
also circle.
dimension
An annotation that describes the length, width, or
height of an object or entity.
2D items such as lines, arcs, and circles that have not

been assigned properties and do not display in 3D. See
also object.
extrude
To convert a two-dimensional shape into a threedimensional object by giving the object depth. Extrude
is available in 3D Custom Workshop.
grid
A visual drawing aid consisting of evenly spaced
horizontal and vertical lines. In 2D plan view, grids are
always oriented on the ground. 3D grids allow you to
draw on the front or sides (lateral) of an object. See
also Snap to Grid.
fill
Punch! defines the term fill in two separate contexts.
When drawing geometric entities, fill refers a solid
color or hatch pattern that is displayed inside of a
closed entity, such as a rectangle or circle. When
drawing topography objects, fill is a man-made
deposit of natural soils or rock products and waste
materials used to raise an area of land or to provide a
bed for plants or a pool.
H
header
A structural element above a door or window that
transfers stress to the load-bearing studs on either side
of the opening.
flip
An editing feature that allows you to select an object or
shape and reverse it horizontally or vertically.
hip roof
A roof defined by four sloped planes meeting at
a ridge peak. A hip roof is supported by hip
rafters at each of the four corners. See also
dormer, gable roof, gambrel roof, roof pitch.
floor cutout
An opening in the floor used to allow stair access or to
create a loft.
fly around
See 3D fly around.
hvac
An acronym for heating, ventilation, and airconditioning. A construction term that refers to objects
associated with temperature control and air flow
throughout a building, such as air ducts, air
conditioners, furnaces, and so on.
foundation
An architectural structure that transmits loads from a
building to the underlying ground. It supports the weight
of the building and provides stability.
framing beam
See beam.
free rotate
J
join
An editing procedure in which two arcs, lines, or
polylines, whose end points are nearby, are converted
into a single entity. See join sensitivity.
An editing feature that allows you to rotate an object or

entity, by clicking and dragging.
join sensitivity
A setting that determines the acceptable distance
between the end points of two entities, before they can
be joined.
gable roof
A roof defined by two evenly sloped planes of
equal lengths meeting at a ridge peak. The
sloped sides are supported by two equallysized triangular wall extensions, known as gables. See
also dormer, gambrel roof, hip roof, roof pitch.
joist
A structural element that runs horizontally in support of
ceiling or floor. A joist is typically supported by a beam.
See beam, rafter.
gambrel roof
A roof defined by four pitches, two on each side. The
bottom slopes of each side are more steep than the top
slopes. Gambrel roofs are common on barns. See also
dormer, gable roof, hip roof, roof pitch.
L
line
A geometric entity consisting of two points,
connected by a straight segment. Punch! lets
you use lines to define property boundaries,
animation paths, and so on. Walls and other objects
may be comprised of lines with additional properties,
such as width and height. See also arcs, circles, ovals,
polygons, polylines, rectangles, squares.
M
material
A material is a textured or decorated representation
that affects an object or components appearance.
Brick, stone, carpet, fabric, wood, and grass are all
examples of materials Punch! offers to enhance and
customize your design. See also color tab, paint tab.
489
Glossary
mirror
animation paths, and so on. Walls and other objects

may be comprised of lines with additional properties,
such as width and height. See also arcs, circles,
multigons, polylines, rectangles, squares.
An editing feature that allows you to select an object or

shape and place a horizontally or vertically reversed
copy of it.
multigon
A geometric entity consisting of multiple vertices,
connected by straight line segments. Punch!
allows you to convert multigons to walls, floors,
decks, stairs, railings, and topographical objects, such
as retaining walls and ground fill areas. Also called a
polygon. See also arc, circle, oval, polylines, rectangle,
square, curve, detail tab.
P
palette
A collection of colors and materials you choose and
organize, based on your design needs. Creating a
palette is very helpful when working with and applying
a variety of colors and materials throughout your
design, because you can organize the contents into
groups and name each group, based on where it
belongs in your design. See also 3D View.
N
notation
An annotation in the form of text, that can be used as a
label, reminder, or description. You may include any
type of information you want for yourself or anyone
viewing your design.
pan tool
A viewing tool that lets you scroll, horizontally or
vertically, over your design. See also zoom tool.
plan view
A 2D representation of a design in which the drawing is
viewed from above.
nudge
An editing feature that allows you to use the arrow keys
to move a selection one grid unit to the left, right, top,
or bottom. When Snap to Grid is turned off, Nudge
moves the object or feature one pixel at a time, instead
of one grid unit. See also grid, Snap to Grid.
plan scale
See drawing scale.
PlantFinder
A sorting feature that allows you to display only plants
that meet your criteria. For instance, you can use the
PlantFinder to narrow the offerings to only those plants
that require only minimal sunlight.
O
object
A representation of a real-world item available from
the Furnishings library. An object may be comprised of
entities, such as lines, circles, and polylines in 2D, but
in 3D View, the object will be displayed as a realistic
item. See also entity.
polygon
See multigon.
PowerTool
An add-on application that allows you to enhance your
Punch! project.
object selection mode

An editing feature that allows you to control the size
and location of an entire object. Using object selection
mode, you can modify the size and location, without
affecting the proportion. See also point selection mode.
proxy settings
A virtual buffer between your computer and the
information you are accessing on the Internet. Proxy
settings can be customized to restrict your computer
from certain information.
offset dimension
An annotation consisting of a length dimension that
appears at a specific distance from the object or
component it is measuring.
opacity
A measure of an objects transparency. The more
opaque an object is, the less transparent it is. See also
translucent, transparent.
organizer
A file management feature that allows you to create
custom categories to sort and store templates in some
of the PowerTools. This is useful when working with
different designs and while working with an assortment
of templates.
oval
A geometric entity consisting of a closed curve
that resembles a flattened circle. Punch! lets you
use ovals to define property boundaries,
R
rafter
A structural element that extends from the top of a wall
to the ridge peak and supports a roof.
rectangle
A geometric entity consisting of four points,
connected by four straight line segments. Punch!
allows you to convert rectangles to walls, floors,
as retaining walls and ground fill areas. See also arc,
circle, oval, multigon, polyline, multigon, square, curve,
detail tab.
redo
To reverse the effects of an undo command. See also
undo.
reference grid
See grid.
rim joist
A structural element that ties the ends of floor trusses
together. See also framing beam, beam.
template
See room template.
texture
A material surface, such as wood or brick, applied to a
3D wall or object. See also material.
roof pitch
The angle of a roof commonly expressed as a ratio of
vertical rise to horizontal run. A pitch of 8:12 means that
the roof rises 8 for 12 of horizontal run.
translucent
A characteristic of a material or object that describes
lights ability to pass through it. Translucency differs
from transparency in that a transparent object, such as
clear glass, can be seen through, while a translucent
object, such as frosted glass, only allows light to pass
through. See also transparent, opacity.
room template
A pre-drawn design, for a kitchen, bath, or other room,
that you can place in your drawing, then customize to
fit your own design.
transparent
A characteristic of a material or object that describes

your ability to see through it. See also translucent,
opacity.
saltbox roof
A roof defined by two evenly sloped planes of unequal
lengths meeting at a ridge peak. The sloped sides are
supported by two irregularly-sized triangular wall
extensions. See also dormer, gable roof, gambrel roof,
hip roof, roof pitch.
true north
A navigational term referring to the direction of the
North Pole relative to the navigators position. See also
compass.
truss
A structural element that helps support a roof, top floor,
or beam. A truss is designed in a triangular shape. See
also, beam, joist.
U
undo
scale
See drawing scale.
Snap to Grid
An editing feature that allows you to place items at
regular points in your drawing. When Snap to Grid is
turned on, items that are placed in the design window
are automatically snapped, or placed, to align with the
current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is turned on.
square
A polygon in which all four sides are of equal length.
Punch! allows you to convert squares to walls, floors,
as retaining walls and ground fill areas. See also arc,
circle, curve, detail tab, oval, multigon, polyline,
rectangle.
stud
A structural element that runs vertically in support of
the walls. See also framing beam, joists.
symbol
2D representations of 3D objects such as furniture,
doors, or electrical outlets.
To reverse the effects of the most recent draw or edit

operation. Punch! allows you to undo up to 50
operations. See also undo parameters.
undo parameters
A setting that allows you to determine the number of
operations you can undo. Punch! allows you to undo up
to 50 operations; however, higher values may impact
performance.
unit of measurement
The notation system used to enter and display
distances, angles, and areas. Punch! allows you to
select either English, to display measurements using
feet and inches, or Metric, to display measurements
using meters.
URL
An acronym for Uniform Resource Locator, which
specifies a websites unique address. Typically, URLs
are prefaced by http://www.
USDA zone maps

A method for determining hardiness zones. Hardiness
zones are determined based on average temperature
and amount of sunlight.
491
Glossary
zoom tool
A viewing tool that allows you to magnify your
drawing.
V
virtual ruler
A visual drawing aid that allows you to determine
lengths, in feet and inches. The virtual ruler can be
positioned in any way and extended to reach from one
end of a design to the other.
VRML
Virtual Reality Modeling Language, a standard file
format for representing 3D objects on the World Wide
Web.
W
wainscoting
A decorative interior wall surface, typically made of
wood, that contrasts with the wall surface above it.
walk-through
See 3D walk through.
window grill
The vertical and horizontal strips in a window that
separate the panes of glass. Punch! allows you to
customize your window grill style, so your window has
one large piece of glass, or multiple panes.
window header
See header.
window molding
The wood casing around the outside of a window
opening.
working elevation
See elevation.
working floor
A working floor is a term that
describes which level of your
design you are currently working
on.
Z
zone map
See USDA zone map.
zoom factor
A setting that allows you to control how much
magnification is applied each time you click the zoom
tool.
Index
Numerics
2D objects, convert to 3D (3D Custom Workshop) 466
2D view 41
pan 42
reset view 42
viewing options (3D Custom Workshop)
480
zoom 42
3D animation path 288
3D Custom Workshop
AutoClick Placement 460
Decorator Palette 461
floor grid 435
front grid 435
save objects to library 432
side grid 436
3D render
effects 284
3D selection tool 47
3D view 43
camera angle 274
cutaway slider 45
fly-around 272
in QuickStart 107
lighting intensity (3D Custom Workshop)
482
lighting intensity (Fireplace Wizard) 337

print 37
save view 295
shadows, adding 287
show/hide ceiling (QuickStart) 108
viewing speed 275
visible components 294
walk-through 271
3-point freehand roof tool 185
4-point freehand roof tool 185
A
access QuickPalette 95
accessories, windows 138

add point 241
addition, place automatically 123
aerial view, elevation 272
age, customizing plant 85
air conditioner, adding 197
air ducts, adding 193
align text 58
angled text 57
animation path 288
annotations 56
apply
materials 91
materials (3D Custom Workshop) 457
paint colors 87
arc
circular (3D Custom Workshop) 452
drawing in 2D 235
open arc (3D Custom Workshop) 451
auto activate tool options 27
Auto Reset Tools (Door Designer) 303
Auto Reset Tools (Window Designer) 311
auto roof
in QuickStart 108
on/off 182
auto-ceiling
in Ceiling Designer 318
on/off 122
AutoClick Placement (3D Custom Workshop)
460
Auto-Elevate (Ceiling Designer) 323

auto-floor, on and off 122
automatic dimensioning
change font 65
turning off 63
automatic pool cleaner, adding (Pool Designer)
358
automation touch-panel, adding 167

auto-snap
493
Index
on/off 54
options 53
B
back view (3D Custom Workshop) 482
backup generator panel, adding 168
backup generator, adding 168
barrel ceiling (Ceiling Designer) 320
base elevation, floors 145
base trim 86
baseboard heater 198
basic terminology 15
basketball goal, adding (Pool Designer) 363
bathroom (QuickStart) 107
bathtubs, adding 176
battery power supply, adding 170
bay wall 115
beam
stiffener (foundation) 111
beam (framing)
material type 246
size 246
bedroom (QuickStart) 107
blinds 138
blur factor (depth of field) 283
bottom view (3D Custom Workshop) 482
break a wall 124
bring to front 240
inPhotoView Editor 385
build green 29
C
cable jack 157
calculate pool volume (Pool Designer) 352
calculating construction costs 392
calculating square footage 266
camera (PhotoView) 381
camera angle 274
in 3D Custom Workshop 482
ceiling
auto-ceiling in Ceiling Designer 318
auto-ceiling on/off 122
ceiling beam (Ceiling Designer) 320
ceiling cutout (Ceiling Designer) 319
Ceiling Designer
3D render style 324
creating new 318
lighting intensity 325
navigation speed 324
organize templates 325

show/hide 3D components 324
ceiling elevations, define (Ceiling Designer) 323
ceiling fan, adding 156
ceiling height, setting 145
ceiling speaker, adding 162
chain-linked fence (Fence Designer) 372
chamfer 241
in Door Designer 305
in Mantel Designer 342
in Window Designer 313
chimney dimensions (Fireplace Wizard) 335
chlorinator, adding (Pool Designer) 360
circle
drawing in 2D 234
circular arc
drawing in 2D 236
drawing in 3D Custom Workshop 452
circular closed arc
ClearView
ClearView render style 275
clipboard, copy/paste 255
closed arc
closet (QuickStart) 107
color
adding (Fence Designer) 377
controlling in 3D Custom Workshop 484
plan layer 67
printing plan in color 35
reset all 68
search in 3D Custom Workshop 461
color ramp 88
color scheme, interface 28
colors, controlling (3D Custom Workshop) 484
column
adding 143
adding support column (framing) 248
cap, shaft, base properties 144
edit size 144
material, customizing (framing) 248
size, specifying (framing) 248
construction costs, calculating (Estimator) 392
construction materials (RealModel) 297
content folder 383
context-sensitive help 15
context-sensitive videos 16
contour render style 278
convert, degrees to radians (3D Custom Workshop) 467
copy to clipboard 255
copying objects between floors 260
create ceiling category (Ceiling Designer) 326
create mantel category (Mantel Designer) 344
create template, ceiling (Ceiling Designer) 328
crown trim
adding 86
remove 87
crown trim, remove 87
cursor dimension, on and off 63
curtains 138
curve
drawing in 2D 237
curve tension 238
curved edging (landscape) 220
curved wall 115
custom color palette
in Fireplace Wizard 336
custom color, adding (Fence Designer) 377
customizing spreadsheet colors (Estimator) 390
cutaway slider 45
cutout
ceiling (Ceiling Designer) 319
floor 137
roof 188
D
deactivate undo 255
deck
add steps 204
deck cut-out 207
deck height 204
handrail height 204
handrails include/remove 204
railings, adding 205
skirt trim 204
staircase, editing 207
step height 205
deck plan tab 201
deck properties 250
decorator palette 291

default ceiling height 145
default colors and materials 96
default views (Fireplace Wizard) 337
define ceiling elevations (Ceiling Designer) 323
delete point 241
dental face (Mantel Designer) 340
depth of field 283
depth, pool (Pool Designer) 350
design options 268
detail plan tab 233
details
creating (Section Detailer) 401
link properties (Section Detailer) 401
opening (Section Detailer) 401
detect all (3D Custom Workshop) 470
diameter dimension 61
digital picture, importing (PhotoView) 381
dimension increment, defining (Fireplace Wizard) 331
dimensions
adding between walls 59
change endpoint 59
hiding tiered exterior measurements 63
hiding, measurement indicators 59
room area 59
room dimensions 59
show, measurement indicators 59
walls 63
windows and doors 63
dimensions, display (Fence Designer) 376
dining room (QuickStart) 107
displacement 284
display settings 18
diving board, adding (Pool Designer) 363
dollhouse view 45
dome camera, adding 163
dome ceiling (Ceiling Designer) 320
Door Designer 303
doors 125
hiding dimensions 59
organizing doors (Door Designer) 307
dormer, adding to roof 186
drag-and-drop
artwork 77
495
Index
objects 74
wall accessories 77
drain
adding (Pool Designer) 359
floor, adding 172
drapes 138
drawing from center
in 3D Custom Workshop 441, 466
drawing from corner
in Section Detailer 412
in Symbol Editor 426
drawing mantel shapes 340
drawing precision (Door Designer) 306
drawing scale 263
drawing shapes in 3D Custom Workshop 441
driveway 218
ducts, adding 193
duplicate properties (3D Custom Workshop)
475
duplicating
E
edging 220
flip direction 220
style 220
vary heights 220
edit
2D drawing 255
3D objects 75
3D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 463
ceilings (Ceiling Designer) 322
material perspective (PhotoView Editor) 386
edit toolbar 26
electrical plan tab 149
elevate
entire floor 258
objects 258
to an existing surface 258
Elevation Bar 258
elevation, aerial view 272
ellipses, see drawing circles and ovals 234
enclosing, 2D objects (3D Custom Workshop)
456
english units 264

Estimator 389
excavate topography 232
existing files, opening 31
exiting 32
export
a pricelist (Estimator) 393
fireplace to 3D Custom Workshop (Fireplace Wizard) 338
mantel to 3D Custom Workshop (Mantel
Designer) 346
exterior wall length, resize 120
extra scene lighting 287
extruding, 2D objects (3D Custom Workshop)
466
F
face dimensions (Fireplace Wizard) 332
family room (QuickStart) 107
fan, ceiling 156
features, moving between plans 261
Fence Designer 371
adding colors and materials 377
fence properties
picket (Fence Designer) 374
privacy (Fence Designer) 375
rail (Fence Designer) 375
fences
change style 223
drawing 222
resizing (Fence Designer) 376
styles (Fence Designer) 372
file format (PhotoView) 381
files
new 31
opening 31
printing 35
saving 33
fill region 211
fillet 241
fills
reshaping fill region 211
filter downloaded content 27
filter selections 55
find applied tool 90
firebox dimensions (Fireplace Wizard) 332

fireplace dimensions (Fireplace Wizard) 331
fireplace properties and dimensions (Fireplace
Wizard) 332
flat roof 189
flat screen television, adding 160
flip
in Trim Designer 398
PhotoView image 383
flip entire plan 262
floating thermometer, adding (Pool Designer)
360
flood lights, adding 153

floor cutout, drawing 137
floor drains 172
floor grid (3D Custom Workshop) 435
floor plan tab 115
Floor Plan Trace 267
floor slab/joist thickness 145
floor speaker, adding 162
flooring
drawing 136
joists 246
floors
add bottom floor 147
add top floor 147
base elevation 145
delete floor 147
edit floor properties 145
insert new 147
flowers, adding 78
fly-around
center of reference 272
speed 275
follow topography 259
foundation (framing)
joist size 251
material 251
foundation piers 112
four-point freehand roof tool 185
framing beam 245

framing material 249
foundation 251
framing render style 275
free rotate 257
freehand roof tool 184
freeze detector, adding 169
front grid (3D Custom Workshop) 435
front view (3D Custom Workshop) 482
furniture, adding 74
G
gable ceiling (Ceiling Designer) 320
gambrel roof 191
garage (QuickStart) 107
gas bib 171
gates 222
resizing (Fence Designer) 376
glass break detector
ceiling, adding 165
wall, adding 164
going green 29
gradient fill
green tips 29
grid
settings 52
settings (3D Custom Workshop) 436
settings (Section Detailer) 412
settings (Symbol Editor) 426
show/hide grid 52
show/hide grid (Section Detailer) 413
show/hide grid (Symbol Editor) 426
snap grid 52
ground fill region 211
grouped apply (3D Custom Workshop) 458
grouping objects (3D Custom Workshop) 470
growing plants 85
H
hallway (QuickStart) 107
hand rails, adding (Pool Designer) 354
hardiness zone maps 82
hatch render style 278
hearth
dimensions (Fireplace Wizard) 333
include/exclude (Fireplace Wizard) 333
497
Index
heat detector, adding 166

heat pump, adding 197
heating units, adding 197
hide cutaway slider 46
hide detection (3D Custom Workshop) 470
hide features in 3D 295
hide Floor Plan Trace image 268
hide layers (3D Custom Workshop) 472
hide plan layers 41
hide room name 59
hip ceiling (Ceiling Designer) 320
home plans, sample 31, 109
home security, adding 163
home theater, adding 160
hose bib, adding 171
hot water heater, adding 179
how to estimate materials needed 392
How-To Center 17
hvac tab 193
I
identify color, material, plant in 3D 90
import
Floor Plan Trace 267
image 342
image (Fence Designer) 377
image (PhotoView) 381
materials 92
objects 33
POB file 33
insert new floor 147
insert PhotoView image 381
insert point (Mantel Designer) 342
installing software 14
insulation, wall 249
intensity, lighting
in Pool Designer 367
intercom, adding 169
interface color scheme 28
interrupt rendering 277
inverse fillet 241
J
jacks, phone and cable 157
join sensitivity (Door Designer) 306

join shapes
in Door Designer 305, 313
joist (framing)
angle 247
material type 247
rim-joist 247
size 247
spacing 247
K
kitchen (QuickStart) 107
L
label leader dimension 62
ladder (Pool Designer)
with steps 352
without steps 353
landscape plan tab 209
Landscape Quote 86
landscape, designing 209
laser alignment on/off 55
laundry room (QuickStart) 107
layers
hiding (3D Custom Workshop) 471, 472
renaming (3D Custom Workshop) 471
working in layers (3D Custom Workshop)
471
working with (3D Custom Workshop) 471

leader dimension 61
edit label text 62
endpoint style 62
label text alignment 62
leader type 62
update object label 62
leaf skimmer, adding (Pool Designer) 360
left view (3D Custom Workshop) 482
length dimension 61
libraries tab 27
library paneling 86
remove 87
lighting
adding (Fireplace Wizard) 337
adding interior 153
adding outdoor 286
adding outdoor (Pool Designer) 366
adjusting ambient light (outdoor) 286
adjusting ambient light(outdoor) 286
adjusting intensity (3D Custom Workshop)
482
adjusting intensity (Fireplace Wizard) 337

adjusting intensity (Mantel Designer) 343
adjusting intensity (outdoor) 286
adjusting intensity (outdoor) (Pool Designer) 367
adjusting suns shadow (outdoor) 286
all fixtures on or off 287
daytime (outdoor) 286
nighttime (outdoor) 286
line
style 239
weight 239
line, drawing in 2D 234
liner broom, adding (Pool Designer) 362
liner vacuum, adding (Pool Designer) 361
link properties (Section Detailer) 401
living room (QuickStart) 107
load bearing wall 249
locate plant 83
lock objects (3D Custom Workshop) 470
log home components 77
Lot Properties 265
M
mantel
dental face (Mantel Designer) 340
dimensions (Fireplace Wizard) 334
include (Fireplace Wizard) 334
projection (Mantel Designer) 343
shape (Mantel Designer) 340
manual activate tool options 27
marker leader dimension 62
master bedroom (QuickStart) 107
master pricelist, creating in Estimator 392
matching apply (3D Custom Workshop) 458
matching scale (Floor Plan Trace) 267
material, printing template (RealModel) 299
materials
apply (3D Custom Workshop) 457
applying 91
attaching (RealModel) 300
estimations (Estimator) 392
import 92
search in 3D Custom Workshop 461
measurement tools 25
measurements, using the Virtual Ruler 66

menu bar 24
metric units 264
mirror
mirror (3D Custom Workshop) 474
modifying staircases 132
mosaic render style 278
motion detector, adding 164
move to back (QuickStart) 107
move to front (QuickStart) 107
move, entire plan 261
moving
features between plans 261
objects 256
objects between floors 260
multigon
drawing in 2D 237
N
network router, adding 167
new category, ceiling (Ceiling Designer) 326
new category, mantel (Mantel Designer) 344
normal apply (3D Custom Workshop) 458
notations 56
nudge 256
O
object-level editing 241
objects 74
converting 2D to 3D (3D Custom Workshop) 466
copying 260
copying between floors 260
editing 75
elevating 258
moving 256
moving between floors 260
moving by coordinates 256
printing (3D Custom Workshop) 434
renaming 75
rotating 257
rotating (3D Custom Workshop) 469
499
Index
rotating (Pool Designer) 366

selecting (3D Custom Workshop) 463
selecting (Section Detailer) 412
selecting (Symbol Editor) 426
specifying 3D size (3D Custom Workshop)
470
office (QuickStart) 107

offset dimension 60
oil painting render style 278
opacity, in ClearView 276
open arc
open staircases 132
opening a file (3D Custom Workshop) 431
organize decorator palettes 293
organize templates (Mantel Designer) 343
ornamental iron fence (Fence Designer) 372
orthographic (3D Custom Workshop) 477
outdoor cabinet 214
hardware, add or remove 217
outdoor hose bib 171
oval
drawing in 2D 234
P
paint color, applying 87
pan (3D Custom Workshop) 477
pan tool 42
panning, 2D view 42
parameters, undo 255
paste from clipboard 255
pathway 218
change width 219
patio
draw 213
edit 213
perspective (3D Custom Workshop) 477
perspective editing (PhotoView Editor) 386
phone jack 157
photo beam, adding 165
photocell, adding 168
photograph (PhotoView) 381
Photo-Realistic
lighting 287
rendering effects 282
rendering styles 278
PhotoView 381
file format 381

tips for using 381
PhotoView Editor 385
pi radian (3D Custom Workshop) 467
picket fence (Fence Designer) 372
properties 374
picture of my home (PhotoView) 384
piers, foundation 112
plan layer
show/hide 41
viewing 43
plan tabs 24
plan, views 41
planar mapping 460
plane, drawing in 3D Custom Workshop 454
PlantFinder 82
plants
adding 78
customizing age 85
edit plant description and requirements 80
find by name 84
growth meter 85
inventory bar display 81
locate on Preview Bar 83
sorting/filtering 82
view plant description and requirements 80
plotter 35
plumbing tab 171
point-level editing 241
polygon
drawing in 2D 235
pond, adding 211
pool
accessories, adding (Pool Designer) 362
depth (Pool Designer) 350
equipment, adding (Pool Designer) 357
options (Pool Designer) 352
pre-built steps, adding (Pool Designer) 357
shape (Pool Designer) 349
support system, adding (Pool Designer) 358
template, create (Pool Designer) 370
volume (Pool Designer) 352
Pool Wizard 347
preview bar 28
preview speed, setting (Animator) 289
print
3D view 37
floorplans (3D Custom Workshop) 434
large-scale drawing 37
pricelist (Estimator) 393
print templates (RealModel) 298
printing drawing in color 35
printing floor plans 35
privacy fence (Fence Designer) 372
privacy fence properties (Fence Designer) 375
project setup 105
ProjecTape 72
projection, mantel shape (Mantel Designer) 343
properties tab 27
property line
define coordinates 209
drawing manually 209
pumps (heat), adding 197
Q
QuickPalette
access 95
active palette 96
apply palette 95
create new palette 97
customize palette 97
delete palette 97
rename palette 97
QuickStart
display at startup 103
QuickStart 59 second video 104
R
radians (3D Custom Workshop) 467
radiator, adding 198
rafter properties 249
rail fence (Fence Designer) 372
properties 375
railings
adding 134
deck railing, adding 205
modifying 135
RealModel 271, 297
attaching template textures & colors 300
scale 298
recently opened files 31
rectangle
drawing in 2D 233

redo 255
reference grid 52
reflectivity 284
region, fill 211
registers, adding 194
remove
deck handrails 204
point 241
trim 86
wall trim 87
remove wall trim 87
rename floor 145
render final quality (3D Custom Workshop) 478
rendering
adjust render quality 277
Photo-Realistic effects 282
Photo-Realistic styles 278
printing in (3D Custom Workshop) 434
render options 281
render options (QuickStart) 108
stop process 277
styles, 3D render 275
replacing PhotoView image 383
reposition floors 145
requirements, system 13
resetting 2D view 42
reshape
add point 241
add points (Door Designer) 305
add points (Window Designer) 313
ceiling (Ceiling Designer) 322
fill 211
mantel (Mantel Designer) 340
remove point 241
remove points (Door Designer) 305
resizing
bathtubs 176, 177
exterior wall 120
fences (Fence Designer) 376
gates (Fence Designer) 376
objects 75
PhotoView image 383
tubs 177
retaining wall
adding 224
501
Chapter
height 225
revolving, 2D objects (3D Custom Workshop)
467
right view (3D Custom Workshop) 482

roof
auto-generate (QuickStart) 108
constructing templates (RealModel) 299
cutout 188
dormer, adding 186
drawing a roof 182
freehand tool 184
gambrel 191
gambrel style 191
pitch, change 189
roof (framing)
rafter material 249
rafter size 249
rafter spacing 249
truss spacing 249
roofing tab 181
room addition, adding 123
room name label 59
default font 63
room templates 99
room view 272
room visibility (QuickStart) 107
rotate 257
1-degree increment 257
3D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 469
entire 2D plan 261
specified amount 257
rotated text 57
rotation origin visible (3D Custom Workshop)
484
S
sample plans 31, 109
satellite dish, adding 161
satellite receiver, adding 161
save 3D view 295
save as 33
save object to library (3D Custom Workshop)
432
saved 3D views 296

saving files 33
scale, defining (RealModel) 298
scanned image, importing (PhotoView) 381
screen colors 67
Section Detailer 401
security
security access keypad (pedestal), adding
166
security access keypad (wall), adding 166

security camera, adding 163
security contact, adding 164
security control panel, adding 165
security keypad, adding 165
selecting in 3D 47
selection filter 55
selection mode (3D Custom Workshop) 463
selection, rotating 257
send to back 240
in PhotoView Editor 385
serial number 20
setting a nudge distance (3D Custom Workshop) 437, 472
settings, display 18
setup project 105
shadd render style
Photo-Realistic 278
shaded render style 275
shadows, adding 286, 287
in Pool Designer 366
shape projection (Mantel Designer) 343
shape, mantel (Mantel Designer) 340
shape, pool (Pool Designer) 349
show Floor Plan Trace image 268
show plan layers 41
show QuickStart at startup 104
show room name 59
show topography lines 42
showers, adding 177
shrubs, adding 78
side grid (3D Custom Workshop) 436
sidewalk 218
sinks
adding 174
editing 175
size, 3D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 470
skewing objects (3D Custom Workshop) 468
skirt trim (deck) 204
skylight 190
slab foundation 113

slide, adding (Pool Designer) 364
SmartWand 94
smoke detector, adding 158
snap grid 52
snap grid, on and off
snap grid, on and off (3D Custom Workshop)
437
snap options 53
snaps
alignment 54
auto snap on/off 54
detection radius 55
intersections 54
object center 54
on segment 54
segment center 54
snap points (Door Designer) 306
software updates 18
speed
fly-around 275
walk through 275
speed tips 18
split 2D/3D view 44
sprinkler heads, placing 225
square
drawing in 2D 233
square footage, calculating 266
staircases
adding 130
deck, adding 205
deck, modifying 207
framing material 250
modifying 132
open riser 132
startup
in design window 103
in QuickStart 103
status bar 28
steps
deck, adding 204
deck, changing height 205
pool, adding (Pool Designer) 355
pool, adding pre-built (Pool Designer) 357
stiffener beams 111

stipple render style 278
stop rendering 277
straight edging (landscape) 220
sunlight color 287
surface mapping 460
surface skimmer, adding (Pool Designer) 359
symbol categories
creating (Symbol Editor) 417
deleting (Symbol Editor) 417
renaming (Symbol Editor) 417
Symbol Editor 417
symbols
creating (Symbol Editor) 417
moving (Symbol Editor) 417
symbols, 2D 76
system requirements 13
system settings 14
T
tabs
deck plan 201
detail plan 233
electrical plan 149
floor plan 115
foundation 111
hvac 193
landscape plan 209
plumbing 171
roofing 181
template
new category (Ceiling Designer) 326
new category (Mantel Designer) 344
organize (Mantel Designer) 343
printing textures (RealModel) 299
room template 99
wall (RealModel) 298
text
adding 56
alignment 58
at an angle 57
formatting 58
text & dimension toolbar 26
texture, attaching (RealModel) 300
textured view (3D Custom Workshop) 478
three-point freehand roof tool 185
tips & tricks 17
503
Chapter
title bar 23
toilets
adding 173
editing 173
tool options 27
toolbars 24
tools, measurement 25
top view (3D Custom Workshop) 482
topography lines, show 42
trace image (Mantel Designer) 342
tracing, floor plan 267, 268
tracking, constraining (Door Designer) 306
Training Center 17
translucency (3D Custom Workshop) 478
trees, adding 78
trim categories
creating (Trim Designer) 395
deleting (Trim Designer) 395
renaming (Trim Designer) 395
Trim Designer 395
trim, remove 86
trims
creating (Trim Designer) 395
deleting (Trim Designer) 395
importing (Trim Designer) 395
moving (Trim Designer) 395
tubs
adding 176
editing 176
turn off auto roof generation 182
two colors on one wall 124
U
undo 255
undo parameters 255
unit of measurement 264
update 3D view 295
update room finishes 95
update topography grid 266
updates, software 18
USDA zone maps 82
V
vents, adding 194
version number 20
video projector, adding 160
Videos 17
view
2D plan only 41
2D view (3D Custom Workshop) 480
3D camera angle 274
3D fly-around 272
3D navigation 271
adding shadows 287
adjusting lighting (Pool Designer) 367
aerial 272
all floors in 2D 41
birds eye 272
ClearView (3D Custom Workshop) 478
controlling 2D/3D 41
final quality (3D Custom Workshop) 478
perspective/orthographic (3D Custom
Workshop) 477
split 2D/3D 44
textured (3D Custom Workshop) 478
translucency (3D Custom Workshop) 478
visible plans 41
wireframe (3D Custom Workshop) 478
working floor only 41
View icons 25
viewpoint angle 46
virtual ruler, show or hide 66
visual array tool 98
volleyball net, adding (Pool Designer) 362
W
wainscot
adding 86
remove 87
wainscot, remove 87
walk-through
adjusting elevation 271
speed 275
view 271
wall
constructing templates (RealModel) 299
insulation 249
load bearing 249
properties (framing) 249
retaining wall 224
retaining wall height 225
wall break tool 124
wall heater 198
wall speaker, adding 161

wall trim, remove 87
walls, drawing 115
wall-spacing dimensions 59
water transparency (Pool Designer) 352
welcome window at startup 104
window accessories 138
window categories
creating (Window Designer) 314
deleting (Window Designer) 314
renaming (Window Designer) 314
Window Designer 311
window dimensions, hiding 59
window molding 86
windows 128
creating (Window Designer) 314
importing (Window Designer) 314
moving (Window Designer) 314
wireframe (3D Custom Workshop) 478
wireframe render style 275
wireframe, printing in (3D Custom Workshop)
434
working elevation, setting 263

working floor button 24
working floor, viewing 41
working in groups (3D Custom Workshop) 470
workshop object, resize 75
workspace boundary (Door Designer) 306
Z
zero-offset dimension 60
zoom (3D Custom Workshop) 477
zoom and pan toolbar 25
zoom factor 42
zoom tool 42
505
Chapter

PunchHomeHelp PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PunchHomeHelp PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Users Guide

Architect 3D Users Guide

Part 1: Nuts & Bolts 11

Before You Draw 31

Working with Floors 38

Architect 3D Users Guide

Creating New Templates 99

Part 2: From the Ground Up 101

Foundation Plan Tab 111

Floor Plan Tab 115

Electrical Plan Tab 151

4 Architect 3D Users Guide

Adding Home Theater Components 163

Plumbing Plan Tab 175

Roofing Plan Tab 185

HVAC Plan Tab 199

Deck Plan Tab

Adding a Deck 207

Landscape Plan Tab 215

Edging Properties 226

Detail Plan Tab 239

Framing Plan Tab 251

Part 3: Drawing and Design Settings

Rotate Entire Plan 267

Control Your Design 269

Control 3D Options 277

Part 4: Design & Drawing PowerTools

Architect 3D Users Guide

Controlling Drawing Settings 312

Window Designer 317

Ceiling Designer 323

Fireplace Wizard 335

Mantel Designer 345

6 Architect 3D Users Guide

Flipping & Mirroring Objects 348

Pool Designer 353

Fence Designer 377

Part 5: Enhancement & Customization

Editing Material Perspective 392

Drawing Parallel Segments 431

Part 6: 3D Custom Workshop 435

Trim Designer 401

Section Detailer 407

Symbol Editor 423

Opening File and Objects 437

Drawing 2D & 3D Entities 447

Editing 2D & 3D Objects 469

Controlling Views 483

Architect 3D Users Guide

Using Perspective or Orthographic 3D Views 483

8 Architect 3D Users Guide

Using Fly-Around 490

Architect 3D Users Guide

10 Architect 3D Users Guide

Nuts & Bolts

DXF/DWG Import and Export

Windows Vista or higher

Intel or compatible 1.0 GHz processor or higher (multi-core processors supported)

3.0 GB of Hard Disk Space

VGA Video Card displaying at least 1024x768 with 32-bit color

128 MB Video Card Memory

Internet access and Internet Service Provider account required